texlive[63291] Master/texmf-dist: msc (13may22)
commits+karl at tug.org
commits+karl at tug.org
Fri May 13 23:37:05 CEST 2022
Revision: 63291
http://tug.org/svn/texlive?view=revision&revision=63291
Author: karl
Date: 2022-05-13 23:37:05 +0200 (Fri, 13 May 2022)
Log Message:
-----------
msc (13may22)
Modified Paths:
--------------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/COPYRIGHT.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/msc/msc.sty
Added Paths:
-----------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/biblio.bib
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual-macros.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.tex
Removed Paths:
-------------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/msc/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/maintenance.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/maintenance.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/refman.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/refman.tex
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/COPYRIGHT.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/COPYRIGHT.txt 2022-05-13 21:35:58 UTC (rev 63290)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/COPYRIGHT.txt 2022-05-13 21:37:05 UTC (rev 63291)
@@ -1,8 +1,7 @@
%% MSC Macro Package
%% msc.sty
-%% June 2, 2008
%%
-%% Copyright 2008 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, and S. Mauw
+%% Copyright 2022 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, and S. Mauw
%
% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
@@ -14,18 +13,12 @@
%
% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is T. van Deursen.
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Reynaldo Gil Pons.
%
% This program consists of the files
% msc.sty
% manual.tex
-% manual.pdf
-% refman.tex
-% refman.pdf
+% manual_macros.tex
% biblio.bib
-% maintenance.tex
-% maintenance.pdf
-% README
-% COPYRIGHT
-
-
+% README.txt
+% COPYRIGHT.txt
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README 2022-05-13 21:35:58 UTC (rev 63290)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README 2022-05-13 21:37:05 UTC (rev 63291)
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-MSC Macro Package
------------------
-Version 1.16
-June 2, 2008
-
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-Copyright 2008 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, and S. Mauw
-
-This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2005/12/01 or later.
-
-This program consists of the files
- msc.sty
- manual.tex
- manual.pdf
- refman.tex
- refman.pdf
- biblio.bib
- maintenance.tex
- maintenance.pdf
- README
- COPYRIGHT
-
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-The MSC macro package is a LaTeX2e package to draw MSC diagrams. See
-user manual (manual.pdf) and reference manual (refman.pdf) for more
-information.
-
-Contact address:
-Ton van Deursen
-Universit\'e du Luxembourg
-Facult\'e des Sciences, de la Technologie et de la Communication
-6, rue Richard Coudenhove-Kalergi
-L-1359 Luxembourg
-Email: ton.vandeursen at uni.lu
-Updates via: http://satoss.uni.lu/mscpackage/
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README.txt (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README.txt 2022-05-13 21:37:05 UTC (rev 63291)
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+MSC Macro Package
+-----------------
+Version 2.00
+May 13, 2022
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+The MSC macro package is a LaTeX2e package to draw MSC diagrams. See
+user manual (manual.pdf) for more information.
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+Contact address:
+Reynaldo Gil Pons
+Université du Luxembourg
+Maison du Nombre
+6 Av. de la Fonte
+L-4364 Esch-sur-Alzette
+Email: reynaldo.gilpons at uni.lu
+Website: http://satoss.uni.lu/mscpackage/
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README.txt
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/biblio.bib
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/biblio.bib (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/biblio.bib 2022-05-13 21:37:05 UTC (rev 63291)
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+ at InProceedings{RudolphGrabowskiGraubmann96,
+ author = {E. Rudolph and P.Graubmann and J. Grabowski},
+ title = {Tutorial on Message Sequence Charts {(MSC'96})},
+ booktitle = {FORTE},
+ year = 1996
+}
+
+ at Booklet{z120,
+ title = {{ITU-TS} {R}ecommendation {Z.120}: {M}essage {S}equence {C}hart {(MSC)}},
+ author = {ITU-TS},
+ address = {Geneva},
+ year = 1997
+}
+
+ at Book{GSM97,
+ AUTHOR = {Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach},
+ TITLE = {{T}he {\LaTeX} {G}raphics {C}ompanion},
+ PUBLISHER = "Addison-Wesley",
+ YEAR = 1997
+}
+
+
+ at Book{Lam94,
+ author = {L. Lamport},
+ title = {{\LaTeX}---A Document Preparation System---User's Guide and Reference Manual},
+ publisher = {Adsison-Wesley},
+ year = 1994,
+ edition = {2nd},
+ note = {Updated for {\LaTeXe}}
+}
+
+ at Manual{BM02,
+ title = {A {\LaTeX{}} macro package for Message Sequence
+ Charts---Reference Manual---Describing {\mscpack}
+ version~{\mscversion}},
+ author = {V. Bos and T. van Deursen and S. Mauw},
+ year = {2010},
+ month = {December},
+ note = {Included in MSC macro package distribution}
+}
+
+ at Manual{BM02a,
+ title = {A {\LaTeX{}} macro package for Message Sequence
+ Charts---User Manual---Describing {\mscpack}
+ version~{\mscversion}},
+ author = {V. Bos and T. van Deursen and S. Mauw},
+ year = {2010},
+ month = {January},
+ note = {Included in MSC macro package distribution}
+}
+
+ at Manual{BM02b,
+ title = {A {\LaTeX{}} macro package for Message Sequence
+ Charts---Maintenance document---Describing {\mscpack}
+ version~{\mscversion}},
+ author = {V. Bos and T. van Deursen and S. Mauw},
+ year = {2010},
+ month = {January},
+ note = {Included in MSC macro package distribution}
+}
+
+ at article{mertz2007graphics,
+ title={Graphics with TikZ},
+ author={Mertz, Andrew and Slough, William},
+ journal={The PracTEX Journal},
+ volume={1},
+ year={2007}
+}
+
+ at manual{tantau2022pgf,
+ author = {Till Tantau},
+ title = {The TikZ and PGF Packages},
+ subtitle = {Manual for version 3.1.9a},
+ url = {https://github.com/pgf-tikz/pgf/releases/download/3.1.9a/pgfmanual-3.1.9a.pdf},
+ date = {2022-05-13},
+}
\ No newline at end of file
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/biblio.bib
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/maintenance.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/maintenance.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/maintenance.tex 2022-05-13 21:35:58 UTC (rev 63290)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/maintenance.tex 2022-05-13 21:37:05 UTC (rev 63291)
@@ -1,250 +0,0 @@
-% file: maintenance.tex
-% Copyright 2008 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, and S. Mauw
-% This file is part of the MSC Macro Package.
-%
-\documentclass{article}
-\usepackage{a4wide}
-\usepackage{msc}
-
-\title{
- A {\LaTeX{}} macro package for Message Sequence Charts---Maintenance
- document
-}
-
-
-\author{
- \begin{tabular}{c}
- \begin{tabular}{ccc}
- Victor Bos &
- Ton van Deursen &
- Sjouke Mauw \\
- &
- \scriptsize Universit\'e du Luxembourg &
- \scriptsize Universit\'e du Luxembourg \\[-0.8ex]
- \scriptsize \texttt{victor.bos at ssf.fi} &
- \scriptsize \texttt{ton.vandeursen at uni.lu} &
- \scriptsize \texttt{sjouke.mauw at uni.lu}
- \end{tabular}\\
- \end{tabular}
-}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\date{\small Version \mscversion, last update \today}
-
-\maketitle
-
-\begin{abstract}
-\noindent
-The MSC macro package facilitates the \LaTeX\ user to easily include
-Message Sequence Charts in his texts. This document contains
-information which supports the maintenance of the package.
-\end{abstract}
-
-\section{Introduction}
-This document contains three lists related to the maintenance of the
-MSC macro package. This is a \LaTeX\ package for drawing Message
-Sequence Charts.
-For additional information consult the following URL:
-\verb+http://satoss.uni.lu/mscpackage/+.
-
-The first list contains an overview of all publicly released versions
-of the MSC macro package. The second list contains all known (yet
-unresolved) bugs of the MSC macro package. The third list is the wish
-list, containing wishes expressed by the users of the package w.r.t.
-desired additional functionality.
-
-\section{Versions}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Version 1.16, beta release, 2008/06/02
-
-The MSC package used old \verb+PSTricks+-syntax of the \verb+\scalebox+
-command. To prevent mismatches with the \verb+graphicx+ package, this
-macro was renamed to \verb+\psscalebox+.
-
-The \verb+action+ and \verb+condition+ macros are extended with a
-starred version, which automatically adjust the size of the rectangle
-and hexagon based on the size of the contents.
-
-Name and address information has been updated.
-
-\item Version 1.13, beta release, 2002/06/27.
-
-The label positioning of version 1.12 is reimplemented. In fact, the
-implementation of messages is rewritten completely. The same method to
-compute the location of labels is used in \verb+\mess+, \verb+create+,
-\verb+lost+, and \verb+found+. The new implementation is backward
-compatible, meaning that old documents using the MSC Macro Package
-will still look the same.
-
-In addition, the bounding box bug is partly fixed. An \verb+\fbox+ is
-drawn around each msc, hmsc, and mscdoc diagram. This enables dvips to
-compute the right bounding box. Since the \verb+\fbox+ is drawn in
-white, there is no visible result as long as the background is white,
-too. A consequence of this bug fix is that the MSC Macro package
-requires the \textsf{color} package. Just like the other required
-packages, \textsf{pstricks}, \textsf{calc}, and \textsf{ifthen}, this
-is a standard \LaTeXe{} package.
-
-\item Version 1.12, beta release, 2002/06/18.
-
-In this version, the user has more control over the positioning of
-message labels. Implementation not finished yet.
-
-\item Version 1.11, Public release, 2002/06/06.
-
-Minor bug fix.\\ The \verb+\stepcounter+ problem that occurred while
-using the MSC Macro Package together with overlays (slides) is solved.
-
-\item Version 1.10a, Public release, 2002/04/11.
-
-Minor bug fixes.\\
-The email addresses and websites mentioned in the files have been
-corrected (if necessary).
-
-The problem with the german package (german.sty) has been solved. This
-bug was found by Christian Kaeunicke. The german package redefines the
-meaning of the " symbol in order to type german texts more
-efficiently. However, this was not compatible with the msc package
-(before version 1.10a), because it uses the " symbol in
-(error)-messages. The new version (1.10a) uses the ' symbol instead of
-the " symbol. This seems to solve the problem with the german
-package. However, there are probably packages assigning special
-meaning to the ' symbol and which will therefore not work properly
-with the msc package.
-
-\item Version 1.10, Public release, 2002/04/10.
-
-Major improvements: support for two new types of diagrams: High-level
-MSCs and MSC documents. Additional MSC constructs: fat (double line)
-instances, gates, time measurements, comments, instance regions
-(activation, suspension, and co-regions), method replies (dashed
-message arrows). Left and right overlap of inline expressions and MSC
-references in an MSC diagram can be specified separately.
-
-Reference manual. For a list of (all) commands and lengths, see
-reference manual.
-
-Package now also available at CTAN.
-
-\item Version 1.4, Public release, 1999/04/23.
-
-Minor bug fixes.\\
-Additionally supports: Instance creation, MSC references, and inline
-expressions.\\
-Extra parameters:
-\verb+\referenceoverlap+, \verb+\inlineoverlap+, \verb+\stopwidth+.\\
-Adjustment of default values. There are now three sizes
-(large/normal/small) instead of two. The middle size is now default.\\
-New command \verb+\setmscscale+ to scale the complete MSC up/down.
-
-\item Version 1.3, Public release, 1999/04/10.
-
-Minor bug fixes.
-Additionally supports: Conditions, combined timer symbols, instance
-stop.\\
-Extra parameters:
-\verb+\conditionheight+, \verb+\conditionoverlap+, \verb+\stopwidth+.
-Leveloffset can be specified in \verb+nextlevel+ command.
-
-\item Version 1.2, Public release, 1999/03/29.
-
-Minor bug fixes.
-Code restructuring.
-Additionally supports: Actions.\\
-Extra parameters:
-\verb+\actionheight+, \verb+\actionwidth+.
-
-\item Version 1.1, Public release, 1999/03/24.
-
-Minor bug fixes.
-Additionally supports: timers (singular events), lost and found
-messages, generalized ordering. Extra parameters:
-\verb+\lostsymbolradius+, \verb+\timerwidth+. The macro
-\verb+\setfootcolor+ replaces \verb+\setfootgrayness+, and the macro
-\verb+\setmscvalues+ replaces \verb+\resetmsclengths+.
-Some default values have been adjusted.
-
-\item Version 1.0, First public release, 1999/03/16.
-
-Supports drawing of the following MSC constructs: MSC frame,
-instances, messages (including self and env messages), coregions.
-Includes some parameters for fine tuning of the drawing.
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Bugs}
-The MSC macro package contains numerous bugs (and hidden features).
-As of now, these are the only ones that have revealed themselves in public.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-
-\item Some starred versions of commands of the MSC Macro package do
-not cooperate with the \textsf{amsbsy} package. The problem is that
-the latter package redefined the macro \verb+\@ifstar+. This bug was
-dicovered by Sjouke Mauw.
-
-\item The size of msc diagrams is computed incorrectly. After
-generating an eps file (dvips -E) from a dvi file containing exactly
-one msc diagram, the diagram is clipped incorrectly. This bug was
-dicovered by Tim Willemse.
-
-\item There are \LaTeX{} packages that assign special meaning to some
-characters. Consequently, the \xA0MSC Macro package might not function properly
-with such packages. Since we cannot anticipate on these semantical
-changes of symbols, we don't know of a good solution to it. However,
-we try to find solutions for these problems if they originated from
-packages that are in the standard \LaTeX{} distribution.
-
-A concrete example was the \textsf{german} package, as pointed out by
-Christian Kaeunicke. This package assigns special meaning to the "
-symbol. If you issue \verb+\usepackage{german}+ \emph{before}
-\verb+\usepackage{msc}+, you will get an error as soon as your first
-msc diagram is compiled. As Christian also mentioned, the error does
-not occur if the import order of the packages is reversed.
-
-As of MSC Macro package version 1.10a, this concrete bug with the
-\textsf{german} package has been solved and the order between
-\textsf{msc} and \textsf{german} is not restricted anymore.
-
-\item The MSC Macro Package (version $\leq 1.10a$) crashes with the
-overlay environment of the slides document class. The bug is due to a
-redefinition of the \verb+\refstepcounter+ macro by the slides
-documentclass. This bug was discovered by Volker Stolz. He and Markus
-Mohnen proposed a solution: increase the counters used by the MSC
-macro package manually. In Version~1.11 this solution is
-implemented. Thanks Volker and Markus!
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Wishes}
-\begin{itemize}
-
-\item Split MSCs over multiple pages (T. van Deursen, 2008/02/18)
-
-\item Make the parameters of the MSC Macro package more
-consistent. For example, the \verb+\mess+ macro and the
-\verb+\measure+ have similar positioning parameters, but they cannot
-have the same values. (V. Bos 2002/06/16)
-
-\item Add a section to the user manual describing how to generate
-other formats (like html, PostScript, pdf). (S. Mauw 2002/06/14)
-
-\item Add to the user manual a figure describing the various HMSC lengths.
- (S. Mauw 2002/06/14)
-
-\item Add automatic resizing of action symbols, as described in one of
-the tricks in the reference manual. (S. Mauw 2002/06/14)
-
-\item Add UML extensions to the MSC Macro package. Describe clearly
-which UML diagrams we support.(S. Mauw, 2002/06/13)
-
-\item A possibility to change the color of instance regions. V. Bos
-(2002/04/09).
-
-\item Add option to messages to determine relative position of
-label. (S. Mauw 1999/04/15).
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-\end{document}
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual-macros.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual-macros.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual-macros.tex 2022-05-13 21:37:05 UTC (rev 63291)
@@ -0,0 +1,1003 @@
+% \newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\bslash #1}}
+
+\newcommand{\acro}[1]{{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\MSC}{\acro{MSC}}
+\newcommand{\HMSC}{\acro{HMSC}}
+\newcommand{\MSCdoc}{\MSC{}doc}
+\newcommand{\mscpack}{\MSC{} macro package}
+% \newcommand{\env}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\cmdarg}[1]{\{\emph{#1}\}}
+\newcommand{\coordarg}[1]{\emph{#1}}
+\newcommand{\coordargs}[2]{(\coordarg{#1},\coordarg{#2})}
+\newcommand{\lnsvalue}[3]{large/normal/small value #1/#2/#3}
+
+\newenvironment{defs}{%
+ \begin{list}{}%
+ {\setlength{\labelwidth}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{1em}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{1em}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{1ex}%
+ \setlength{\listparindent}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\rightmargin}{0pt}%
+ \renewcommand{\makelabel}[1]{##1}%
+ \raggedright%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \end{list}}
+\newcommand{\tikzname}{Ti\emph{k}Z}
+\newcommand{\beamer}{\textsc{beamer}}
+\newcommand{\pdf}{\textsc{pdf}}
+\newcommand{\eps}{\texttt{eps}}
+\newcommand{\pgfname}{\textsc{pgf}}
+% \newcommand{\prosper}{\textsc{prosper}}
+% \newcommand{\seminar}{\textsc{seminar}}
+% \newcommand{\texpower}{\textsc{texpower}}
+% \newcommand{\foils}{\textsc{foils}}
+
+% \providecommand\href[2]{\texttt{#1}}
+% \providecommand\hypertarget[2]{\texttt{#1}}
+% \providecommand\hyperlink[2]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+
+\colorlet{examplefill}{yellow!80!black}
+\definecolor{graphicbackground}{rgb}{1,1,1}
+\definecolor{codebackground}{rgb}{0.90,0.90,1}
+
+\newenvironment{pgfmanualentry}{\par\vspace*{-8pt}\list{}{\leftmargin=2em\itemindent-\leftmargin\def\makelabel##1{\hss##1}}}{\endlist\par\vspace*{-8pt}}
+\newcommand\pgfmanualentryheadline[1]{\itemsep=0pt\parskip=0pt\item\strut{#1}\par\topsep=0pt}
+\newcommand\pgfmanualbody{\parskip3pt\vspace*{-3pt}}
+
+
+
+\newenvironment{pgflayout}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\texttt{\string\pgfpagesuselayout\char`\{\declare{#1}\char`\}}\oarg{options}}
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} layout}%
+ \index{Page layouts!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{command}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extractcommand#1\@@
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\newenvironment{commandlist}[1]{%
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \foreach \xx in {#1} {%
+ \expandafter\extractcommand\xx\@@
+ }%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}{%
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}%
+
+% \begin{internallist}[register]{\pgf at xa}
+% \end{internallist}
+%
+% \begin{internallist}[register]{\pgf at xa,\pgf at xb}
+% \end{internallist}
+\newenvironment{internallist}[2][register]{%
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \foreach \xx in {#2} {%
+ \expandafter\extractinternalcommand\expandafter{\xx}{#1}%
+ }%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}{%
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}%
+\def\extractinternalcommand#1#2{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Internal #2 \declare{\texttt{\string#1}}}%
+ \removeats{#1}%
+ \index{Internals!\strippedat @\protect\myprintocmmand{\strippedat}}%
+ \index{\strippedat @\protect\myprintocmmand{\strippedat}}%
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{\textbackslash\strippedat}{}%
+}
+
+%% MW: START MATH MACROS
+\def\mvar#1{{\ifmmode\textrm{\textit{#1}}\else\rmfamily\textit{#1}\fi}}
+
+\makeatletter
+
+\def\extractmathfunctionname#1{\extractmathfunctionname@#1(,)\tmpa\tmpb}
+\def\extractmathfunctionname@#1(#2)#3\tmpb{\def\mathname{#1}}
+
+\makeatother
+
+\newenvironment{math-function}[1]{
+ \def\mathdefaultname{#1}
+ \extractmathfunctionname{#1}
+ \edef\mathurl{{math:\mathname}}\expandafter\hypertarget\expandafter{\mathurl}{}%
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\texttt{#1}}%
+ \index{\mathname @\protect\texttt{\mathname} math function}%
+ \index{Math functions!\mathname @\protect\texttt{\mathname}}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\def\pgfmanualemptytext{}
+\def\pgfmanualvbarvbar{\char`\|\char`\|}
+
+\newenvironment{math-operator}[4][]{%
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \csname math#3operator\endcsname{#2}{#4}
+ \def\mathtest{#4}%
+ \ifx\mathtest\pgfmanualemptytext%
+ \def\mathtype{(#3 operator)}
+ \else%
+ \def\mathtype{(#3 operator; uses the \texttt{#4} function)}
+ \fi%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\mathexample\hfill\mathtype}%
+ \def\mathtest{#1}%
+ \ifx\mathtest\pgfmanualemptytext%
+ \index{#2@\protect\texttt{#2} #3 math operator}%
+ \index{Math operators!#2@\protect\texttt{#2}}%
+ \fi%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{\end{pgfmanualentry}}
+
+\newenvironment{math-operators}[5][]{%
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \csname math#4operator\endcsname{#2}{#3}
+ \def\mathtest{#5}%
+ \ifx\mathtest\pgfmanualemptytext%
+ \def\mathtype{(#4 operators)}
+ \else%
+ \def\mathtype{(#4 operators; use the \texttt{#5} function)}
+ \fi%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\mathexample\hfill\mathtype}%
+ \def\mathtest{#1}%
+ \ifx\mathtest\pgfmanualemptytext%
+ \index{#2#3@\protect\texttt{#2\protect\ #3} #4 math operators}%
+ \index{Math operators!#2#3@\protect\texttt{#2\protect\ #3}}%
+ \fi%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{\end{pgfmanualentry}}
+
+\def\mathinfixoperator#1#2{%
+ \def\mathoperator{\texttt{#1}}%
+ \def\mathexample{\mvar{x}\space\texttt{#1}\space\mvar{y}}%
+}
+
+\def\mathprefixoperator#1#2{%
+ \def\mathoperator{\texttt{#1}}%
+ \def\mathexample{\texttt{#1}\mvar{x}}%
+}
+
+\def\mathpostfixoperator#1#2{%
+ \def\mathoperator{\texttt{#1}}
+ \def\mathexample{\mvar{x}\texttt{#1}}%
+}
+
+\def\mathgroupoperator#1#2{%
+ \def\mathoperator{\texttt{#1\ #2}}%
+ \def\mathexample{\texttt{#1}\mvar{x}\texttt{#2}}%
+}
+
+\expandafter\let\csname matharray accessoperator\endcsname=\mathgroupoperator
+\expandafter\let\csname matharrayoperator\endcsname=\mathgroupoperator
+
+\def\mathconditionaloperator#1#2{%
+ \def\mathoperator{#1\space#2}
+ \def\mathexample{\mvar{x}\ \texttt{#1}\ \mvar{y}\ {\texttt{#2}}\ \mvar{z}}
+}
+
+\newcommand\mathcommand[1][\mathdefaultname]{%
+ \expandafter\makemathcommand#1(\empty)\stop%
+ \expandafter\extractcommand\mathcommandname\@@%
+ \medskip
+}
+\makeatletter
+
+\def\makemathcommand#1(#2)#3\stop{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\mathcommandname\expandafter{\csname pgfmath#1\endcsname}%
+ \ifx#2\empty%
+ \else%
+ \@makemathcommand#2,\stop,
+ \fi}
+\def\@makemathcommand#1,{%
+ \ifx#1\stop%
+ \else%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\mathcommandname\expandafter{\mathcommandname{\ttfamily\char`\{#1\char`\}}}%
+ \expandafter\@makemathcommand%
+ \fi}
+\makeatother
+
+\def\calcname{\textsc{calc}}
+%% MW: END MATH MACROS
+
+
+\def\extractcommand#1#2\@@{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\declare{\texttt{\string#1}}#2}%
+ \removeats{#1}%
+ \index{\strippedat @\protect\myprintocmmand{\strippedat}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{\textbackslash\strippedat}{}%
+}
+
+
+% \begin{environment}{{name}\marg{arguments}}
+\newenvironment{environment}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extractenvironement#1\@@
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\def\extractenvironement#1#2\@@{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\char`\\begin\char`\{\declare{#1}\char`\}}#2}%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\ \ }\meta{environment contents}}%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\char`\\end\char`\{\declare{#1}\char`\}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} environment}%
+ \index{Environments!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{plainenvironment}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extractplainenvironement#1\@@
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\def\extractplainenvironement#1#2\@@{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{\char`\\#1}}#2}%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\ \ }\meta{environment contents}}%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{\char`\\end#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} environment}%
+ \index{Environments!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{contextenvironment}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extractcontextenvironement#1\@@
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\def\extractcontextenvironement#1#2\@@{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{\char`\\start#1}}#2}%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\ \ }\meta{environment contents}}%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{\char`\\stop#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} environment}%
+ \index{Environments!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+
+
+\newenvironment{shape}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Shape {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} shape}%
+ \index{Shapes!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\newenvironment{shading}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Shading {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} shading}%
+ \index{Shadings!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{dataformat}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Format {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} format}%
+ \index{Formats!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\newenvironment{handler}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extracthandler#1\@nil%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\def\gobble#1{}
+\def\extracthandler#1#2\@nil{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Key handler \meta{key}{\ttfamily/\declare{#1}}#2}%
+ \index{\gobble#1@\protect\texttt{#1} handler}%
+ \index{Key handlers!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{/handlers/#1}%
+}
+
+
+\makeatletter
+
+
+\newenvironment{stylekey}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \def\extrakeytext{style, }
+ \extractkey#1\@nil%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\def\choicesep{$\vert$}%
+\def\choicearg#1{\texttt{#1}}
+
+\newif\iffirstchoice
+
+% \mchoice{choice1,choice2,choice3}
+\newcommand\mchoice[1]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \firstchoicetrue
+ \foreach \mchoice@ in {#1} {%
+ \iffirstchoice
+ \global\firstchoicefalse
+ \else
+ \choicesep
+ \fi
+ \choicearg{\mchoice@}%
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+
+% \begin{key}{/path/x=value}
+% \begin{key}{/path/x=value (initially XXX)}
+% \begin{key}{/path/x=value (default XXX)}
+\newenvironment{key}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \def\extrakeytext{}
+ %\def\altpath{\emph{\color{gray}or}}%
+ \extractkey#1\@nil%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+% \insertpathifneeded{a key}{/pgf} -> assign mykey={/pgf/a key}
+% \insertpathifneeded{/tikz/a key}{/pgf} -> assign mykey={/tikz/a key}
+%
+% #1: the key
+% #2: a default path (or empty)
+\def\insertpathifneeded#1#2{%
+ \def\insertpathifneeded@@{#2}%
+ \ifx\insertpathifneeded@@\empty
+ \def\mykey{#1}%
+ \else
+ \insertpathifneeded@#2\@nil
+ \ifpgfutil at in@
+ \def\mykey{#2/#1}%
+ \else
+ \def\mykey{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}%
+\def\insertpathifneeded@#1#2\@nil{%
+ \def\insertpathifneeded@@{#1}%
+ \def\insertpathifneeded@@@{/}%
+ \ifx\insertpathifneeded@@\insertpathifneeded@@@
+ \pgfutil at in@true
+ \else
+ \pgfutil at in@false
+ \fi
+}%
+
+% \begin{keylist}[default path]
+% {/path/option 1=value,/path/option 2=value2}
+% \end{keylist}
+\newenvironment{keylist}[2][]{%
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \def\extrakeytext{}%
+ \foreach \xx in {#2} {%
+ \expandafter\insertpathifneeded\expandafter{\xx}{#1}%
+ \expandafter\extractkey\mykey\@nil%
+ }%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}{%
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}%
+
+\def\extractkey#1\@nil{%
+ \pgfutil at in@={#1}%
+ \ifpgfutil at in@%
+ \extractkeyequal#1\@nil
+ \else%
+ \pgfutil at in@{(initial}{#1}%
+ \ifpgfutil at in@%
+ \extractequalinitial#1\@nil%
+ \else
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{#1}}\hfill(\extrakeytext no value)}%
+ \def\mykey{#1}%
+ \def\mypath{}%
+ \def\myname{}%
+ \firsttimetrue%
+ \decompose#1/\nil%
+ \fi
+ \fi%
+}
+
+\def\extractkeyequal#1=#2\@nil{%
+ \pgfutil at in@{(default}{#2}%
+ \ifpgfutil at in@%
+ \extractdefault{#1}#2\@nil%
+ \else%
+ \pgfutil at in@{(initial}{#2}%
+ \ifpgfutil at in@%
+ \extractinitial{#1}#2\@nil%
+ \else
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{#1}=}#2\hfill(\extrakeytext no default)}%
+ \fi%
+ \fi%
+ \def\mykey{#1}%
+ \def\mypath{}%
+ \def\myname{}%
+ \firsttimetrue%
+ \decompose#1/\nil%
+}
+
+\def\extractdefault#1#2(default #3)\@nil{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{#1}\opt{=}}\opt{#2}\hfill (\extrakeytext default {\ttfamily#3})}%
+}
+
+\def\extractinitial#1#2(initially #3)\@nil{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{#1}=}#2\hfill (\extrakeytext no default, initially {\ttfamily#3})}%
+}
+
+\def\extractequalinitial#1 (initially #2)\@nil{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{#1}}\hfill (\extrakeytext initially {\ttfamily#2})}%
+ \def\mykey{#1}%
+ \def\mypath{}%
+ \def\myname{}%
+ \firsttimetrue%
+ \decompose#1/\nil%
+}
+
+% Introduces a key alias '/#1/<name of current key>'
+% to be used inside of \begin{key} ... \end{key}
+\def\keyalias#1{\vspace{-3pt}\item{\small alias {\ttfamily/#1/\myname}}\vspace{-2pt}\par
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{/#1/\myname}{}%
+}
+
+\newif\iffirsttime
+
+\makeatother
+
+\def\decompose/#1/#2\nil{%
+ \def\test{#2}%
+ \ifx\test\empty%
+ % aha.
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} key}%
+ \index{\mypath#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+ \def\myname{#1}%
+ \else%
+ \iffirsttime
+ \begingroup
+ % also make a pdf link anchor with full key path.
+ \def\hyperlabelwithoutslash##1/\nil{%
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{##1}{}%
+ }%
+ \hyperlabelwithoutslash/#1/#2\nil
+ \endgroup
+ \def\mypath{#1@\protect\texttt{/#1/}!}%
+ \firsttimefalse
+ \else
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\mypath\expandafter{\mypath#1@\protect\texttt{#1/}!}%
+ \fi
+ \def\firsttime{}
+ \decompose/#2\nil%
+ \fi%
+}
+
+\def\indexkey#1{%
+ \def\mypath{}%
+ \decompose#1/\nil%
+}
+
+\newenvironment{predefinedmethod}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extractpredefinedmethod#1\@nil
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+\def\extractpredefinedmethod#1(#2)\@nil{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Method \declare{\ttfamily #1}\texttt(#2\texttt) \hfill(predefined for all classes)}
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} method}%
+ \index{Methods!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{ooclass}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \def\currentclass{#1}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Class \declare{\texttt{#1}}}
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} class}%
+ \index{Class #1 at Class \protect\texttt{#1}}%
+ \index{Classes!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\newenvironment{method}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extractmethod#1\@nil
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+\def\extractmethod#1(#2)\@nil{%
+ \def\test{#1}
+ \ifx\test\currentclass
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Constructor \declare{\ttfamily #1}\texttt(#2\texttt)}
+ \else
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Method \declare{\ttfamily #1}\texttt(#2\texttt)}
+ \fi
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} method}%
+ \index{Methods!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \index{Class \currentclass!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+}
+
+\newenvironment{attribute}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extractattribute#1\@nil
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+\def\extractattribute#1=#2;\@nil{%
+ \def\test{#2}%
+ \ifx\test\@empty
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Private attribute \declare{\ttfamily #1} \hfill (initially empty)}
+ \else
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Private attribute \declare{\ttfamily #1} \hfill (initially {\ttfamily #2})}
+ \fi
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} attribute}%
+ \index{Attributes!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \index{Class \currentclass!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+}
+
+
+
+\newenvironment{predefinednode}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Predefined node {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} node}%
+ \index{Predefined node!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\newenvironment{coordinatesystem}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Coordinate system {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} coordinate system}%
+ \index{Coordinate systems!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\newenvironment{snake}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Snake {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} snake}%
+ \index{Snakes!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\newenvironment{decoration}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Decoration {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} decoration}%
+ \index{Decorations!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+
+\def\pgfmanualbar{\char`\|}
+\makeatletter
+\newenvironment{pathoperation}[3][]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\textcolor{gray}{{\ttfamily\char`\\path}\
+ \ \dots}
+ \declare{\texttt{#2}}#3\ \textcolor{gray}{\dots\texttt{;}}}%
+ \def\pgfmanualtest{#1}%
+ \ifx\pgfmanualtest\@empty%
+ \index{#2@\protect\texttt{#2} path operation}%
+ \index{Path operations!#2@\protect\texttt{#2}}%
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#2}{}%
+ \fi%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+\newenvironment{datavisualizationoperation}[3][]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\textcolor{gray}{{\ttfamily\char`\\datavisualization}\
+ \ \dots}
+ \declare{\texttt{#2}}#3\ \textcolor{gray}{\dots\texttt{;}}}%
+ \def\pgfmanualtest{#1}%
+ \ifx\pgfmanualtest\@empty%
+ \index{#2@\protect\texttt{#2} (data visualization)}%
+ \index{Data visualization!#2@\protect\texttt{#2}}%
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#2}{}%
+ \fi%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+\makeatother
+
+\def\extractcommand#1#2\@@{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\declare{\texttt{\string#1}}#2}%
+ \removeats{#1}%
+ \index{\strippedat @\protect\myprintocmmand{\strippedat}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{\textbackslash\strippedat}{}%
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{filedescription}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{File {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} file}%
+ \index{Packages and files!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{packageoption}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\char`\\usepackage[\declare{#1}]\char`\{pgf\char`\}}}
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} package option}%
+ \index{Package options for \textsc{pgf}!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+
+
+\newcommand\opt[1]{{\color{black!50!green}#1}}
+\newcommand\ooarg[1]{{\ttfamily[}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily]}}
+
+\def\pfgopt{\afterassignment\pgfmanualopt\let\next=}
+
+
+{
+ \makeatletter
+ \global\let\myempty=\@empty
+ \global\let\mygobble=\@gobble
+ \catcode`\@=12
+ \gdef\getridofats#1@#2\relax{%
+ \def\getridtest{#2}%
+ \ifx\getridtest\myempty%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\strippedat\expandafter{\strippedat#1}
+ \else%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\strippedat\expandafter{\strippedat#1\protect\printanat}
+ \getridofats#2\relax%
+ \fi%
+ }
+
+ \gdef\removeats#1{%
+ \let\strippedat\myempty%
+ \edef\strippedtext{\stripcommand#1}%
+ \expandafter\getridofats\strippedtext @\relax%
+ }
+
+ \gdef\stripcommand#1{\expandafter\mygobble\string#1}
+}
+
+\def\printanat{\char`\@}
+
+\def\declare{\afterassignment\pgfmanualdeclare\let\next=}
+\def\pgfmanualdeclare{\ifx\next\bgroup\bgroup\color{red!75!black}\else{\color{red!75!black}\next}\fi}
+
+
+\let\textoken=\command
+\let\endtextoken=\endcommand
+
+\def\myprintocmmand#1{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
+
+\def\example{\par\smallskip\noindent\textit{Example: }}
+\def\themeauthor{\par\smallskip\noindent\textit{Theme author: }}
+
+
+\def\indexoption#1{%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} option}%
+ \index{Graphic options and styles!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+}
+
+\def\itemcalendaroption#1{\item \declare{\texttt{#1}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} date test}%
+ \index{Date tests!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+}
+
+\makeatletter
+
+\ifx\scantokens\@undefined
+ \PackageError{pgfmanual-macros}{You need to use extended latex
+ (elatex) or (pdfelatex) to process this document}{}
+\fi
+
+\begingroup
+\catcode`|=0
+\catcode`[= 1
+\catcode`]=2
+\catcode`\{=12
+\catcode `\}=12
+\catcode`\\=12 |gdef|find at example#1\end{codeexample}[|endofcodeexample[#1]]
+|endgroup
+
+% define \returntospace.
+%
+% It should define NEWLINE as {}, spaces and tabs as \space.
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\^=7
+\catcode`\^^M=13
+\catcode`\^^I=13
+\catcode`\ =13%
+\gdef\returntospace{\catcode`\ =13\def {\space}\catcode`\^^I=13\def^^I{\space}}
+\gdef\showreturn{\show^^M}
+\endgroup
+
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\%=13
+\catcode`\^^M=13
+\gdef\commenthandler{\catcode`\%=13\def%{\@gobble at till@return}}
+\gdef\@gobble at till@return#1^^M{}
+\gdef\@gobble at till@return at ignore#1^^M{\ignorespaces}
+\gdef\typesetcomment{\catcode`\%=13\def%{\@typeset at till@return}}
+\gdef\@typeset at till@return#1^^M{{\def%{\char`\%}\textsl{\char`\%#1}}\par}
+\endgroup
+
+% Define tab-implementation functions
+% \codeexample at tabinit@replacementchars@
+% and
+% \codeexample at tabinit@catcode@
+%
+% They should ONLY be used in case that tab replacement is active.
+%
+% This here is merely a preparation step.
+%
+% Idea:
+% \codeexample at tabinit@catcode@ will make TAB active
+% and
+% \codeexample at tabinit@replacementchars@ will insert as many spaces as
+% /codeexample/tabsize contains.
+{
+\catcode`\^^I=13
+% ATTENTION: do NOT use tabs in these definitions!!
+\gdef\codeexample at tabinit@replacementchars@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \count0=\pgfkeysvalueof{/codeexample/tabsize}\relax
+ \toks0={}%
+ \loop
+ \ifnum\count0>0
+ \advance\count0 by-1
+ \toks0=\expandafter{\the\toks0\ }%
+ \repeat
+ \xdef\codeexample at tabinit@replacementchars@@{\the\toks0}%
+ \endgroup
+ \let^^I=\codeexample at tabinit@replacementchars@@
+}%
+\gdef\codeexample at tabinit@catcode@{\catcode`\^^I=13}%
+}%
+
+% Called after any options have been set. It assigns
+% \codeexample at tabinit@catcode
+% and
+% \codeexample at tabinit@replacementchars
+% which are used inside of
+%\begin{codeexample}
+% ...
+%\end{codeexample}
+%
+% \codeexample at tabinit@catcode is either \relax or it makes tab
+% active.
+%
+% \codeexample at tabinit@replacementchars is either \relax or it inserts
+% a proper replacement sequence for tabs (as many spaces as
+% configured)
+\def\codeexample at tabinit{%
+ \ifnum\pgfkeysvalueof{/codeexample/tabsize}=0\relax
+ \let\codeexample at tabinit@replacementchars=\relax
+ \let\codeexample at tabinit@catcode=\relax
+ \else
+ \let\codeexample at tabinit@catcode=\codeexample at tabinit@catcode@
+ \let\codeexample at tabinit@replacementchars=\codeexample at tabinit@replacementchars@
+ \fi
+}
+
+\pgfqkeys{/codeexample}{%
+ width/.code= {\setlength\codeexamplewidth{#1}},
+ graphic/.code= {\colorlet{graphicbackground}{#1}},
+ code/.code= {\colorlet{codebackground}{#1}},
+ execute code/.is if=code at execute,
+ code only/.code= {\code at executefalse},
+ pre/.store in=\code at pre,
+ post/.store in=\code at post,
+ % #1 is the *complete* environment contents as it shall be
+ % typeset. In particular, the catcodes are NOT the normal ones.
+ typeset listing/.code= {#1},
+ render instead/.store in=\code at render,
+ vbox/.code= {\def\code at pre{\vbox\bgroup\setlength{\hsize}{\linewidth-6pt}}\def\code at post{\egroup}},
+ ignorespaces/.code= {\let\@gobble at till@return=\@gobble at till@return at ignore},
+ leave comments/.code= {\def\code at catcode@hook{\catcode`\%=12}\let\commenthandler=\relax\let\typesetcomment=\relax},
+ tabsize/.initial=0,% FIXME : this here is merely used for indentation. It is just a TAB REPLACEMENT.
+ every codeexample/.style={width=4cm+7pt},
+}
+
+\let\code at pre\pgfutil at empty
+\let\code at post\pgfutil at empty
+\let\code at render\pgfutil at empty
+\def\code at catcode@hook{}
+
+\newdimen\codeexamplewidth
+\newif\ifcode at execute
+\newbox\codeexamplebox
+\def\codeexample[#1]{%
+ \begingroup%
+ \code at executetrue
+ \pgfqkeys{/codeexample}{every codeexample,#1}%
+ \codeexample at tabinit% assigns \codeexample at tabinit@[catcode,replacementchars]
+ \parindent0pt
+ \begingroup%
+ \par%
+ \medskip%
+ \let\do\@makeother%
+ \dospecials%
+ \obeylines%
+ \@vobeyspaces%
+ \catcode`\%=13%
+ \catcode`\^^M=13%
+ \code at catcode@hook%
+ \codeexample at tabinit@catcode
+ \relax%
+ \find at example}
+\def\endofcodeexample#1{%
+ \endgroup%
+ \ifcode at execute%
+ \setbox\codeexamplebox=\hbox{%
+ \ifx\code at render\pgfutil at empty%
+ {%
+ {%
+ \returntospace%
+ \commenthandler%
+ \xdef\code at temp{#1}% removes returns and comments
+ }%
+ \catcode`\^^M=9%
+ \colorbox{graphicbackground}{\color{black}\ignorespaces%
+ \code at pre\expandafter\scantokens\expandafter{\code at temp\ignorespaces}\code at post\ignorespaces}%
+ }%
+ \else%
+ \colorbox{graphicbackground}{\color{black}\ignorespaces%
+ \code at render}%
+ \fi%
+ }%
+ \ifdim\wd\codeexamplebox>\codeexamplewidth%
+ \def\code at start{\par}%
+ \def\code at flushstart{}\def\code at flushend{}%
+ \def\code at mid{\parskip2pt\par\noindent}%
+ \def\code at width{\linewidth-6pt}%
+ \def\code at end{}%
+ \else%
+ \def\code at start{%
+ \linewidth=\textwidth%
+ \parshape \@ne 0pt \linewidth
+ \leavevmode%
+ \hbox\bgroup}%
+ \def\code at flushstart{\hfill}%
+ \def\code at flushend{\hbox{}}%
+ \def\code at mid{\hskip6pt}%
+ \def\code at width{\linewidth-12pt-\codeexamplewidth}%
+ \def\code at end{\egroup}%
+ \fi%
+ \code at start%
+ \noindent%
+ \begin{minipage}[t]{\codeexamplewidth}\raggedright
+ \hrule width0pt%
+ \footnotesize\vskip-1em%
+ \code at flushstart\box\codeexamplebox\code at flushend%
+ \vskip-1ex
+ \leavevmode%
+ \end{minipage}%
+ \else%
+ \def\code at mid{\par}
+ \def\code at width{\linewidth-6pt}
+ \def\code at end{}
+ \fi%
+ \code at mid%
+ \colorbox{codebackground}{%
+ \begin{minipage}[t]{\code at width}%
+ {%
+ \let\do\@makeother
+ \dospecials
+ \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces
+ \normalfont\ttfamily\footnotesize
+ \typesetcomment%
+ \codeexample at tabinit@replacementchars
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \def\par{%
+ \if at tempswa
+ \leavevmode \null \@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty
+ \else
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \ifhmode\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty\fi
+ \fi}%
+ \obeylines
+ \everypar \expandafter{\the\everypar \unpenalty}%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{/codeexample/typeset listing/. at cmd}{#1}\pgfeov
+ }
+ \end{minipage}}%
+ \code at end%
+ \par%
+ \medskip
+ \end{codeexample}
+}
+
+\def\endcodeexample{\endgroup}
+
+
+%%% Local Variables:
+%%% mode: latex
+%%% TeX-master: "beameruserguide"
+%%% End:
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual-macros.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual.tex 2022-05-13 21:35:58 UTC (rev 63290)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual.tex 2022-05-13 21:37:05 UTC (rev 63291)
@@ -1,2841 +0,0 @@
-% file: manual.tex
-% Copyright 2008 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, and S. Mauw
-% This file is part of the MSC Macro Package.
-%
-\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article}
-\usepackage{a4wide}
-\usepackage{url}
-\usepackage{moreverb}
-\usepackage{multicol}
-\usepackage{msc}
-
-% we allow a ragged right
-\setlength{\rightskip}{0pt plus 0.05\linewidth minus 0pt}
-
-
-
-
-
-\newlength{\rpwidth}
-\setlength{\rpwidth}{.5cm}
-\newlength{\rpheight}
-\setlength{\rpheight}{0.5\levelheight}
-\newcommand{\rpN}{%
- \psframe(-0.5\rpwidth,-\rpheight)(0.5\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](0\rpwidth,-0.8\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{n}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpNE}{%
- \psframe(-\rpwidth,-\rpheight)(0\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](-.5\rpwidth,-0.8\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{ne}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpE}{%
- \psframe(-\rpwidth,-.5\rpheight)(0\rpwidth,.5\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](-.5\rpwidth,-0.3\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{e}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpSE}{%
- \psframe(-\rpwidth,0\rpheight)(0\rpwidth,\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](-.5\rpwidth,0.2\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{se}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpS}{%
- \psframe(-.5\rpwidth,\rpheight)(.5\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[t](0\rpwidth,0.8\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{s}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpSW}{%
- \psframe(0\rpwidth,0\rpheight)(\rpwidth,\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](.5\rpwidth,0.2\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{sw}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpW}{%
- \psframe(0\rpwidth,-.5\rpheight)(\rpwidth,.5\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](.5\rpwidth,-0.3\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{w}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpNW}{%
- \psframe(0\rpwidth,-\rpheight)(\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](.5\rpwidth,-0.8\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{nw}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-
-
-
-
-
-% The following code is taken from the doc package. It defines a global
-% macro \bslash that produces a bslash (if present in the current font).
-\makeatletter
-{\catcode`\|=\z@ \catcode`\\=12 |gdef|bslash{\}}
-\makeatother
-\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\bslash #1}}
-
-\newcommand{\acro}[1]{{#1}}
-
-\newcommand{\MSC}{\acro{MSC}}
-\newcommand{\HMSC}{\acro{HMSC}}
-\newcommand{\MSCdoc}{\MSC{}doc}
-\newcommand{\mscpack}{\MSC{} macro package}
-
-\newcommand{\env}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\opt}[1]{[#1]}
-\newcommand{\cmdarg}[1]{\{\emph{#1}\}}
-\newcommand{\coordarg}[1]{\emph{#1}}
-\newcommand{\coordargs}[2]{(\coordarg{#1},\coordarg{#2})}
-\newcommand{\lnsvalue}[3]{large/normal/small value #1/#2/#3}
-
-\newenvironment{defs}{%
- \begin{list}{}%
- {\setlength{\labelwidth}{0pt}%
- \setlength{\labelsep}{1em}%
- \setlength{\leftmargin}{1em}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{1ex}%
- \setlength{\listparindent}{0pt}%
- \setlength{\rightmargin}{0pt}%
- \renewcommand{\makelabel}[1]{##1}%
- \raggedright%
- }%
- }{%
- \end{list}}
-
-
-
-\title{
- A \LaTeX\ macro package for Message Sequence Charts\\{\large User Manual}
-}
-
-\author{
- \begin{tabular}{c}
- \begin{tabular}{ccc}
- Victor Bos &
- Ton van Deursen &
- Sjouke Mauw \\
- &
- \scriptsize Universit\'e du Luxembourg &
- \scriptsize Universit\'e du Luxembourg \\[-0.8ex]
- \scriptsize \texttt{victor.bos at ssf.fi} &
- \scriptsize \texttt{ton.vandeursen at uni.lu} &
- \scriptsize \texttt{sjouke.mauw at uni.lu}
- \end{tabular}\\
- \end{tabular}
-}
-
-\date{\small Version \mscversion, last update \today\\
- Describing \mscpack{} version \mscversion}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-
-\maketitle
-
-\begin{abstract}
-\noindent
-The \mscpack{} facilitates the \LaTeX\ user to easily include
-Message Sequence Charts in his texts. This document describes the
-design and use of the \mscpack.
-\end{abstract}
-
-\tableofcontents
-\section{New}
-\label{new}
-
-\paragraph{Version~1.16} solves a bug that was due to a change in
-syntax of the \verb+scalebox+ macro in the \verb+PSTricks+ package.
-
-The \verb+action+ and \verb+condition+ macros are extended with a
-starred option. The starred version of the macros automatically
-adjusts the size of the rectangle and hexagon based on the size of the
-contents.
-
-\paragraph{Version~1.13} has a reimplementation of message commands in MSC
-diagrams. The affected commands are: \verb+\create+, \verb+\found+,
-\verb+\lost+, \verb+\mess+, and \verb+\order+. The new implementation
-provides more control over the placement of message labels.
-
-The command \verb+\selfmesslabelpos+ has been removed.
-
-The bounding box bug has been partly solved. Now, a white \verb+\fbox+
-is drawn around every (msc, mscdoc, hmsc) diagram. This makes it
-possible for \texttt{dvips -E} to compute the correct bounding box for
-the diagrams. Due to the \verb+\fbox+, each diagram is extended with
-0.3pt on each side (left, top, right, and bottom). This bugfix fails
-if the background is not white. The xdvi program shows the white
-\verb+\fbox+ in black with the result that diagrams have two visible
-frames. This seems to be a bug of xdvi.
-
-The lines around comments (\verb+\msccomment+, Section~\ref{comments})
-are changed from gray into black. The reason for this is that the gray
-lines became invisible after converting the document to HTML.
-
-\paragraph{Version~1.12} is a non-public version. It features a preliminary
-implementation of message label position control.
-
-\paragraph{Version~1.11} is a mainly a bugfix of version~1.10a, see~\cite{BM02b}.
-The next list shows the new features of version~1.10a compared to
-version 1.4.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Support for method replies (dashed message arrows):\cmd{mess*} (Section~\ref{messages})
-\item Fat instances, i.e., double line instances (Section~\ref{instances})
-\item Comments (Section~\ref{comments})
-\item Coregions are now special cases of regions (which includes also
-activation and suspension regions). The \cmd{coregionstart} and
-\cmd{coregionend} commands are obsolete and the \cmd{coregionbarwidth}
-is replaced by \cmd{regionbarwidth}.
-\item Gates (Section~\ref{gates})
-\item High-level \MSC{}'s (Section~\ref{hmsc})
-\item \cmd{inlinestart} has additional optional argument to allow for different left and right overlap (Section~\ref{inlines})
-\item \MSCdoc{}s (Section~\ref{mscdoc})
-\item Reference manual~\cite{BM02}
-\item \cmd{referencestart} has additional optional argument to allow for different left and right overlap (Section~\ref{references})
-\item Regions: generalization of coregions supporting activations, suspension, and coregions (Section~\ref{regions})
-\item Time measurements (Section~\ref{measurements})
-\end{itemize}
-
-
-\section{Introduction}
-\label{introduction}
-
-The \MSC{} language is a visual language for the description of the
-interaction between different components of a system.
-This language is standardized by the ITU (International
-Telecommunication Union) in Recommendation Z.120~\cite{z120}. An
-introductory text on \MSC{} can be found
-in~\cite{RudolphGrabowskiGraubmann96}. \MSC{}s have a
-wide application domain, ranging from requirements specification to
-testing and documentation.
-An example of a Message Sequence Chart is in Figure~\ref{quick}.
-
-In order to support easy drawing of \MSC{}s in \LaTeX\ documents, we have
-developed the \mscpack. The current version of the \mscpack{}
-supports the following \MSC{} constructs: \MSC{} frame, instances (both
-single line width and double line width), messages (including
-self-messages and messages to the environment), actions, singular and
-combined timer events (set, timeout, reset, set-timeout, set-stop),
-lost and found messages, generalized order, conditions, coregions,
-activation regions, suspension regions, gates, instance creation,
-instance stop, time measurements, references, and inline
-expressions. In addition, there is support for \HMSC{}'s (high-level
-\MSC{}s) and \MSCdoc{}s.
-
-In this manual we explain the design and the use of the \mscpack. For
-a complete overview of all features, we refer to the reference
-manual~\cite{BM02}, which is included in the distribution under the
-name \verb+refman.ps+. Another way to learn how to use the \mscpack{}
-is to have a look at the \LaTeX{} source code of the manual and the
-source code of the reference manual. They are included in the
-distribution under the names \verb+manual.tex+ and \verb+refman.tex+,
-respectively. The \MSC{} constructs are simply introduced as
-syntactic constructs. This paper is not meant to describe their use or
-meaning.
-
-We list the backgrounds of the package and some design decisions in
-Section~\ref{background}.
-Section~\ref{install} contains notes on installing the
-package. Section~\ref{quickstart} contains an example of using the
-package. It allows the impatient reader to quickly start using the
-package. The details of using the package are explained in
-Section~\ref{use}. In Section~\ref{parameters} the parameters are
-explained which determine detailed layout of the various symbols.
-A large but meaningless example is given in
-Section~\ref{example}.
-
-
-\section{Background and motivation}
-\label{background}
-Several commercial and non-commercial tools are available, which
-support drawing or generating Message Sequence Charts. However, these
-tools are in general not freely available and often not flexible
-enough to satisfy all user's wishes with respect to the layout and
-graphical appearance of an \MSC{}.
-Therefore, people often use general drawing tools, such as {\em xfig}
-to draw \MSC{}s. However flexible this approach is, it takes quite some
-effort to produce nice \MSC{} drawings in a tool which is not dedicated
-to \MSC{}s. Furthermore, when drawing a number of \MSC{}s it requires some
-preciseness in order to obtain a consistent set of \MSC{}s.
-
-For these reasons, we have started the design of a set of
-\LaTeX\ macros which support the drawing of \MSC{}s. In this way, an \MSC{} can be
-represented in \LaTeX\ in a textual format and compiled into
-e.g.\ PostScript.
-
-We aimed at satisfying the following requirements and design
-decisions.
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
-The package should follow the ITU standard with respect to shape and
-placement of the symbols. (The current version supports
-the \MSC2000 standard.)
-\item
-Static and dynamic semantics are not considered. The user is allowed
-to violate all semantical restrictions and draw inconsistent \MSC{}s.
-The package only supports elementary syntactical requirements.
-\item
-The package should offer functionality at the right level of
-abstraction. Rather than supplying coordinates of pixels, the
-user should be able to express the placement of symbols in terms of
-{\em levels}.
-Nevertheless, the textual representation of \MSC{}s as defined by the ITU
-standard has a level of abstraction which is too high for our purposes.
-It lacks information about the actual positioning of the \MSC{} symbols,
-while we think that in our package this should be under user control.
-\item
-There should be only minimal automatic restructuring and layout of the
-\MSC{} (e.g.\ the relative positioning of two messages should be as
-defined by the user, even if the messages are not causally ordered).
-\item
-The user can customize the appearance of the \MSC{}s by manipulating
-an appropriate set of parameters.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Installation, copyright and system requirements}
-\label{install}
-
-The \mscpack{} is still under development. The authors
-appreciate any comments and suggestions for improvements. The most
-recent version of the package can be downloaded from
-\url{http://satoss.uni.lu/mscpackage/}.
-
-
-The \mscpack{} has a \emph{LaTeX Project Public License}
-(LPPL), see~\url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}:
-{\small
-\verbatiminput{COPYRIGHT}
-} As such, it is free of charge and can be freely
-distributed. Furthermore, it is allowed to make modifications to the
-package, provided that modified versions get different names. The
-authors accept no liability with respect to the functioning of the
-package.
-
-The \mscpack{} runs with \LaTeXe. It has been tested with \LaTeXe\
-version dated 1998/06/01 using \TeX\ version 3.14159. The following
-additional packages are required: \textsf{pstricks}, \textsf{calc},
-\textsf{ifthen}, and \textsf{color}. These packages are in general
-part of the standard \LaTeXe\ distribution. These additional packages
-can be obtained from the {\em ctan} database for \LaTeX\, e.g.\ via
-the following URL: \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/}. The \textsf{pstricks}
-package is described in~\cite[Chapter~4]{GSM97}. The generated output
-can only be previewed with recent previewing software (e.g.\ xdvi
-version 20c). It may be needed to update all \LaTeX\ related software
-to a more recent version in order to smoothly work with the \mscpack.
-
-The \mscpack{} can be installed easily. Just put the file
-\verb+msc.sty+ in a directory which is searched by \LaTeX{} for style
-files. The set of directories actually searched depends on the \TeX\
-installation, but often the {\em current directory} is included. UNIX
-users may have to set the environment variable \texttt{\$TEXINPUTS} to
-an appropriate value. For more details on this topic consult
-documentation of your \TeX\ installation.
-
-%The following text is currently not applicable -sm
-%
-%A problem may occur when using more packages than the \MSC{} macro
-%package in your \LaTeX\ document. This happens, e.g.\ when using the
-%{\em epsfig} package. These problems are due to the combination of
-%several packages which are required (but not provided) by the \MSC{}
-%macro package. The solution is to change the order of the
-%\verb+usepackage+ clauses.
-
-\section{Quick start}
-\label{quickstart}
-The \mscpack{} is easy to use.
-Below is an example of the use of the package and
-Figure~\ref{quick} shows the generated \MSC{}.
-
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\documentclass{article}
-\usepackage{msc}
-\begin{document}
-
-\begin{msc}{Example}
-
-\declinst{usr}{User}{}
-\declinst{m1}{Machine 1}{control}
-\declinst{m2}{Machine 2}{drill}
-\declinst{m3}{Machine 3}{test}
-
-\mess{startm1}{usr}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{startm2}{m1}{m2}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{continue}{m2}{m3}
-\mess{log}{m1}{envleft}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{output}{m3}{usr}[2]
-\nextlevel
-\mess{free}{m1}{usr}
-\nextlevel
-
-\end{msc}
-
-\end{document}
-
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\begin{center}
-
-\begin{msc}{Example}
-
-\declinst{usr}{User}{}
-\declinst{m1}{Machine 1}{control}
-\declinst{m2}{Machine 2}{drill}
-\declinst{m3}{Machine 3}{test}
-
-\mess{startm1}{usr}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{startm2}{m1}{m2}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{continue}{m2}{m3}
-\mess{log}{m1}{envleft}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{output}{m3}{usr}[2]
-\nextlevel
-\mess{free}{m1}{usr}
-\nextlevel
-
-\end{msc}
-
-\end{center}
-\caption{The generated \MSC{}}
-\label{quick}
-\end{figure}
-
-The \mscpack{} is activated by the clause
-\verb+\usepackage{msc}+.
-This package contains, among others, a
-definition of the environment \verb+msc+.
-This environment is used to draw \MSC{}s. The \MSC{} definition is surrounded by
-the clauses \verb+\begin{msc}{Example}+ and \verb+\end{msc}+. The name of
-the \MSC{}, {\tt Example}, is displayed in the upper-left corner of the
-\MSC{}.
-
-The next four lines define the \emph{instances}:
-\verb+\declinst{m1}{Machine 1}{control}+ defines an instance with
-\emph{nickname} \verb+m1+ and a description consisting of two parts,
-namely, \verb+Machine 1+ and \verb+control+. The nickname is used in
-all subsequent references to this instance. The first part of the
-description is drawn above the rectangular instance head symbol, and
-the second part of the description is drawn inside the instance head
-symbol.
-
-The following lines contain the definitions of the messages. Every
-message has a source and a destination instance. The clause
-\verb+\mess{startm1}{usr}{m1}+ defines a message with name {\tt
-startm1}, which goes from instance {\tt usr} to instance {\tt m1}.
-
-In order to control the vertical placement of the messages, the \MSC{} is
-divided into levels. At every level, any number of messages may start.
-The vertical position of the end point of a message is determined
-by the optional fourth argument of the message definition, as in the
-clause \verb+\mess{output}{m2}{user}[2]+.
-This argument is the vertical offset (in number of levels) between the
-start point of the message (i.e.\ the current level) and its end point.
-If the value is 0 the message is drawn horizontally. A negative offset
-means that the arrow has an upward slope.
-
-The clause \verb+\nextlevel+ is used to advance to the next level.
-
-\section{Use of the \mscpack}
-\label{use}
-
-\subsection{The \MSC{} frame}
-\label{mscframe}
-The \verb+msc+ environment is used for making \MSC{} definitions. Thus, such a
-definition looks as follows.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}[headerpos]{mscname}
-...definition of the MSC...
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-This draws the frame and the header of the \MSC{}.
-The argument \verb+mscname+ is the name of the \MSC{}.
-The header of an \MSC{} is formed from the keyword \verb+msc+, followed
-by the \verb+mscname+. Positioning of this header is controlled by
-the optional argument \verb+headerpos+. This argument can have values
-\verb+l+ (for a left aligned header), \verb+c+ (for a centered header)
-and \verb+r+ (for a right aligned header).
-The default value of \verb+headerpos+ is \verb+l+.
-
-The size of the \MSC{} frame is determined vertically by the number of levels
-occurring in the \MSC{} (see Section~\ref{levels}) and horizontally by
-the number of instances (see Section~\ref{instances}).
-
-The parameter \verb+\topnamedist+ controls the distance between the
-top of the \MSC{} frame and the header (see Section~\ref{parameters}).
-The parameter \verb+\leftnamedist+ controls the distance between the
-left of the \MSC{} frame and the header if the \verb+headerpos+ is
-\verb+l+ and it controls the distance between the right of the \MSC{}
-frame and the header if \verb+headerpos+ is \verb+r+ (see
-Section~\ref{parameters}).
-
-\subsection{Levels}
-\label{levels}
-An \MSC{} is vertically divided in {\em levels}. All events in an \MSC{} are
-attached to a certain level, or stretch out over several levels.
-Any number of events can be drawn at a certain level.
-An event will always be drawn (or started) at the current level, unless a level
-offset is specified (see e.g.\ the \verb+\mess+ command in
-Section~\ref{messages}). The level offset is an integer number, which
-denotes at which level, relative to the current level, an event should
-be drawn.
-Drawing starts at level 0.
-The following command is used to advance to the next level.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\nextlevel[leveloffset]
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The \verb+leveloffset+ is an integer value which denotes the number of
-levels to advance. By default, the value of \verb+leveloffset+ is 1,
-which means drawing continues at the next level. Setting
-\verb+leveloffset+ to a negative value may result in unexpected
-drawings, however, see the \emph{Tricks} section in the reference
-manual~\cite{BM02}.
-
-There are three parameters which control the size of the levels (see
-Section~\ref{parameters}). These are \verb+\firstlevelheight+ (the
-distance between the instance start symbol and the first level),
-\verb+\levelheight+ (the distance between two consecutive levels), and
-\verb+\lastlevelheight+ (the distance between the last level and the
-instance end symbol). Figure~\ref{parametersfig} on
-page~\pageref{parametersfig} shows all lengths of the \mscpack.
-
-\subsection{Instances}
-\label{instances}
-All instances have to be declared before they can be used. An instance
-consists of an instance head symbol with an associated name, an
-instance axis and an instance end symbol. Normal instances have a
-single line axis. Fat instances have a double line axis. The order of
-the instance declarations determines the order in which the instances
-occur in the drawing.
-
-An instance is declared with the following command.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\declinst(*){nickname}{instancenameabove}{instancenamewithin}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The starred version produces a fat instance.
-The \verb+nickname+ is used for referring to this instance in the rest of the
-\MSC{} definition.
-The \verb+instancenameabove+ is put above the instance head symbol.
-The \verb+instancenamewithin+ is put inside the instance head symbol.
-
-Several parameters allow the user to customize the shape and
-positioning of instances (see Section~\ref{parameters}). These are
-\verb+\topheaddist+ (the distance between the top of the \MSC{} and the
-instance head symbol), \verb+\instheadheight+ (the height of the
-instance head symbol), \verb+\instfootheight+ (the height of the
-instance foot symbol), \verb+\bottomfootdist+ (the distance between
-the instance foot symbol and the bottom of the \MSC{} frame),
-\verb+\instwidth+ (the width of the instance head and foot symbols),
-\verb+\instdist+ (the distance between two instance axes),
-\verb+\envinstdist+ (the distance between the edge of the \MSC{} and the
-first/last instance axis), and \verb+\labeldist+ (the distance between
-the instance head symbol and the part of the instance name drawn above
-the head symbol). The command \verb+\setfootcolor{color}+ sets the
-fill color of the footer symbol. Valid color values are, e.g.,
-\texttt{black} (default), \texttt{white}, and \texttt{gray}.
-
-The following \MSC{} shows the declaration of an \MSC{} with three
-instances. The first and the last are normal instances (one line axis)
-whereas the second is a fat instance (double line axis). The second
-line, \verb+\setmscvalues{small}+, indicates that the small drawing
-style should be used (see Section~\ref{parameters}).
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}[l]{instances}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-
-\declinst{i}{above}{within}
-\declinst*{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{k}{}
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{instances}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-
-\declinst{i}{above}{within}
-\declinst*{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{k}{}
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-\subsection{Messages}
-\label{messages}
-A message is denoted by an arrow from the sending instance to the
-receiving instance. The instances are referred to by their nicknames.
-A message is defined with the following command.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\mess(*)[pos]{name}[labelpos]{sender}[placement]{receiver}[leveloffset]
-\end{verbatim}
-The \verb+name+ of the message may be any string. The \mscpack{}
-processes the \verb+name+ argument in LR-mode,
-see~\cite[page~36]{Lam94}. This means that the string will consist of
-one line. To generate multi-line message names, use the standard
-\cmd{parbox} command, see the \emph{Tricks} section in the reference
-manual~\cite{BM02}. By default, the name of a message label is drawn
-above the center of the arrow, but the optional parameters \verb+pos+,
-\verb+labelpos+, and \verb+placement+ influence the actual location,
-as described below. The arrow starts at the current level at the
-sending instance. The arrow ends at the current level plus the
-\verb+leveloffset+, at the receiving instance. The \verb+leveloffset+
-is an optional integer argument with default value 0. The
-\verb+sender+ and \verb+receiver+ should be the nicknames of declared
-instances.
-
-In case the sending and the receiving instance are the same, the
-message is a \emph{self message}. A self message is drawn as a
-polyline connecting the instance axis to itself.
-
-The starred version of the command, \verb+\mess*+, produces the same
-result as \verb+\mess+, except that the arrow is drawn with a dashed
-line. This can be used to draw a {\em method reply} (see~\cite{z120}).
-
-As mentioned above, placement of the message and its label is
-controlled by the optional parameters \verb+pos+, \verb+labelpos+, and
-\verb+placement+. In case of a self message, \verb+pos+ denotes the
-position of the arrow with respect to the instance axis. Valid values
-are \verb+l+ (left) and \verb+r+ (right). The default value is
-\verb+l+. In case of a non-self message, the \verb+pos+ parameter is
-ignored.
-
-Whereas the \verb+pos+ parameter defines the position of the arrow
-symbol with respect to the instance axis, the \verb+labelpos+
-parameter defines the position of the message label with
-respect to the message arrow. In case of a self message, valid values
-for \verb+labelpos+ are \verb+l+ (left) and~\verb+r+ (right). The
-default value is equal to the, possibly user defined, value of the
-\verb+pos+ parameter. In case of a non-self message, valid values for
-\verb+labelpos+ are \verb+t+ (on top) and~\verb+b+ (below). The
-default value is~\verb+t+.
-
-Finally, the \verb+placement+ parameter defines the relative distance
-of the message label to the beginning of the message. Valid values are
-real numbers in the closed interval $[0,1]$. The default value
-is~$0.5$. While drawing a message, the \mscpack{} computes the
-coordinates of the message label using \verb+placement+ and the length
-and coordinates of the arrow. It then computes a \emph{reference
-point} for the message label and places it on the coordinates just
-computed. Figures \ref{fig:refpoints} (page~\pageref{fig:refpoints})
-and~\ref{fig:refpoints:B} (page~\pageref{fig:refpoints:B})
-schematically show the reference points for message labels. In the
-first figure, the labels are located at the default position. In the
-second figure, all labels are shifted along the arrow by setting
-$\verb+placement+ = 0.9$. The \verb+\lost+ and \verb+\found+ commands
-(Section~\ref{lostfound}) and the \verb+\create+
-(Section~\ref{createstop}) command use the same method to determine
-reference points and message label locations. Note that the boxes with
-the location of the reference points are not generated by the \LaTeX{}
-code given in Figures \ref{fig:refpoints} and~\ref{fig:refpoints:B};
-we enriched the \LaTeX{} code with some extra \textsf{pstricks} code
-(see \LaTeX{} source code of this document).
-
-In addition to label position control, there are three ways to control
-the shape of messages (see Section~\ref{parameters}). These are:
-\verb+\selfmesswidth+ (a parameter to specify the width of the
-polyline used for drawing self-messages), \verb+\labeldist+ (a
-parameter to specify the distance between the label of a message and
-the message arrow), and \verb+\messarrowscale{size}+ (a command to set
-the size of the arrow head of a message). \verb+size+ should be
-positive real number.
-
-Messages to or from the environment (i.e.\ the left or the right side
-of the \MSC{} frame) can be
-specified by setting the sender or the receiver argument to one of the values
-\verb+envleft+ or \verb+envright+. (Note: Since instances and
-environments are treated equally in the implementation, at every position
-where the nickname of an instance is required, also
-\verb+envleft+ and \verb+envright+ are allowed.)
-
-The following \MSC{} shows an example of the use of messages.
-In this sample \MSC{} and the following \MSC{}s in this section we will
-not list the complete textual representations of the \MSC{}s. For brevity
-we omit the environment call and the declarations of the instances.
-Note the final \verb+\nextlevel+ command which is needed
-to make the instance axis long enough to receive message
-\verb+a+.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{messages}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\mess{a}{j}{i}[3]
-\mess{self}{i}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\mess*{b}{j}{k}
-\mess[b]{c}{k}{envright}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{d}{k}[.6]{i}
-\nextlevel
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\mess{a}{j}{i}[3]
-\mess{self}{i}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\mess*{b}{j}{k}
-\mess[b]{c}{k}{envright}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{d}{k}[.6]{i}
-\nextlevel
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\begin{multicols}{2}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m0}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m1}{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m1}{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m0}{m1}[2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m1}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m1}{m0}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m2}{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m1}{m0}[2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m2}{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m0}{m1}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m1}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\bigskip
-
-\scriptsize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{S}{m0}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m1}{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{S}{m1}{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SW}{m0}{m1}[2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m1}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SW}{m1}{m0}[-2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m2}{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SE}{m1}{m0}[2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m2}{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SE}{m0}{m1}[-2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m1}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{multicols}
-\end{minipage}
-\caption{Reference points of message labels}
-\label{fig:refpoints}
-\end{figure}
-
-
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\begin{multicols}{2}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points (2)}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m0}[.9]{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m1}[.9]{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m0}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m1}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m1}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m0}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\bigskip
-
-\scriptsize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points (2)}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{S}{m0}[.9]{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{S}{m1}[.9]{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SW}{m0}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SW}{m1}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SE}{m1}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SE}{m0}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{multicols}
-\end{minipage}
-\caption{Reference points of shifted message labels}
-\label{fig:refpoints:B}
-\end{figure}
-
-
-\subsection{Comments}
-\label{comments}
-
-Comments are additional texts to clarify (events on) an instance. The
-following command can be used to add comments to an \MSC{} diagram.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\msccomment[position]{text}{instname}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The \verb|instname| parameter defines the instance to which the
-comment is attached. The text of the comment is specified by the
-\verb|text| parameter and is processed in LR-mode. The \verb|position|
-parameter defines the horizontal position of the comment relative to
-its instance. Valid values of \verb|position| are \verb|l| (left),
-\verb|r| (right), or any \LaTeX{} length. Its default value
-is~\verb|l|. If the value of \verb|position| is \verb|l|
-(or~\verb|r|), the comment will be placed \verb|\msccommentdist| units
-to the left (or right) of the \verb|instname| instance. If
-\verb|position| is a \LaTeX{} length, the comment will be placed
-\verb|position| units from the \verb|instname| instance. A negative
-length puts the comment to the left and a positive length puts the
-comment to the right of the instance.
-
-The following diagram shows how to use comments. In this diagram, the
-distance between the frame and the instances (\verb|\envinstdist|) is
-doubled in order to fit the comments inside the frame.
-
-\medskip
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\begin{msc}{comments}
-\setlength{\envinstdist}{2\envinstdist}
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\mess{a}{i}{j}[2]
-\msccomment{start}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\msccomment[r]{end}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.54\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\setlength{\envinstdist}{2\envinstdist}
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\mess{a}{i}{j}[2]
-\msccomment{start}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\msccomment[r]{end}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-
-
-\subsection{Actions}
-\label{actions}
-An instance can perform an action, which is denoted by a rectangle.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\action(*){name}{instance}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The action is attached at the current level to the \verb+instance+.
-The \verb+name+ is centered inside the action symbol and is processed
-in LR-mode.
-
-The following parameters determine the detailed drawing of the action
-symbol (see Section~\ref{parameters}):
-\verb+\actionwidth+ (the width of the action symbol), and
-\verb+\actionheight+ (the height of the action symbol).
-
-The starred version of the command, \verb+\action*+, produces the same
-result as \verb+\action+, except that the height and width of the
-action symbol are adjusted to fit the contents of the rectangle.
-
-The next example shows that after an action often a multiple level
-increment is needed to obtain nice pictures.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{action}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-%\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-
-\mess{a}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\action{doit}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\mess{b}{i}{j}
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\mess{a}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\action{doit}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\mess{b}{i}{j}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-\subsection{Timers}
-\label{timers}
-There are five commands to draw timer events.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\settimer[placement]{name}{instance}
-\timeout[placement]{name}{instance}
-\stoptimer[placement]{name}{instance}
-\settimeout[placement]{name}{instance}[offset]
-\setstoptimer[placement]{name}{instance}[offset]
-\end{verbatim}
-
-Setting of a timer is drawn as a line connecting the \verb+instance+
-to the {\em hour glass} symbol. The \verb+name+ is put near this
-symbol. A time-out is represented by an arrow from an
-{\em hour glass} symbol to the \verb+instance+. Stopping a timer is
-drawn as a line connecting the \verb+instance+ with the timer stop
-symbol (denoted by a cross).
-The command \verb+\settimeout+ is a combination of the setting of a
-timer and a time out. The \verb+offset+ denotes the number of levels
-between the two events. The default value for \verb+offset+ is 2.
-Likewise, \verb+\setstoptimer+ is a combination
-of the setting of a timer and stopping a timer.
-
-The optional argument \verb+placement+ can have values
-\verb+l+ (meaning that the timer is drawn left of the instance axis)
-and \verb+r+ (meaning that the timer is drawn right of the instance
-axis). By default it is drawn at the left side of the instance.
-
-Several parameters can be used to control the detailed layout of timer
-symbols (see Section~\ref{parameters}):
-\verb+\timerwidth+ (the width of the hour glass and time out symbols),
-\verb+\selfmesswidth+ (the length of the arm between the symbol
-and the instance axis), and
-\verb+\labeldist+ (the distance between the name and the timersymbol).
-Furthermore, the size of the arrow head can be controlled with the
-command \verb+\messarrowscale{size}+.
-
-The various timer symbols are shown in the following example.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{timers}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\settimer{T,50}{j}
-\setstoptimer[r]{V}{k}[6]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\timeout{T}{j}
-\settimeout{U}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\settimer[r]{T,20}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\stoptimer[r]{T}{j}
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\settimer{T,50}{j}
-\setstoptimer[r]{V}{k}[6]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\timeout{T}{j}
-\settimeout{U}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\settimer[r]{T,20}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\stoptimer[r]{T}{j}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-\subsection{Time measurements}
-\label{measurements}
-There are several commands to add time measurements to an \MSC{}.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\mscmark[placement]{name}{instance}
-\measure(*)[placement]{name}{instance1}{instance2}[offset]
-\measurestart(*)[placement]{name}{instance}{gate}
-\measureend(*)[placement]{name}{instance}{gate}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-An absolute time stamp is attached to an event on an \verb+instance+
-with the command
-\verb+mscmark+. The \verb+name+ is the text attached to the mark symbol,
-which is a dashed polyline.
-The position of the mark symbol relative to the marked event is
-determined by the \verb+placement+.
-(\verb+tl+ means top-left, \verb+tr+ means top-right, \verb+bl+ means
-bottom-left, and \verb+br+ means bottom-right).
-
-A \verb+\measure+ connects two events from \verb+instance1+ and
-\verb+instance2+. The first event is at the current level. The second
-event is \verb+offset+ levels lower than the first event. The
-\verb+name+ is attached to the measure symbol. The measure symbol can
-be placed at the left or at the right of \verb+instance1+. This is
-controlled by the optional argument \verb+placement+, which can have
-values \verb+l+ and \verb+r+.
-
-In case the two events are far apart, the measure may be split in two
-parts. The first part is drawn with the \verb+\measurestart+ command
-and the second part with the \verb+\measureend+ command. The points
-where these two parts should be connected are drawn by a small circle,
-to which the text \verb+gate+ is attached.
-
-There are two equivalent forms of the measurement symbol. The first
-form, where the arrow heads are at the inside of the measured
-interval, is the default form. The second form, where the arrow heads
-are at the outside of the measured interval, is obtained by the
-commands \verb+\measure*+, \verb+\measurestart*+, and
-\verb+\measureend*+.
-
-
-Several parameters can be used to control the detailed layout of the
-time measurement symbols (see Section~\ref{parameters}):
-\verb+\labeldist+ (a parameter to specify the distance between the
-label of a measurement and the measurement symbol),
-\verb+\messarrowscale{size}+ (a command to set the size of the arrow
-head),
-\verb+\selfmesswidth+ (specifies the width of the measurement
-symbols).
-
-The following example illustrates marks and measurements in an \MSC{}. In
-order to include the marks inside the frame of the diagram, the
-distance between the frame and the instances (called
-\verb+\envinstdist+) is increased (before the instances are declared).
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{Time measurements}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\envinstdist}
- {2\envinstdist}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\mess{m1}{i}{j}[1]
-\mscmark{t=0.0}{i}
-\measure{0.6}{i}{j}[4]
-\nextlevel
-\mscmark[tr]{t=0.3}{j}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\mess{m2}{j}{k}
-\measurestart*[r]{0.2}{k}{g}
-\nextlevel[6]
-\mess{m3}{k}{i}
-\mscmark[bl]{t=1.0}{i}
-\measureend*[r]{0.2}{k}{g}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.44\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\setlength{\envinstdist}
- {2\envinstdist}
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-\mess{m1}{i}{j}[1]
-\mscmark{t=0.0}{i}
-\measure{0.6}{i}{j}[4]
-\nextlevel
-\mscmark[tr]{t=0.3}{j}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\mess{m2}{j}{k}
-\measurestart*[r]{0.2}{k}{g}
-\nextlevel[6]
-\mess{m3}{k}{i}
-\mscmark[bl]{t=1.0}{i}
-\measureend*[r]{0.2}{k}{g}
-\nextlevel
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-\subsection{Lost and found messages}
-\label{lostfound}
-A lost message is denoted by an arrow starting at an instance and
-ending at a filled circle. A found message is denoted by an arrow
-starting at an open circle and ending at an instance.
-
-The following commands are used to define lost and found messages.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\lost[pos]{name}[labelpos]{gate}{instance}[placement]
-\found[pos]{name}[labelpos]{gate}{instance}[placement]
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The argument \verb+instance+ determines the instance to which the
-arrow is attached. The \verb+name+ of the message is put above the
-message arrow. The \verb+gate+ is a text associated to the circle.
-The optional arguments \verb+pos+, \verb+labelpos+, and
-\verb+placement+ have the same function as in the \verb+\mess+ command
-(Section~\ref{messages}). That is, \verb+pos+ controls the placement
-of the lost or or found message with respect to the instance
-axis. Valid values are \verb+l+ (left) and~\verb+r+ (right). The
-default value is~\verb+l+. The optional parameters \verb+labelpos+
-and \verb+placement+ control the placement of \verb+name+ with respect
-to the message arrow. Valid values for \verb+labelpos+ are \verb+t+
-(on top) and~\verb+b+ (below). The default value is~\verb+t+. Valid
-values for \verb+placement+ are real numbers in the closed interval
-$[0,1]$ and denote the relative distance of the message label
-\verb+name+ to the beginning of the arrow. The default value for
-\verb+placement+ is~$0.5$.
-
-Several parameters can be used to control the detailed layout of lost
-and found messages (see Section~\ref{parameters}):
-\verb+\lostsymbolradius+ (the radius of the circle),
-\verb+\selfmesswidth+ (the length of the arrow), and
-\verb+\labeldist+ (the distance between the name and the arrow).
-Furthermore, the size of the arrow head can be controlled with the
-command \verb+\messarrowscale{size}+.
-
-The following example shows a found and a lost message.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{lost and found}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-
-\found{m}{g}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{p}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\lost[r]{n}{}{j}
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\found{m}{g}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{p}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\lost[r]{n}{}{j}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-
-\subsection{Conditions}
-\label{conditions}
-A condition is denoted by a hexagon. It is used to express that the
-system has entered a certain state. A condition relates to a number of
-instances. All conditions which take part in the condition are covered
-by the condition symbol. The other instances are drawn through the
-condition symbol.
-The following command is used to draw a condition.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\condition{text}{instancelist}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The \verb+text+ is placed in the center of the condition. The
-\verb+instancelist+ expresses which instances take part in the
-condition. It is a list of nicknames of instances, separated by
-commas. Take care not to add extra white space around the nicknames,
-since this is considered part of the nickname in \LaTeX.
-The order in which the instances are listed is immaterial.
-
-There are two parameters which control the shape of the condition
-symbol (see Section~\ref{parameters}):
-\verb+\conditionheight+ (the height of the condition symbol), and
-\verb+\conditionoverlap+ (the width of the part of the condition
-symbol which extends over the rightmost/leftmost contained instance
-axis).
-
-The starred version of the command, \verb+\condition*+, produces the same
-result as \verb+\condition+, except that the height and width of the
-condition symbol are adjusted to fit the contents of the hexagon.
-
-The following example contains some conditions.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{conditions}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\condition{some condition}{i,k}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\mess{m}{i}{j}
-\action{a}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\condition{C}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\condition{A, B, C}{i,j,k}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\condition{some condition}{i,k}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\mess{m}{i}{j}
-\action{a}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\condition{C}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\condition{A, B, C}{i,j,k}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-\subsection{Generalized ordering}
-\label{ordering}
-A generalized order is treated much like a regular message (see
-Section~\ref{messages}). There
-are three differences: a generalized order is drawn with a
-dotted line, it has no label, and the arrow head is in the middle of
-the line. A generalized order is defined with the following command.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\order[pos]{sender}{receiver}[leveloffset]
-\end{verbatim}
-The \verb+sender+ and \verb+receiver+ are the nicknames of the
-instances which are connected by the generalized ordering symbol.
-At the \verb+receiver+ instance, the generalized ordering symbol ends
-at the current level plus the \verb+leveloffset+. The
-\verb+leveloffset+ is an optional integer value, with default 0.
-
-In case \verb+sender+ and \verb+receiver+ denote the same instance,
-the order is a \emph{self order}. The placement of the order arrow of
-a self order is controlled by the optional argument \verb+pos+. It
-can have values \verb+l+ (meaning that the ordering symbol is drawn
-left of the instance axis) and \verb+r+ (meaning that the ordering
-symbol is drawn right of the instance axis). By default it is drawn at
-the left side of the instance. For non-self orders, the \verb+pos+
-argument is ignored.
-
-Additionally, there are two ways to control the shape
-of the generalized ordering symbol (see Section~\ref{parameters}).
-These are:
-\verb+\selfmesswidth+ (a parameter to specify the width of the polyline used for
-drawing orderings on a single instance axis).
-and
-\verb+\messarrowscale{size}+ (a command to set the size of the arrow
-head in the ordering symbol).
-
-Orderings to or from the environment (i.e.\ the left or the right side
-of the \MSC{} frame) can be
-specified by setting the sender or the receiver argument to the value
-\verb+envleft+ or \verb+envright+.
-
-An example of a generalized order is given in the following diagram.
-
-
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{generalized order}
-\setmscvalues{normal}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-
-\mess{m}{envleft}{i}
-\order{i}{j}[1]
-\nextlevel
-\mess{k}{j}{envright}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\mess{m}{envleft}{i}
-\order{i}{j}[1]
-\nextlevel
-\mess{k}{j}{envright}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-\subsection{Instance regions}
-\label{regions}
-A part of the instance axis can be drawn in a different style. Such a
-part is called an {\em instance region}. The following
-regions are supported:
-{\em coregion} (the instance axis is dashed, which means that the order of the
-attached instances is immaterial),
-{\em suspension region} (a small rectangle with dashed left and right
-sides, which denotes that the instance is suspended),
-{\em activation region} (a small filled rectangle, which denotes that
-the instance has control).
-
-The following commands are used to draw an instance region.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\regionstart{type}{instname}
-\regionend{instname}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-If the \verb+\regionstart+ command is used the instance axis of
-\verb+instname+ is drawn in the shape determined by \verb+type+,
-starting from the current level. The type can have values
-\verb+coregion+, \verb+suspension+, and \verb+activation+.
-
-The shape of an instance region can be controlled with the following
-parameters (see Section~\ref{parameters}):
-\verb+\regionbarwidth+ (the width of the coregion start and end
-symbol),
-\verb+\instwidth+ (the width of the fat instance rectangle),
-\verb+\regionwidth+ (the width of the activation and suspension rectangle).
-
-In the following example, several instance regions are demonstrated.
-Notice the relative order of \verb|\mess|, \verb|\regionstart|, and
-\verb|\regionend| commands. Interchanging lines
-\verb|\regionstart{activation}{i}| and \verb|\mess{q}{j}{i}| makes the
-arrow head of the~`q' message partly invisible. Also note that the
-second activation region on~$i$ ends with a method reply
-(which is produced by the command \cmd{mess*}).
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{regions}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\regionstart{activation}{i}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\regionend{i}
-\mess{m}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\regionstart{coregion}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\regionstart{suspension}{k}
-\mess{p}{j}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\regionstart{activation}{i}
-\mess{q}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\regionend{j}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\regionend{i}
-\mess*{r}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{s}{j}{k}
-\regionend{k}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\scriptsize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\regionstart{activation}{i}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\regionend{i}
-\mess{m}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\regionstart{coregion}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\regionstart{suspension}{k}
-\mess{p}{j}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\regionstart{activation}{i}
-\mess{q}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\regionend{j}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\regionend{i}
-\mess*{r}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{s}{j}{k}
-\regionend{k}
-\nextlevel
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-In some situations, the gray-colored activation regions can hide
-message-labels. \emph{Level back-up} can help in these situations, see
-the \emph{Tricks} section in the reference manual~\cite{BM02}.
-
-\subsection{Instance creation and instance stop}
-\label{createstop}
-The \MSC{} language offers constructs for dynamic instance creation and
-instance destruction.
-An instance can dynamically create another instance by issuing a
-create command. An instance creation is drawn as a dashed message
-arrow. At the side of the arrow head, the instance head symbol for the
-created instance is drawn.
-An instance end symbol does not denote the end of the specified
-process, but merely the end of its current description. Therefore, a
-different symbol is needed which denotes that an instance stops before
-the end of the \MSC{} in which it is contained.
-The instance stop symbol is a cross.
-
-The following commands are used for instance creation and instance
-stop.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\dummyinst{createdinst}
-\create{name}
- [labelpos]
- {creator}
- [placement]
- {createdinst}
- {instancenameabove}
- {instancenamewithin}
-\stop{instance}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-In order to reserve space for an instance which will be created
-dynamically, the command \verb+dummyinst+ must be used. This command
-is mixed with the declarations of normal instances (see the
-\verb+declinst+ command, Section~\ref{instances}).
-The argument \verb+createdinst+ is the nickname of the instance that
-will be created later.
-
-An instance can be created with the \verb+\create+ command.
-This command results in a dashed horizontal message arrow labeled with
-\verb+name+. The arrow starts at the current level at the instance
-with nickname \verb+creator+ and ends at the current level at the
-instance head of the instance with nickname \verb+createdinst+. This
-instance must have been declared first with the \verb+dummyinst+
-command.
-The name of the created instance consists of two parts. The part
-called \verb+instancenameabove+ is placed above the instance head and the
-\verb+instancenamewithin+ is centered within the instance head.
-
-As with normal messages, placement of the message label is controlled
-by the optional parameters \verb+labelpos+ and \verb+placement+. That
-is, \verb+labelpos+ denotes the relative position of the message label
-with respect to the message arrow. Valid values are \verb+t+ (on top)
-and \verb+b+ (below). The default value is \verb+t+. The optional
-parameter \verb+placement+ denotes the relative distance of the
-message label with respect to the beginning of the arrow. Valid values
-are real numbers in the closed interval $[0,1]$. The default value
-is~$0.5$. See Figure~\ref{fig:refpoints}
-(page~\pageref{fig:refpoints}) and its description in
-Section~\ref{messages} for more information on the placement of
-message labels.
-
-An instance is stopped with the \verb+\stop+ command.
-The \verb+instance+ is the nickname of the stopped instance. The
-instance axis is not drawn any further below the level at which the
-\verb+\stop+ command is issued. Also, the instance foot symbol is not
-drawn.
-
-The size of the stop symbol is determined by the parameter
-\verb+\stopwidth+ (see Section~\ref{parameters}).
-The following parameters apply to the instance head symbol:
-\verb+\instheadheight+ (the height of the instance head symbol),
-\verb+\instwidth+ (the width of the instance head symbol),
-and
-\verb+\labeldist+ (the distance between the instance head symbol and
-the part of the instance name drawn above the head symbol).
-
-Take care not to specify any events on an instance which has not yet
-been created or which has already
-been stopped. This may lead to unexpected drawings.
-However, it is possible to create an instance after it has stopped,
-as showed in the next example.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{dynamic instances}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\dummyinst{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\mess{p}{i}{k}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\create{kick}{k}{j}{}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\stop{k}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{ok}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\stop{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\create{start}[b]{i}[.75]{k}{}{again}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\dummyinst{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\mess{p}{i}{k}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\create{kick}{k}{j}{}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\stop{k}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{ok}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\stop{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\create{start}[b]{i}[.75]{k}{}{again}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-\subsection{\MSC{} references}
-\label{references}
-Within an \MSC{} a reference to other \MSC{}s can be included. Such a
-reference is drawn as a rectangle with rounded corners, covering part
-of the \MSC{}. The following commands are used to draw \MSC{} references.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\referencestart[lo][ro]{nickname}{text}{leftinstance}{rightinstance}
-\referenceend{nickname}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The reference symbol starts at the level where the
-\verb+\referencestart+ command is used, and ends at the level where
-the corresponding \verb+\referenceend+ command occurs. These commands
-correspond if they have the same \verb+nickname+. The \verb+text+ is
-placed in the center of the reference symbol. The reference covers all
-instances from \verb+leftinstance+ to \verb+rightinstance+. The
-distance between the left (right) edge of the reference symbol and the
-leftmost (rightmost) covered instance axis is defined by the optional
-overlap value \verb+lo+. The default value for \verb+lo+ in large/normal/small
-\MSC{}s is 1.5/1/0.75 (see Section~\ref{parameters} for selecting
-large, normal or small drawing mode). If the second optional value
-\verb+ro+ is present too, the optional value \verb+lo+ defines the left
-overlap and the optional value \verb+ro+ defines the right overlap.
-
-The left and right edge of the reference symbol are
-\verb+nicknameleft+ and \verb+nicknameright+, where \verb+nickname+ is
-the nickname of the \MSC{} reference as defined in the
-\verb+\referencestart+ command.
-These names can be used at every place where the nickname of an
-instance is required, e.g.\ as the sender or receiver of a message.
-This is shown in the following example.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{references}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\mess{a}{j}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\referencestart{r}{a reference}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{b}{rright}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\referenceend{r}
-\nextlevel
-\referencestart{p}{another reference}{i}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{c}{envright}{pright}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\referenceend{p}
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.55\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\mess{a}{j}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\referencestart{r}{a reference}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{b}{rright}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\referenceend{r}
-\nextlevel
-\referencestart{p}{another reference}{i}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{c}{envright}{pright}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\referenceend{p}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-\subsection{Inline expressions}
-\label{inlines}
-An inline expression is a part of an \MSC{} on which an operation is
-defined. A rectangle surrounds the part of the \MSC{} containing the
-operands. The operands are separated by horizontal dashed lines.
-The operator is placed in the upper left corner of the inline
-expression symbol.
-The following commands are used to draw inline expressions.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\inlinestart[lo][ro]{nickname}{operator}{leftinstance}{rightinstance}
-\inlineseparator{nickname}
-\inlineend(*){nickname}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The inline expression starts at the level where the \verb+\inlinestart+
-command occurs. The inline expression spans over the instances from
-\verb+leftinstance+ to \verb+rightinstance+. The \verb+operand+ is
-placed in the upper left corner of the rectangle. At every level where
-a corresponding \verb+\inlineseparator+ command occurs, a dashed line
-is drawn. The inline expression ends at the level where the
-\verb+\inlineend+ command occurs. The \verb+nickname+ is used to match
-corresponding commands.
-The command \verb+\inlineend*+ does the same as the command
-\verb+\inlineend+, except that the bottom line of the rectangle is
-dashed. This is used to indicate that the operand is optional.
-
-The left and right edge of the inline expression symbol are named
-\verb+nicknameleft+ and \verb+nicknameright+, where \verb+nickname+ is
-the nickname of the inline expression as defined in the
-\verb+\inlinestart+ command.
-These names can be used at every place where the nickname of an
-instance is required, e.g.\ as the sender or receiver of a message.
-
-The distance between the left (right) edge of the inline expression
-symbol and
-the leftmost (rightmost) included instance axis is defined by
-the optional overlap value \verb+lo+. The default value for
-large/normal/small \MSC{}s is
-1.5/1/0.75 (see Section~\ref{parameters} for selecting large, normal or small
-drawing mode).
-If the second optional value
-\verb+ro+ is present too, the optional value \verb+lo+ defines the left
-overlap and the optional value \verb+ro+ defines the right overlap.
-These options make it possible to easily draw nested inline expressions
-as in the following example.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{inline expressions}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-
-\inlinestart{exp1}{par}{i}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{a}{k}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\inlinestart[0.6cm]{exp2}{alt}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\mess{b}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineseparator{exp2}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{c}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineend{exp2}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineseparator{exp1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{d}{j}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineend{exp1}
-\nextlevel
-\inlinestart{exp3}{opt}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{e}{envright}{exp3right}
-\mess{e}{exp3right}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{f}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineend*{exp3}
-
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\scriptsize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\inlinestart{exp1}{par}{i}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{a}{k}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\inlinestart[0.6cm]{exp2}{alt}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\mess{b}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineseparator{exp2}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{c}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineend{exp2}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineseparator{exp1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{d}{j}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineend{exp1}
-\nextlevel
-\inlinestart{exp3}{opt}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{e}{envright}{exp3right}
-\mess{e}{exp3right}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{f}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineend*{exp3}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-\subsection{Gates}
-\label{gates}
-
-A gate determines a connection point for messages.
-
-The following command can be used to draw gates.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\gate(*)[hpos][vpos]{gatename}{instname}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The unstarred version produces a normal (invisible) gate. The starred
-version produces a visible gate (a small dot). The gate is drawn at the
-current level at the instance \verb+instname+ (which can also be the
-left and right edge of e.g.\ an \MSC{} reference). The
-\verb+gatename+ is attached to the gate. The positioning of the
-\verb+gatename+ relative to the gate is determined by the values of
-\verb+hpos+ (horizontal position) and \verb+vpos+ (vertical position).
-Possible values for \verb+hpos+ are \verb+l+ (left, default) and
-\verb+right+ (right). Possible values for \verb+vpos+ are \verb+t+
-(top, default), \verb+c+ (center), and \verb+b+ (bottom).
-
-There are several parameters to control the size and shape of the
-gate symbol (see Section~\ref{parameters}). These are
-\verb+\gatesymbolradius+ (sets the radius of the gate symbol),
-\verb+\labeldist+ (the vertical distance between the gate name and
-the gate).
-
-The next example shows a number of gates.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{gates}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-\referencestart{r}{ref}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\gate{$g$}{rright}
-\mess{b}{rright}{envright}
-\gate[r][c]{$h$}{envright}
-\nextlevel
-\nextlevel
-\mess{c}{rright}{k}
-\gate*[l][b]{$h'$}{rright}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\referenceend{r}
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-\referencestart{r}{ref}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\gate{$g$}{rright}
-\mess{b}{rright}{envright}
-\gate[r][c]{$h$}{envright}
-\nextlevel
-\nextlevel
-\mess{c}{rright}{k}
-\gate*[l][b]{$h'$}{rright}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\referenceend{r}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-\subsection{High-level \MSC{}s}
-\label{hmsc}
-A High-level \MSC{} (\HMSC{}) is a drawing which defines the relation between
-a number of \MSC{}s. It is composed of a start symbol (an upside down
-triangle), a number of end symbols (represented by triangles), a
-number of \MSC{} references (these are rectangles with rounded corners),
-a number of conditions (hexagons) and possibly several connection
-points (circles). These symbols are connected by arrows.
-
-The following commands can be used to draw \HMSC{}s.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{hmsc}[headerpos]{hmscname}(llx,lly)(urx,ury)
-\end{hmsc}
-\hmscstartsymbol{nickname}(x,y)
-\hmscendsymbol{nickname}(x,y)
-\hmscreference{nickname}{text}(x,y)
-\hmsccondition{nickname}{text}(x,y)
-\hmscconnection{nickname}(x,y)
-\arrow{from-nickname}[coord-list]{to-nickname}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-In order to draw \HMSC{}s, a new environment is defined, which is called
-\verb+hmsc+. The command to begin this environment has several
-arguments. The argument \verb+headerpos+ is optional. It controls
-positioning of the header of the \HMSC{}. This argument can have values
-\verb+l+ (for a left aligned header), \verb+c+ (for a centered header)
-and \verb+r+ (for a right aligned header). The header of an \HMSC{} is
-formed from the keyword \verb+msc+, followed by the
-\verb+hmscname+. The size of the \HMSC{} frame is determined by the
-coordinates of the lower-left corner, \verb+(llx,lly)+, and the
-coordinates of the upper-right corner, \verb+(urx,ury)+.
-
-The \HMSC{} grid is not drawn, but used to control the positioning of the
-\HMSC{} symbols (\verb+startsymbol+, \verb+endsymbol+, \verb+reference+,
-\verb+condition+, and \verb+connection+).
-The center of each symbol is drawn on the grid point
-with coordinates \verb+{x,y}+. Each symbol also has a \verb+nickname+
-for later reference.
-
-\HMSC{} symbols can be connected by means of the \verb+arrow+ command.
-This draws an arrow from the symbol with nickname \verb+from-nickname+
-to the symbol with nickname \verb+to-nickname+. The optional argument
-\verb+coord-list+ can be used if the line connecting the source and
-the destination should not be straight. The \verb+coord-list+ has
-the following syntax: \verb+(x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xk,yk)+. This means
-that the connecting line goes through the points with coordinates
-(x1,y1), (x2,y2), \ldots, (xk,yk).
-
-Arrows always leave the start symbol at the bottom. They enter the end symbol
-at the top.
-Arrows start and end either at the middle of the top or at the middle
-of the bottom of a reference and condition symbol. The incoming
-(outgoing) direction of the arrow determines whether it will start
-(end) at the top or at the bottom.
-
-There are several parameters to control the size and shape of the
-symbols (see Section~\ref{parameters}). These are
-\verb+\hmscconditionheight+ (the height of the condition symbol),
-\verb+\hmscconditionwidth+ (the width of the condition symbol,
-excluding the left and right angular parts),
-\verb+\hmscreferenceheight+ (the height of the reference symbol),
-\verb+\hmscreferencewidth+ (the width of the reference symbol),
-\verb+\messarrowscale{size}+ (a command to set the size of the arrow
-head of a connection line);
-\verb+setconnectiontype(type)+ (set the shape of the polyline
-connection the symbols; \verb+type+ can be \verb+straight+,
-\verb+rounded+, and \verb+curved+),
-\verb+\startsymbolwidth+ (the width of the start and end symbol),
-\verb+\topnamedist+ (sets the distance between the top of the \HMSC{} frame
-and the \HMSC{} header).
-
-An example of an \HMSC{} is in the following diagram. Notice that the
-width and height of reference symbols are changed locally (i.e.,
-between \verb+{+ and \verb+}+ braces) just before the big
-reference~\verb+b+ is defined.
-
-\medskip
-
-\noindent
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.375\linewidth}
-
-\begin{hmsc}{High level}(-3,0)(3,12)
-\hmscstartsymbol{s}(0,10)
-\hmscreference{a}{A}(0,9)
-\hmscconnection{c}(0,7.5)
-{
-\setlength{\hmscreferencewidth}{2cm}
-\setlength{\hmscreferenceheight}{3\baselineskip}
-\hmscreference{b}{\parbox{1.9cm}
- {\centering
- this is a big
- hmsc reference}
- }(0,6)
-}
-\hmsccondition{t}{Again}(1,4.25)
-\hmsccondition{ok}{Ok}(0,3.5)
-\hmsccondition{q}{\textit{Break}}(-2,3.5)
-\hmscendsymbol{e1}(-2,2)
-\hmscreference{do}{Do it!}(0,2)
-\hmscendsymbol{e2}(0,1)
-
-\arrow{s}{a}
-\arrow{a}{c}
-\arrow{c}{b}
-\arrow{c}[(-2,7.5)]{q}
-\arrow{b}{q}
-\arrow{q}{e1}
-\arrow{b}{ok}
-\arrow{ok}{do}
-\arrow{do}{e2}
-\arrow{b}{t}
-\arrow{t}[(1,3.5)(2.5,3.5)(2.5,7.5)]{c}
-\end{hmsc}
-\end{minipage}\hfill
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.6\linewidth}
-{\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{hmsc}{High level}(-3,0)(3,12)
-\hmscstartsymbol{s}(0,10)
-\hmscreference{a}{A}(0,9)
-\hmscconnection{c}(0,7.5)
-{\setlength{\hmscreferencewidth}{2cm}
- \setlength{\hmscreferenceheight}
- {3\baselineskip}
- \hmscreference{b}{\parbox{1.9cm}
- {\centering this is a big hmsc reference}
- }(0,6)}
-\hmsccondition{t}{Again}(1,4.5)
-\hmsccondition{ok}{Ok}(0,3.5)
-\hmsccondition{q}{\textit{Break}}(-2,3.5)
-\hmscendsymbol{e1}(-2,2)
-\hmscreference{do}{Do it!}(0,2)
-\hmscendsymbol{e2}(0,1)
-\arrow{s}{a}
-\arrow{a}{c}
-\arrow{c}{b}
-\arrow{c}[(-2,7.5)]{q}
-\arrow{b}{q}
-\arrow{q}{e1}
-\arrow{b}{ok}
-\arrow{ok}{do}
-\arrow{do}{e2}
-\arrow{b}{t}
-\arrow{t}[(1,3.5)(2.5,3.5)(2.5,7.5)]{c}
-\end{hmsc}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-\subsection{\MSC{} documents}
-\label{mscdoc}
-An \MSCdoc{} is a drawing which contains various declarations
-of objects used in the \MSC{} description. For drawing \MSCdoc{}s
-he following commands are provided.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{mscdoc}[headerpos]{mscdocname}{text}(llx,lly)(urx,ury)
-\end{mscdoc}
-\reference{text}(x,y)
-\separator{y}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-As for \MSC{} and \HMSC{}, a new environment is defined, which is named
-\verb+mscdoc+. The command to begin an \MSCdoc{} has several
-arguments. The argument \verb+headerpos+ is optional. It controls
-positioning of the header of the \MSCdoc{}.
-This argument can have values
-\verb+l+ (for a left aligned header), \verb+c+ (for a centered header)
-and \verb+r+ (for a right aligned header).
-The header of an \MSCdoc{} is formed from the keyword \verb+mscdocument+,
-followed by the \verb+mscdocname+.
-The \verb+text+ is placed left-aligned below the \MSCdoc{} header.
-The size of the \MSCdoc{} frame is determined by
-coordinates of the lower-left corner, \verb+(llx,lly)+, and the
-coordinates of the upper-right corner, \verb+(urx,ury)+.
-
-The \MSCdoc{} grid is not drawn, but used to control the positioning of the
-\MSC{} references.
-The center of such a reference is drawn on the grid point
-with coordinates \verb+{x,y}+.
-
-The \verb+separator+ command draws a dashed horizontal line. The \MSC{}
-references above the separator are the exported, while the ones below
-the separator are local.
-
-There are several parameters to control the size and shape of the
-symbols (see Section~\ref{parameters}).
-\verb+\mscdocreferenceheight+ (the height of the reference symbol),
-\verb+\mscdocreferencewidth+ (the width of the reference symbol),
-\verb+\topnamedist+ (sets the distance between the top of the \MSCdoc{}
-frame and the \MSCdoc{} header).
-
-An example of an \MSCdoc{} is in the following diagram. Notice that
-the size of references in an \MSCdoc{} had to be changed for the last
-reference.
-
-\medskip
-
-
-\begin{minipage}{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{mscdoc}{My declarations}%
- (0,0)(6,8)
-\reference{a}(1,6)
-\reference{b}(3,6)
-\reference{c}(1,4)
-\reference{d}(3,4)
-\separator{3}
-\setlength{\mscdocreferencewidth}{4.5\mscunit}
-\setlength{\mscdocreferenceheight}{2\baselineskip}
-\reference{%
- \parbox{4\mscunit}%
- {\raggedright This is a
- two-line reference}}
- (3,1.5)
-\end{mscdoc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{mscdoc}{My declarations}%
- (0,0)(6,8)
-\reference{a}(1,6)
-\reference{b}(3,6)
-\reference{c}(1,4)
-\reference{d}(3,4)
-\separator{3}
-\setlength{\mscdocreferencewidth}
- {4.5\mscunit}
-\setlength{\mscdocreferenceheight}
- {2\baselineskip}
-\reference{%
- \parbox{4\mscunit}%
- {\raggedright This is a
- two-line reference}}
- (3,1.5)
-\end{mscdoc}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-
-\section{Style parameters}
-\label{parameters}
-
-By means of a collection of parameters, the graphical appearance of
-an \MSC{} can be fine tuned to the user's taste.
-The general parameters
-are displayed in Figure~\ref{parametersfig} on page~\pageref{parametersfig}.
-
-%========================
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\vspace{2ex} %Needed to get enough white space before the top label of
- %the figure.
-
-\newcommand{\printlength}[1]{\mbox{\footnotesize\ttfamily \char`\\#1}}
-\begin{center}
-\setmscvalues{normal}
-\begin{msc}{Lengths}
-\psset{linewidth=.4pt,dotsep=1pt}
-\newlength{\lta}
-\newlength{\ltb}
-% \topnamedist
-\psline[linestyle=dotted](1.5cm,-\topnamedist)(2.5cm,-\topnamedist)
-\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(2.5cm,.2cm)(2.5cm,0cm)
-\setlength{\lta}{\topnamedist+.2cm}
-\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(2.5cm,-\lta)(2.5cm,-\topnamedist)
-\rput[tl](2.5cm,.4cm){\printlength{topnamedist}}
-
-% \leftnamedist
-\setlength{\lta}{\leftnamedist+10pt}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topnamedist}
-\psline[linestyle=dotted,arrowscale=1.0]{->}(-10pt,-\ltb)(0,-\ltb)
-\psline[linestyle=dotted,arrowscale=1.0]{->}(\lta,-\ltb)(\leftnamedist,-\ltb)
-\psline[linestyle=dotted](\leftnamedist,10pt)(\leftnamedist,-\baselineskip)
-\rput[br](-10pt,-\ltb){\printlength{leftnamedist}}
-
-% \topheaddist
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+\instdist-.5\instwidth}
-\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(\lta,0cm)(\lta,-\topheaddist)
-\rput[l](\lta,-.5\topheaddist){ \printlength{topheaddist}}
-
-% \bottomfootdist
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\lastlevelheight+\instfootheight+\levelheight*12}
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist-.5\instwidth}
-\rput[tl](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(0,-\bottomfootdist)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+.5\bottomfootdist}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{bottomfootdist}}
-
-% \instheadheight
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist+.5\instwidth+.2cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(0,-\instheadheight)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+.5\instheadheight}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{instheadheight}}
-
-% \firstlevelheight
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+\instdist+.2cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,-\firstlevelheight)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+.5\firstlevelheight}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{firstlevelheight}}
-
-% \levelheight
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+\instdist+.2cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(0,-\levelheight)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+.5\levelheight}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{levelheight}}
-
-% \actionheight
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist+0.5\actionwidth+.2cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*7}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(0,-\actionheight)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+.7\actionheight}
-\rput[bl](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{actionheight}}
-
-% \actionwidth
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist-0.5\actionwidth}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*7-.2cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\actionwidth,0)}
-\setlength{\lta}{\lta+.5\actionwidth}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb-.1cm}
-\rput[bl](\lta,-\ltb){\rule{0pt}{2ex}\printlength{actionwidth}}
-
-% \conditionheight
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist+\conditionoverlap+0.8\conditionheight}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*10}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(0,-\conditionheight)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+.7\conditionheight}
-\rput[bl](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{conditionheight}}
-
-% \inlineoverlap
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*5-.2cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\inlineoverlap,0)}
-%\setlength{\lta}{\lta+\inlineoverlap}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb-.1cm}
-\rput[bl](\lta,-\ltb){\rule{0pt}{2ex}\printlength{inlineoverlap}}
-
-% \referenceoverlap
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*7-.2cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\referenceoverlap,0)}
-%\setlength{\lta}{\lta+\referenceoverlap}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb-.1cm}
-\rput[bl](\lta,-\ltb){\rule{0pt}{2ex}\printlength{referenceoverlap}}
-
-% \conditionoverlap
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*10-.2cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\conditionoverlap,0)}
-%\setlength{\lta}{\lta+\conditionoverlap}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb-.1cm}
-\rput[bl](\lta,-\ltb){\rule{0pt}{2ex}\printlength{conditionoverlap}}
-
-% \lastlevelheight
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist+.2cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*12}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(0,-\lastlevelheight)}
-%\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+.5\lastlevelheight}
-\rput[bl](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{lastlevelheight}}
-
-% \instfootheight
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist+.5\instwidth+.1cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*12+\lastlevelheight}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(0,.3cm)(0,0)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+\instfootheight}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(0,-.3cm)(0,0)}
-\rput[tl](\lta,-\ltb){ \printlength{instfootheight}}
-
-% \selfmesswidth
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist-\selfmesswidth}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*2-.2cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\selfmesswidth,0)}
-%\setlength{\lta}{\lta+\selfmesswidth}
-\rput[r](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{selfmesswidth}}
-
-% \regionbarwidth
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist-.5\regionbarwidth}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*2-.2cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\regionbarwidth,0)}
-\setlength{\lta}{\lta+\regionbarwidth}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{regionbarwidth}}
-
-% \instwidth
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\lastlevelheight+\instfootheight+\levelheight*12+.2cm}
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist-0.5\instwidth}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\instwidth,0)}
-\rput[tl](\lta,-\ltb){\rule{0pt}{2ex}\printlength{instwidth}}
-
-% \instdist
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+2.5\levelheight}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\instdist,0)}
-\setlength{\lta}{\lta+.5\instdist}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb-.1cm}
-\rput[b](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{instdist}}
-
-% \envinstwidth
-\setlength{\lta}{0cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+.5\levelheight}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\envinstdist,0)}
-\rput[tl](\lta,-\ltb){ \printlength{envinstdist}}
-
-
-% \labeldist
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist-.5\instwidth}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist-\labeldist}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted](-.2cm,0)(.5cm,0)}
-\rput[b](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(-.1cm,.3cm)(-.1cm,0)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted](-.2cm,0)(.5cm,0)}
-\rput[b](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(-.1cm,-.3cm)(-.1cm,0)}
-\rput[tr](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{labeldist} }
-
-% \timerwidth
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist-\selfmesswidth-0.5\timerwidth}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*4+.4cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\timerwidth,0)}
-%\setlength{\lta}{\lta+\selfmesswidth}
-\rput[r](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{timerwidth}}
-
-% \stopwidth
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+\instdist-0.5\stopwidth}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*4+0.5\stopwidth+.1cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\stopwidth,0)}
-\setlength{\lta}{\lta+\stopwidth}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{stopwidth}}
-
-% \lostsymbolradius
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist+\selfmesswidth+2\lostsymbolradius+0.1cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*4}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(0,.3cm)(0,0)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+\lostsymbolradius}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(0,-.3cm)(0,0)}
-\rput[tl](\lta,-\ltb){ \printlength{lostsymbolradius}}
-
-\psset{linewidth=.8pt,dotsep=3pt}
-
-\declinst{m1}{aname}{iname}
-\declinst{st}{}{}
-\declinst{m2}{}{}
-
-\mess{msg1}{m1}{st}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{msg2}{m1}{st}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{self}{m1}{m1}
-\coregionstart{m2}
-\nextlevel
-\coregionend{m2}
-\nextlevel
-\lost[r]{x}{}{m2}
-\stop{st}
-\settimer{T}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\inlinestart{alt}{alt}{m1}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\inlineend{alt}
-\action{a}{m2}
-\nextlevel
-\referencestart{ref}{reference}{m1}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\referenceend{ref}
-\nextlevel
-\condition{cond1}{m1,m2}
-\nextlevel
-\nextlevel
-\mess{msg3}{m2}{m1}
-\end{msc}
-\end{center}
-
-
-\caption{User controllable parameters}
-\label{parametersfig}
-\end{figure}
-
-The value of a parameter can be changed using standard
-\LaTeX\ commands, e.g.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\setlength{\levelheight}{1cm}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The following list describes all parameters.
-The default values for drawing \MSC{}s at large, normal and small size are
-included. See the command \verb+\setmscvalues{size}+ below for
-restoring the parameters to their original values.
-
-%========================
-\begin{defs}
-
-\item[\cmd{actionheight}]
-Height of action symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{actionwidth}]
-Width of action symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.25}{1.25}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{bottomfootdist}]
-Distance between bottom of foot symbol and frame.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.7}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{commentdist}]
-Distance between a comment and its instance.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.5}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{conditionheight}]
-Height of condition symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{conditionoverlap}]
-Overlap of condition symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.5}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{envinstdist}]
-Distance between environments and nearest instance line.\\
-(\lnsvalue{2.5}{2.0}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{firstlevelheight}] Height of level just below head
-symbols. Should not be changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscconditionheight}]
-Height of \HMSC{} condition symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.375}{0.3}{0.25} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscconditionwidth}]
-Width of \HMSC{} condition symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.8}{0.7} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscconnectionradius}]
-Radius of \HMSC{} connection symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.06}{0.05}{0.04} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscreferenceheight}]
-Height of \HMSC{} reference symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.375}{0.3}{0.25} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscreferencewidth}]
-Width of \HMSC{} reference symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.8}{0.7} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscstartsymbolwidth}]
-Width of \HMSC{} start symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.3} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{inlineoverlap}]
-Overlap of inline symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.0}{0.75} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instbarwidth}]
-Default width of vertical instance bars (applies to fat instances only).\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.0}{0.0}{0.0} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instdist}]
-Distance between instance axes.\\
-(\lnsvalue{3.0}{2.2}{1.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instfootheight}] Height of foot symbols. Should not be
-changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.25}{0.2}{0.15} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instheadheight}] Height of head symbols. Should not be
-changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.55}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instwidth}]
-Width of header and foot symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.75}{1.6}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{labeldist}]
-Distance between labels and the symbols to which they belong (for instance, message labels and arrows).\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} ex.)
-
-\item[\cmd{lastlevelheight}] Height of level just above foot
-symbols. Should not be changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.4}{0.3} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{leftnamedist}] Distance between left of the frame and
-(left of) \MSC, \HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} title.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.3}{0.2}{0.1} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{levelheight}]
-Height of a level.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.5}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{lostsymbolradius}]
-Radius of the lost and found symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.15}{0.12}{0.08} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{markdist}]
-Horizontal distance from a mark to its instance.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{measuredist}]
-Horizontal distance from a measure to its (closest) instance.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{measuresymbolwidth}]
-Width of a measure symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{mscdocreferenceheight}]
-Height of reference symbol in an \MSCdoc.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.375}{0.3}{0.25} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{mscdocreferencewidth}]
-Width of reference symbol in an \MSCdoc.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.8}{0.7} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{referenceoverlap}]
-Overlap of reference symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.0}{0.75} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{regionbarwidth}]
-Width of region bars.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.4}{0.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{selfmesswidth}]
-Length of horizontal arms of self messages.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{stopwidth}]
-Width of the stop symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.5}{0.3} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{timerwidth}]
-Width of the \emph{timer} symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.4}{0.3}{0.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{topheaddist}]
-Distance between top of head symbols and frame.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.3}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{topnamedist}] Distance between top of the frame and
-(top of) \MSC, \HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} title.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.3}{0.2}{0.2} cm.)
-
-\end{defs}
-
-In addition there are several commands which allow the user to adjust
-the \MSC{} drawing to his own taste.
-
-\begin{defs}
-
-\item[\cmd{messarrowscale}\{\emph{scalefactor}\}] Sets the scale
-factor (a positive real number) of message arrow
-heads. (\lnsvalue{2}{1.5}{1.2})
-
-\item[\cmd{setmscscale}\{\emph{scalefactor}\}] Sets the scale factor
-of the \MSC{} environment to \emph{scalefactor}. the scale factor is
-supposed to be a real number. Scaling is done when the \MSC{}
-environment ends (\verb|\end{msc}|). The default of \emph{scalefactor}
-is~1. A more consistent way for
-varying the size of the \MSC{} can be obtained by using the
-\verb+\setmesvalues+ command as described below.
-(default value 1.)
-
-\item[\cmd{psset}\{\texttt{linewidth=D}\}] This command sets the width
-of all lines in \MSC{}s, \HMSC{}s, and \MSCdoc{}s to length \verb+D+. If
-this command is issued outside the msc environment, then the value is
-set for the complete document. If it is used directly after the start
-of the msc environment it only holds for this \MSC{}.\\
-(large/normal/small value 0.8/0.7/0.6 pt.)
-
-\item[\cmd{setfootcolor}\{\emph{color}\}] Sets the color of the foot
-symbols of \MSC{} instances. Possible values are \emph{black},
-\emph{white}, \emph{gray}, or \emph{lightgray}. For more color values,
-see the documentation of the \LaTeXe{} \textsf{color} package.
-
-\end{defs}
-
-The following command can be used to set the above mentioned
-style parameters to suitable values.
-
-\begin{defs}
-\item[\cmd{setmscvalues}\{\emph{size}\}] Sets all parameters of the \mscpack{} to
- predefined values. Valid values for \emph{size} are:
-\verb|small|, \verb|normal|, and \verb|large|.
-(The default value of \verb+size+ is \verb+normal+.
-This can be used for drawings with at maximum six instances on a
-sheet of A4 paper.
-For sizes \verb+large+ and \verb+small+, a maximum of four and nine
-instances respectively fit on a sheet of A4 paper.)
-\end{defs}
-
-Caution has to be taken when changing the value of a parameter within
-the \MSC{} definition. The following parameters can be changed within an
-\MSC{} definition without unexpected side effects:
-
-\begin{flushleft}
-\verb+\actionheight+,
-\verb+\actionwidth+,
-\verb+\bottomfootdist+,
-\verb+\conditionheight+,
-\verb+\conditionoverlap+,
-\verb+\inlineoverlap+,
-\verb+\instfootheight+,
-\verb+\instwidth+ (however, this may cause different sizes of
-corresponding instance header and footer symbols),
-\verb+\labeldist+,
-\verb+\lastlevelheight+,
-\verb+\levelheight+,
-\verb+\lostsymbolradius+,
-\verb+\referenceoverlap+,
-\verb+\regionbarwidth+,
-\verb+\selfmesswidth+,
-\verb+\stopwidth+,
-\verb+\timerwidth+, and
-\verb+\topnamedist+.
-\end{flushleft}
-
-
-In addition to the parameters specific to the \mscpack,
-standard \LaTeX\ commands can be used to change the type style and
-other details.
-For example, if the command \verb+\sffamily+ is included directly after
-the start of the msc environment, the text in the \MSC{}
-is drawn using a {\sf sans serif} font. Likewise, the text size can be
-changed by inserting, e.g., the command \verb+\small+.
-The \verb+\raisebox+ and \verb+\parbox+ commands
-can also be used to position and format names.
-
-
-\section{Example}
-\label{example}
-Figure~\ref{ex} on page~\pageref{ex} shows the \MSC{} defined in the
-following \LaTeX\ fragment.
-
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{Example}
-\declinst{usr}{The user}{User}
-\declinst{m1}{Control}{M1}
-\dummyinst{m2}
-\declinst{m3}{Another Machine}{M3}
-
-\create{start}{m1}{m2}{Processing}{M2}
-\mess{msg 0}{envleft}{usr}
-\mess{msg 1}{envright}{m2}[1]
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{msg 2}{usr}{m1}
-\order{m1}{m2}[4]
-\action{a}{m3}
-
-\nextlevel
-\found{msg x}{}{usr}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{msg 3}{usr}{m2}[-1]
-\coregionstart{m1}
-\settimeout{S}{m3}[2]
-\nextlevel
-
-
-\mess{msg 4}{m1}{usr}
-\coregionstart{m2}
-\settimer[r]{T}{m3}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess[r]{msg 5}{m2}{m2}[3]
-\mess{msg 6}{usr}{usr}[2]
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{msg 7}{m2}{usr}
-\timeout[r]{T}{m3}
-\nextlevel
-
-\coregionend{m2}
-\nextlevel
-
-\coregionend{m1}
-\stoptimer[r]{T'}{m3}
-\nextlevel
-
-\lost[r]{msg y}{Mach 1}{usr}
-\mess{msg 8}{m1}{envright}
-\nextlevel
-
-\condition{condition 1}{usr,m2}
-\setstoptimer[r]{U}{m3}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\stop{usr}
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\begin{center}
-\begin{msc}{Example}
-\declinst{usr}{The user}{User}
-\declinst{m1}{Control}{M1}
-\dummyinst{m2}
-\declinst{m3}{Another Machine}{M3}
-
-\create{start}{m1}{m2}{Processing}{M2}
-\mess{msg 0}{envleft}{usr}
-\mess{msg 1}{envright}{m2}[1]
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{msg 2}{usr}{m1}
-\order{m1}{m2}[4]
-\action{a}{m3}
-
-\nextlevel
-\found{msg x}{}{usr}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{msg 3}{usr}{m2}[-1]
-\coregionstart{m1}
-\settimeout{S}{m3}[2]
-\nextlevel
-
-
-\mess{msg 4}{m1}{usr}
-\coregionstart{m2}
-\settimer[r]{T}{m3}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess[r]{msg 5}{m2}{m2}[3]
-\mess{msg 6}{usr}{usr}[2]
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{msg 7}{m2}{usr}
-\timeout[r]{T}{m3}
-\nextlevel
-
-\coregionend{m2}
-\nextlevel
-
-\coregionend{m1}
-\stoptimer[r]{T'}{m3}
-\nextlevel
-
-\lost[r]{msg y}{Mach 1}{usr}
-\mess{msg 8}{m1}{envright}
-\nextlevel
-
-\condition{condition 1}{usr,m2}
-\setstoptimer[r]{U}{m3}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\stop{usr}
-
-\end{msc}
-
-\caption{A menagerie of \MSC{} symbols}
-\label{ex}
-\end{center}
-\end{figure}
-
-
-\section{Acknowledgments}
-Thanks are due to the following people for providing us with useful
-input: Peter Peters, Michel Reniers.
-
-\bibliographystyle{plain}
-\bibliography{biblio}
-
-\end{document}
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.pdf 2022-05-13 21:35:58 UTC (rev 63290)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.pdf 2022-05-13 21:37:05 UTC (rev 63291)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.tex 2022-05-13 21:37:05 UTC (rev 63291)
@@ -0,0 +1,2299 @@
+% file: manual.tex
+% Copyright 2008-2013 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, P. Kordy, and S. Mauw
+% This file is part of the MSC Macro Package.
+%
+\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article}
+\def\pgfautoxrefs{1}
+\usepackage[version=latest]{pgf}
+\usepackage{xparse}
+% \usepackage{a4wide}
+% \usepackage{url}
+\usepackage{moreverb}
+\usepackage{multicol}
+\usepackage{msc}
+\usepackage{showexpl}
+\usepackage{xkeyval,calc,listings,tikz,fp}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{ifluatex}
+\usepackage[a4paper,left=2.25cm,right=2.25cm,top=2.5cm,bottom=2.5cm,nohead]{geometry}
+\usepackage{amsmath,amssymb}
+\usepackage{xxcolor}
+\usepackage{pifont}
+\usepackage{makeidx}
+\usepackage{compsci}
+\usepackage{xstring}
+% \usepackage{pgfmanual}
+\newcommand{\PK}[1]{%
+{\color{red}{\bf[PK]} #1}}
+
+% we allow a ragged right
+\setlength{\rightskip}{0pt plus 0.05\linewidth minus 0pt}
+
+\input{manual-macros.tex}
+% \hypersetup{hidelinks}
+\hypersetup{%
+ colorlinks=true, % use true to enable colors below:
+ linkcolor=blue,%red,
+ filecolor=blue,%magenta,
+ urlcolor=blue,%cyan,
+ citecolor=blue,
+ pdfborder=0 0 0,
+}
+
+\makeindex
+\makeatletter
+\def\convertto#1#2{\strip at pt\dimexpr #2*65536/\number\dimexpr 1#1}%\dimexpr require etex
+\input{pgfmanual.code}
+\pgfkeys{
+ % list is tried to find a match.
+ /pdflinks/search key prefixes in={/msc/,/tikz/,/pgf/,/depgraph/},
+ %
+}
+\newcommand{\msckey}[3]{
+ \IfEndWith*{\mscget{#1}}{pt}{%
+ \IfStrEq*{#1}{label distance}{
+ \def\tmp{\convertto{ex}{\mscget{#1}}ex}
+ }{
+ \def\tmp{\convertto{cm}{\mscget{#1}}cm}
+ }
+ }{%
+ \edef\tmp{\mscget{#1}}
+ }
+
+ \begin{key}{/msc/#1=#2 (initially \tmp)}
+ #3
+ \end{key}
+}
+\newcommand{\mscstyle}[2]{
+ \begin{stylekey}{/msc/#1}
+ #2
+ \end{stylekey}
+}
+
+% The following code is taken from the doc package. It defines a global
+% macro \bslash that produces a bslash (if present in the current font).
+{\catcode`\|=\z@ \catcode`\\=12 |gdef|bslash{\}}
+\makeatother
+\title{
+ A \LaTeX{} macro package for Message Sequence Charts\\{\large User Manual}
+}
+
+\author{
+ \begin{tabular}{c}
+ \begin{tabular}{ccc}
+ Victor Bos & &
+ Ton van Deursen\\
+ & & \\
+ Piotr Kordy& &
+ Sjouke Mauw
+ \end{tabular}\\
+ \end{tabular}
+}
+
+\date{\small Version A\mscversion, last update \today\\
+ Describing \mscpack{} version \mscversion}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+\noindent
+The \mscpack{} facilitates the \LaTeX\ user to easily include
+Message Sequence Charts in his texts. This document describes the
+design and use of the \mscpack.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\tableofcontents
+\section{New}
+\label{new}
+\paragraph{Version~2.00} is the result of a complete rewrite of the package.
+The main difference is that the package is
+now implemented in \tikzname\ instead of \verb+PSTricks+, making it
+compatible with
+\verb+pdfLaTex+ and \beamer.
+
+In addition the syntax has been slightly extended. It now supports the
+specification of all options as a comma separated list in square
+brackets, while remaining backward compatible. All lengths are now
+stored using \pgfname\ keys. As a result it is possible to change
+sizes of shapes individually. Support for colors is added.
+
+We are much indebted to Adrian Farmadin (Masaryk University, Czech
+Republic) for initiating and contributing to this software rehaul.
+
+
+\paragraph{Version~1.17} slightly modifies the handling of the
+|offset| argument of the |\mess|, |\setstoptimer|, and
+|\settimeout| commands. All commands with an |offset|
+argument can now properly handle real numbers as
+argument. Furthermore, the \verb+\topheaddist+,
+\verb+\firstlevelheight+, and \verb+\instheadheight+ lengths are now
+taken into account when computing the height of the instance and the
+\verb+\gatesymbolradius+ length is now properly implemented.
+
+The |\condition*| macro is now extended to dynamically
+resize a condition symbol that spans multiple instances. The
+|\condition*| and |\action*| macros, introduced in the
+previous release, no longer shrink to a size smaller than their
+non-starred counterparts. The |\condition| and
+|\action| have crossed-out counterparts |\ncondition| and
+|\naction| respectively.
+
+A variation to the \verb+\stop+ command is implemented. Rather than
+drawing a cross to denote that an instance has stopped, the
+\verb+\stop*+ command draws an instance footer.
+
+Finally, the \verb+\create+ command no longer requires the
+\verb+creator+ parameter to be specified. If it is not specified, no
+arrow is drawn from the creator to the dynamically created instance.
+
+
+\paragraph{Version~1.16} solves a bug that was due to a change in
+syntax of the \verb+scalebox+ macro in the \verb+PSTricks+ package.
+
+The |\action| and |\condition| macros are extended with a
+starred option. The starred version of the macros automatically
+adjusts the size of the rectangle and hexagon based on the size of the
+contents.
+
+\paragraph{Version~1.13} has a reimplementation of message commands in MSC
+diagrams. The affected commands are: |\create|, |\found|,
+|\lost|, |\mess|, and |\order|. The new implementation
+provides more control over the placement of message labels.
+
+The command \verb+\selfmesslabelpos+ has been removed.
+
+The bounding box bug has been partly solved. Now, a white |\fbox|
+is drawn around every (msc, mscdoc, hmsc) diagram. This makes it
+possible for \texttt{dvips -E} to compute the correct bounding box for
+the diagrams. Due to the |\fbox|, each diagram is extended with
+0.3pt on each side (left, top, right, and bottom). This bugfix fails
+if the background is not white. The xdvi program shows the white
+|\fbox| in black with the result that diagrams have two visible
+frames. This seems to be a bug of xdvi.
+
+The lines around comments (|\msccomment|, Section~\ref{comments})
+are changed from gray into black. The reason for this is that the gray
+lines became invisible after converting the document to HTML.
+
+\section{Introduction}
+\label{introduction}
+
+The \MSC{} language is a visual language for the description of the
+interaction between different components of a system.
+This language is standardized by the ITU (International
+Telecommunication Union) in Recommendation Z.120~\cite{z120}. An
+introductory text on \MSC{} can be found
+in~\cite{RudolphGrabowskiGraubmann96}. \MSC{}s have a
+wide application domain, ranging from requirements specification to
+testing and documentation.
+An example of a Message Sequence Chart is in Figure~\ref{quick}.
+
+In order to support easy drawing of \MSC{}s in \LaTeX\ documents, we have
+developed the \mscpack. The current version of the \mscpack{}
+supports the following \MSC{} constructs: \MSC{} frame, instances (both
+single line width and double line width), messages (including
+self-messages and messages to the environment), actions, singular and
+combined timer events (set, timeout, reset, set-timeout, set-stop),
+lost and found messages, generalized order, conditions, coregions,
+activation regions, suspension regions, gates, instance creation,
+instance stop, time measurements, references, and inline
+expressions. In addition, there is support for \HMSC{}'s (high-level
+\MSC{}s) and \MSCdoc{}s.
+
+In this manual we explain the design and the use of the \mscpack. For
+a complete overview of all features, we refer to the reference
+manual~\cite{BM02}, which is included in the distribution under the
+name \verb+refman.ps+. Another way to learn how to use the \mscpack{}
+is to have a look at the \LaTeX{} source code of the manual and the
+source code of the reference manual. They are included in the
+distribution under the names \verb+manual.tex+ and \verb+refman.tex+,
+respectively. The \MSC{} constructs are simply introduced as
+syntactic constructs. This paper is not meant to describe their use or
+meaning.
+
+We list the backgrounds of the package and some design decisions in
+Section~\ref{background}.
+Section~\ref{install} contains notes on installing the
+package. Section~\ref{quickstart} contains an example of using the
+package. It allows the impatient reader to quickly start using the
+package. The details of using the package are explained in
+Section~\ref{use}. In Section~\ref{parameters} the parameters are
+explained which determine detailed layout of the various symbols.
+A large but meaningless example is given in
+Section~\ref{example}.
+
+
+\section{Background and motivation}
+\label{background}
+Several commercial and non-commercial tools are available, which
+support drawing or generating Message Sequence Charts. However, these
+tools are in general not freely available and often not flexible
+enough to satisfy all user's wishes with respect to the layout and
+graphical appearance of an \MSC{}.
+Therefore, people often use general drawing tools, such as {\em xfig}
+to draw \MSC{}s. However flexible this approach is, it takes quite some
+effort to produce nice \MSC{} drawings in a tool which is not dedicated
+to \MSC{}s. Furthermore, when drawing a number of \MSC{}s it requires some
+preciseness in order to obtain a consistent set of \MSC{}s.
+
+For these reasons, we have started the design of a set of
+\LaTeX\ macros which support the drawing of \MSC{}s. In this way, an \MSC{} can be
+represented in \LaTeX\ in a textual format and compiled into
+e.g.\ PostScript.
+
+We aimed at satisfying the following requirements and design
+decisions.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+The package should follow the ITU standard with respect to shape and
+placement of the symbols. (The current version supports
+the \MSC2000 standard.)
+\item
+Static and dynamic semantics are not considered. The user is allowed
+to violate all semantical restrictions and draw inconsistent \MSC{}s.
+The package only supports elementary syntactical requirements.
+\item
+The package should offer functionality at the right level of
+abstraction. Rather than supplying coordinates of pixels, the
+user should be able to express the placement of symbols in terms of
+{\em levels}.
+Nevertheless, the textual representation of \MSC{}s as defined by the ITU
+standard has a level of abstraction which is too high for our purposes.
+It lacks information about the actual positioning of the \MSC{} symbols,
+while we think that in our package this should be under user control.
+\item
+There should be only minimal automatic restructuring and layout of the
+\MSC{} (e.g.\ the relative positioning of two messages should be as
+defined by the user, even if the messages are not causally ordered).
+\item
+The user can customize the appearance of the \MSC{}s by manipulating
+an appropriate set of parameters.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Installation, copyright and system requirements}
+\label{install}
+
+The \mscpack{} is still under development. The authors
+appreciate any comments and suggestions for improvements. The most
+recent version of the package can be downloaded from
+\url{http://satoss.uni.lu/mscpackage/}.
+
+
+The \mscpack{} has a \emph{LaTeX Project Public License}
+(LPPL), see~\url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}:
+{\small
+\verbatiminput{COPYRIGHT}
+} As such, it is free of charge and can be freely
+distributed. Furthermore, it is allowed to make modifications to the
+package, provided that modified versions get different names. The
+authors accept no liability with respect to the functioning of the
+package.
+
+The \mscpack{} runs with \LaTeXe. It has been tested with \LaTeXe\
+version dated 1998/06/01 using \TeX\ version 3.14159. The following
+additional packages are required: \textsf{tikz}, \textsf{calc},
+and \textsf{xstring}. These packages are in general
+part of the standard \LaTeXe\ distribution. These additional packages
+can be obtained from the {\em ctan} database for \LaTeX\, e.g.\ via
+the following URL: \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/}. The \textsf{tikz}
+package is described shortly in~\cite{mertz2007graphics} or in the \pgfname
+manual~\cite{tantau2022pgf}.
+The generated output can be previewed with pdf/ps previewing software.
+It may be needed to update all \LaTeX\ related software
+to a more recent version in order to smoothly work with the \mscpack.
+
+The \mscpack{} can be installed easily. Just put the file
+|msc.sty| in a directory which is searched by \LaTeX{} for style
+files. The set of directories actually searched depends on the \TeX\
+installation, but often the {\em current directory} is included. UNIX
+users may have to set the environment variable \texttt{\$TEXINPUTS} to
+an appropriate value. For more details on this topic consult
+documentation of your \TeX\ installation.
+
+%The following text is currently not applicable -sm
+%
+%A problem may occur when using more packages than the \MSC{} macro
+%package in your \LaTeX\ document. This happens, e.g.\ when using the
+%{\em epsfig} package. These problems are due to the combination of
+%several packages which are required (but not provided) by the \MSC{}
+%macro package. The solution is to change the order of the
+%\verb+usepackage+ clauses.
+
+\section{Quick start}
+\label{quickstart}
+The \mscpack{} is easy to use.
+Below is an example of the use of the package and
+Figure~\ref{quick} shows the generated \MSC{}.
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\begin{center}
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-6.8cm]
+\begin{msc}{Example}
+\declinst{usr}{User}{}
+\declinst{m1}{Machine 1}{control}
+\declinst{m2}{Machine 2}{drill}
+
+\mess[label position=below]
+{startm1}{usr}{m1}
+\nextlevel
+\mess{startm2}{m1}{m2}
+\nextlevel
+\mess{log}{m1}{envleft}
+\nextlevel
+\nextlevel
+\mess{output}{m2}{usr}[2]
+\mess{free}{m1}{usr}
+\nextlevel
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+\end{center}
+\caption{The generated \MSC{}}
+\label{quick}
+\end{figure}
+The \mscpack{} is activated by the clause \verb+\usepackage{msc}+. This package
+contains, among others, a definition of the environment |msc|. This
+environment is used to draw \MSC{}s. The \MSC{} definition is surrounded by the
+clauses |\begin{msc}{Example}| and |\end{msc}|. The name of the
+\MSC{}, {\tt Example}, is displayed in the upper-left corner of the \MSC{}.
+
+The next four lines define the \emph{instances}:
+|\declinst{m1}{Machine 1}{control}| defines an instance with
+\meta{nickname} |m1| and a description consisting of two parts,
+namely, |Machine 1| and |control|. The nickname is used in
+all subsequent references to this instance. The first part of the
+description is drawn above the rectangular instance head symbol, and
+the second part of the description is drawn inside the instance head
+symbol.
+
+The following lines contain the definitions of the messages. Every
+message has a source and a destination instance. The clause
+|\mess[label position=below]{startm1}{usr}{m1}| defines a message with name
+|startm1|, which goes from instance |usr| to instance |m1|.
+Between square brackets we can put optional list of options. Each option is
+comma separated from another option. In this example we specify the placement of
+the label to be below the message arrow.
+
+In order to control the vertical placement of the messages, the \MSC{} is
+divided into levels. At every level, any number of messages may start.
+The vertical position of the end point of a message is determined
+by the optional fourth argument of the message definition, as in the
+clause |\mess{output}{m2}{user}[2]|.
+This argument is the vertical offset (in number of levels) between the
+start point of the message (i.e.,\ the current level) and its end point.
+If the value is 0 the message is drawn horizontally. A negative offset
+means that the arrow has an upward slope. Equivalently we could specify this
+value using option: |\mess[level shift=2]{output}{m2}{user}|.
+
+The clause |\nextlevel| is used to advance to the next level.
+
+\section{Use of the \mscpack}
+\label{use}
+\subsection{Options}
+Each command supported by the \mscpack\ can be provided with a list of
+options. A list of
+options is surrounded by square brackets and options are separated
+by a comma. In fact options are \pgfname\ keys and the parsing of options
+is done internally by the \tikzname\ package. All keys defined by the
+\mscpack\ are
+prefixed by the |/msc| keyword. When a key is not fully specified (i.e.,\ it is
+specified without the |/msc|, |/tikz| or some other prefix) the
+package will search first for the keys in the |/msc| namespace and if no
+key is found it will search the default |/tikz| name space.
+
+In the description below, optional arguments are marked in \opt{green}.
+\subsection{The \MSC{} frame}
+\label{mscframe}
+The |msc| environment is used for making \MSC{} definitions. Thus, such a
+definition looks as follows.
+\begin{environment}{{msc}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{msc name}}
+This declares the |msc| environment. The frame and the header of the
+\MSC{} are drawn.
+The argument \meta{msc name} is the name of the \MSC{}.
+The header of an \MSC{} is formed from the keyword |msc|, followed
+by the \meta{msc name}.
+
+The size of the \MSC{} frame is determined vertically by the number of levels
+occurring in the \MSC{} (see Section~\ref{levels}) and horizontally by
+the number of instances (see Section~\ref{instances}).
+\msckey{title position}{\meta{position}}{
+ Controls the position of the header of the MSC. Possible values of
+ \meta{position} are:
+ |left|, |right|, and |center|.}
+\msckey{msc keyword}{\meta{keyword}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{keyword} in the header.}
+\msckey{title distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between left/right side of the frame and the MSC
+ header.}
+\msckey{title top distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between top of the frame and the (top
+ of the) MSC header.}
+\msckey{left environment distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between the left-most instance and the
+ left side of the frame.
+}
+\msckey{right environment distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between the right-most instance and
+ the right side of the frame.
+}
+ \begin{key}{/msc/environment distance}
+ Sets the keys |right environment distance| and |left environment distance| to
+ the provided value.
+ \end{key}
+\msckey{instance distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Sets the \meta{distance} between the (vertical) instance lines.
+}
+
+\begin{key}{/msc/draw frame=\meta{colour} (default , initially \mscget{draw frame})}
+ Sets the colour of the frame. If you do not want to draw a frame, set
+ \meta{colour} to |none|. When \meta{colour} is empty, then the last colour is used,
+ usually black.
+\end{key}
+
+\begin{key}{/msc/draw grid=\meta{grid type} (default grid, initially \mscget{draw grid})}
+ Specifies if we want to draw the help grid in msc. Possible values for
+ \meta{grid type} are |grid|,
+ |color grid| and |none|.
+\end{key}
+
+\end{environment}
+
+\subsection{Levels}
+\label{levels}
+An \MSC{} is vertically divided in {\em levels}. All events in an \MSC{} are
+attached to a certain level, or stretch out over several levels.
+Any number of events can be drawn at a certain level.
+An event will always be drawn (or started) at the current level, unless a level
+offset is specified (see e.g.\ the |\mess| command in
+Section~\ref{messages}). The \meta{level offset} is a positive integer number, which
+denotes at which level, relative to the current level, an event should
+be drawn.
+Drawing starts at level 0.
+The following command is used to advance to the next level.
+\begin{command}{\nextlevel\opt{\oarg{level offset}}}
+The \meta{lever offset} is a positive integer value which denotes the number of
+levels to advance. By default, the value of \meta{lever offset} is 1, which means
+drawing continues at the next level.
+\end{command}
+The following keys influence the |\nextlevel| command:
+\msckey{first level height}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between the instance start symbol and the first level.}
+\msckey{level height}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between two consecutive levels.}
+\msckey{last level height}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between the last level and the instance end symbol.}
+
+Figure~\ref{parametersfig} on page~\pageref{parametersfig} shows all lengths of
+the \mscpack.
+\subsection{Instances}
+\label{instances}
+All instances have to be declared before they can be used. An instance
+consists of an instance head symbol with an associated name, an
+instance axis and an instance end symbol. Normal instances have a
+single line axis. Fat instances have a double line axis. The order of
+the instance declarations determines the order in which the instances
+occur in the drawing.
+
+An instance is declared with the following command.
+
+\begin{command}{\declinst\opt{*}\marg{nickname}\marg{instance name above}\marg{instance name within}}
+The starred version produces a fat instance.
+The \meta{nickname} is used for referring to this instance in the rest of the
+MSC definition.
+The \meta{instance name above} is put above the instance head symbol.
+The \meta{instance name within} is put inside the instance head symbol.
+\MSC{} definition.
+\end{command}
+The keys associated with the command:
+\msckey{head height}{\meta{height}} {
+ Specifes the minimum \meta{height} of the instance head symbol.}
+\msckey{instance width}{\meta{width}}{
+ Specifes the minimum \meta{width} of the instance head symbol.}
+\msckey{head top distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifes the \meta{distance} between top of the head symbols and frame.}
+\msckey{foot height}{\meta{height}}{
+ Specifes the \meta{height} of the instance foot symbol.}
+\msckey{foot distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifes the \meta{distance} between the instance foot symbol and the bottom of the \MSC{} frame.}
+\msckey{environment distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between the edge of the \MSC{} and the first/last instance axis.}
+\msckey{instance width}{\meta{width}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{width} of the instance head and foot symbols.}
+\msckey{label distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between the instance head symbol and the part of the
+ instance name drawn above the head symbol.}
+\msckey{draw head}{\meta{colour}}{
+ Sets the colour of the instance head. If you do not want to draw an instance head, set
+ \meta{colour} to |none|. When \meta{colour} is empty, then the last colour is used,
+ usually black.
+}
+
+% The command \verb+\setfootcolor{color}+ sets the
+% fill color of the footer symbol. Valid color values are, e.g.,
+% \texttt{black} (default), \texttt{white}, and \texttt{gray}.
+The following \MSC{} shows the declaration of an \MSC{} with three
+instances. The first and the last are normal instances (one line axis),
+whereas the second is a fat instance (double line axis). The optional
+parameter |values small|, indicates that the small drawing
+style should be used (see Section~\ref{parameters}).
+% \setmscvalues{small}
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-8.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{instances}
+\declinst{i}{above}{within}
+\declinst*{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{k}{}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Messages}
+\label{messages}
+A message is denoted by an arrow from the sending instance to the
+receiving instance. The instances are referred to by their nicknames.
+A message is defined with the following command.
+\begin{command}{\mess\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{sender}\marg{receiver}\opt{\oarg{leveloffset}}}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \mess(*)[pos]{name}[labelpos]{sender}[placement]{receiver}[leveloffset]
+% \end{verbatim}
+The \meta{name} of the message may be any string. The \mscpack{}
+processes the \meta{name} argument in LR-mode,
+see~\cite[page~36]{Lam94}. This means that the string will consist of
+one line. To generate multi-line message names, use the standard
+\cmd{parbox} command, see the \emph{Tricks} section in the reference
+manual~\cite{BM02}. By default, the name of a message label is drawn
+above the center of the arrow, but the optional keys |label position|,
+|side|, and |pos| influence the actual location,
+as described below. The arrow starts at the current level at the
+sending instance. The arrow ends at the current level plus the
+level \meta{leveloffset}, at the receiving instance. \meta{leveloffset} can be
+also modified by specifying keys |level shift| and |offset|. The
+\meta{sender} and \meta{receiver} should be the nicknames of declared
+instances.
+Messages to or from the environment (i.e.,\ the left or the right side
+of the \MSC{} frame) can be
+specified by setting the sender or the receiver argument to one of the values
+|envleft| or |envright|. (Note: Since instances and
+environments are treated equally in the implementation, at every position
+where the nickname of an instance is required, also
+|envleft| and |envright| are allowed.)
+
+In case the sending and the receiving instance are the same, the
+message is a \emph{self message}. A self message is drawn as a
+polyline connecting the instance axis to itself.
+
+The starred version of the command, |\mess*|, produces the same
+result as |\mess|, except that the arrow is drawn with a dashed
+line. This can be used to draw a {\em method reply} (see~\cite{z120}).
+\end{command}
+The following keys influence the messages:
+\msckey{level shift}{\meta{integer}}{
+ For non-self message, \meta{integer} determines at which level message should arrive relative to the starting level
+ of the message.
+}
+\msckey{offset}{\meta{integer}}{
+ For self message, \meta{integer} determines how many levels the message arrow should advance.
+}
+\msckey{side}{\meta{side}}{
+ Determine the position of the arrow with respect to the instance axis. Valid values
+ for \meta{side} are |left| and |right|. In case of a non-self message the key is ignored.
+}
+\msckey{label position}{\meta{position}}{
+ Determines the position of the label.In case of non-self message, valid values
+ for \meta{position} are |above|, |below|, |above~left|, |above~right|,
+ |below~left| and |below~right|. In case of self message valid values are |left|
+ and |right| and the default value is taken from the value of the key |side|. As
+ the implementation uses corresponding |/tikz| keys the |label~position=| part
+ can be skipped.
+}
+\msckey{pos}{\meta{real}}{
+ Determines the relative distance of the message label to the beginning of the
+ message. Valid values for \meta{real} are real numbers in the closed interval $[0,1]$.
+ The key works in similar way as |/tikz/pos| key.
+}
+\msckey{self message width}{\meta{width}}{
+ Controls the \meta{width} of the polyline used for drawing self-message.
+% It also affects other commands such as |\order|, |\settimeout| or |\setstoptimer|.
+}
+\msckey{label distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between the label of a message and the message arrow.
+}
+\msckey{arrow scale}{\meta{scale}}{
+ The \meta{scale} specifies by which factor should the message arrow be scaled. Influences all
+ arrows drawn in |msc| environment.
+}
+
+In Figure~\ref{fig:mscsomeExample} we see \MSC{} that shows an example of the use of messages.
+In this sample \MSC{} and the following \MSC{}s in this section we will
+not list the complete textual representations of the \MSC{}s. For brevity
+we omit the environment call and the declarations of the instances.
+Note the final |\nextlevel| command which is needed
+to make the instance axis long enough to receive message
+\verb+a+.
+
+Figure~\ref{fig:refpoints:B} shows different options that can be used to
+position label. We use the keys |pos|, |label position| and |side| to place
+the labels. Additionally we use |/tikz/anchor| key, which is an alternative way
+to specify the placement of the label (see PGF Manual~\cite{tantau2022pgf}).
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values,head top distance=0.8cm]{messages}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\mess{a}{j}{i}[3]
+\mess{self}{i}{i}[1]
+\nextlevel
+\mess*{b}{j}{k}
+\mess[b]{c}{k}{envright}
+\nextlevel
+\mess{d}{k}[.6]{i}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+\caption{Example showing msc messages}
+\label{fig:mscsomeExample}
+\end{figure}
+%
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{Label reference points}
+\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
+\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
+\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess[label position=above]{above}{m0}{m1}
+\nextlevel
+\mess[label position=below]{below}{m1}{m2}
+\nextlevel[2]
+
+\mess[anchor=south,pos=0.1]{south}{m1}{m0}
+\nextlevel
+\mess[anchor=north]{north}{m2}{m1}
+\nextlevel[2]
+
+\mess[label position=left]{left}{m0}{m0}[2]
+\mess[side=right,pos=0.9]{right}{m2}{m2}[2]
+\nextlevel[4]
+\mess[label position=right]{right}{m0}{m0}[2]
+\mess[left,side=right]{left}{m2}{m2}[2]
+\nextlevel[6]
+
+\mess[anchor=east]{east}{m0}{m0}[-2]
+\mess[anchor=west,side=right]{west}{m2}{m2}[-2]
+\nextlevel[4]
+\mess[right]{right}{m0}{m0}[-2]
+\mess[side=right,left]{left}{m2}{m2}[-2]
+\nextlevel[2]
+
+\mess[below left]{below left}{m0}{m1}[2]
+\mess[above right]{above right}{m1}{m2}[2]
+\nextlevel[6]
+
+\mess[anchor=south west]{SW}{m1}{m0}[-2]
+\mess[anchor=north east,pos=0]{NE}{m2}{m1}[-2]
+\nextlevel[2]
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+\caption{Different placing the message labels}
+\label{fig:refpoints:B}
+\end{figure}
+
+\subsection{Comments}
+\label{comments}
+
+Comments are additional texts to clarify (events on) an instance. The
+following command can be used to add comments to an \MSC{} diagram.
+\begin{command}{\msccomment\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{text}\marg{instance}}
+
+The \meta{instance} parameter defines the instance to which the
+comment is attached. The text of the comment is specified by the
+\meta{text} parameter and is processed in LR-mode.
+The key |side| affect the horizontal position relative to its instance.
+\end{command}
+The following key affects the drawing of the comment:
+\msckey{msccomment distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} at which the comment will be placed from the
+ \meta{instance} instance.
+}
+
+The following diagram shows how to use comments. In this diagram we modify the
+distance between the frame and the instances in order to fit the comments inside
+the frame.
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-8.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values,
+ left environment distance=2.6cm,
+ right environment distance=1.9cm]{comments}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\mess{a}{i}{j}[2]
+\msccomment[msccomment distance=1.2cm]{start}{i}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\msccomment[side=right]{end}{j}
+\nextlevel
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+
+
+\subsection{Actions}
+\label{actions}
+An instance can perform an action, which is denoted by a
+rectangle. There are two commands to draw actions:
+\begin{command}{\action\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}}
+The action is attached at the current level to the \meta{instance}.
+The \meta{name} is centered inside the action symbol and is processed
+in LR-mode. The height and width of the action symbol are adjusted so that
+the \meta{name} fits inside a rectangle.
+
+The starred version of the command, |\action*|, produces the same
+result as |\action|, except that the width of the action is not adjusted.
+
+The following keys determine the detailed drawing of the action
+symbol:
+\msckey{action width}{\meta{width}}{Specifies the \meta{width} of the action symbol.}
+\msckey{action height}{\meta{hegiht}}{Specifies the \meta{height} of the action symbol.}
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\naction\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}}
+The |\naction| command produces an action box with a diagonal
+cross in it. It is otherwise identical to the |\action| command.
+\end{command}
+
+
+The following example shows that after an action often a multiple level
+increment is needed to obtain nice pictures.
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-8.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values, instance distance=1.6cm]{action}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\mess{a}{j}{i}
+\nextlevel
+\naction{doit}{i}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\action*{doitnow}{i}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\mess{b}{i}{j}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Timers}
+\label{timers}
+There are five commands to draw timer events.
+\begin{command}{\settimer\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}}%
+Setting of a timer is drawn as a line connecting the \meta{instance}
+to the {\em hour glass} symbol. The \meta{name} is put near this
+symbol. The key |side| is determines on which side of the instance axis the
+timer is drawn. The key |self message width| determines the lenght of the arm
+between the symbol and the instance axis. The key |label distance| determines
+the distance between the name and the timer symbol. The key |arrow scale|
+determines the scaling of the arrow.
+{\em hour glass} symbol to the \meta{instance}.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\timeout\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}}
+A time-out is represented by an arrow from an
+{\em hour glass} symbol to the \meta{instance}.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\stoptimer\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}}
+Stopping a timer is drawn as a line connecting the \meta{instance} with the timer stop
+symbol (denoted by a cross).
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\settimeout\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}\opt{\oarg{offset}}}
+The command |\settimeout| is a combination of the setting of a
+timer and a time out. The \meta{offset} denotes the number of levels
+between the two events.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\setstoptimer\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}\opt{\oarg{offset}}}
+Likewise, |\setstoptimer| is a combination
+of the setting of a timer and stopping a timer.
+\end{command}
+\msckey{offset}{\meta{offset}}{
+ The key holds the value of \meta{offset}. It denotes the number of levels
+ between the two events.
+}%
+\msckey{timer width}{\meta{width}}{
+ The key determines the \meta{width} of the hour glass and the time out symbols.
+}
+
+The various timer symbols are shown in the following example.
+
+\medskip
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{timers}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\settimer{T,50}{j}
+\setstoptimer[r]{V}{k}[6]
+\nextlevel[2]
+\timeout{T}{j}
+\settimeout{U}{i}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\settimer[r]{T,20}{j}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\stoptimer[r]{T}{j}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Time measurements}
+\label{measurements}
+There are several commands to add time measurements to an \MSC{}.
+\begin{command}{
+\mscmark\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}
+}
+This command attach an absolute time stamp to an event on an \meta{instance}.
+The \meta{name} is the text attached to the mark symbol, which is a dashed
+polyline. The position of the mark is determined by the keys |position| (above,
+below) and |side| (left,right).
+\end{command}
+\msckey{position}{\meta{position}}{
+ The key determines the position of the mark symbol relative to the marked
+ event. The allowed values for \meta{position} are |above|, |mid| and |below|.
+}
+\begin{command}{\measure\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance1}\marg{instance2}\opt{\oarg{offset}}}
+ This command connects two events from \meta{instance1} and \meta{instance2}.
+ The first event is at the current level. The second event is \meta{offset}
+ levels lower than the first event. Not that instead giving optional argument
+ \meta{offset} we can specify the key |offset|. The \meta{name} is attached to
+ the measure symbol. The measure symbol can be placed ath the left or right of
+ \meta{instance1}. This is determined by the value of the key |side|. In the
+ starred version of the command arrow heads are at the outside of the measured
+ interval.
+\end{command}
+In case the two events are far apart, the measure may be split in two
+parts. We use two commands to draw this parts:
+\begin{command}{\measurestart\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}\marg{gate}}
+ Draws the first part of the measure. The points where these two parts should
+ be connected are drawn by a small cicle, to which the text \meta{gate} in
+ attached.
+ In the starred version of the command arrow heads are at the outside of the
+ measured interval.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\measureend\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}\marg{gate}}
+ Draws the first part of the measure in similar way as |\measurestart| command.
+\end{command}
+
+
+Several keys can be used to control the detailed layout of the time measurement
+symbols. The |label distance| key specify the distance between the label of a
+measurement and the measurement symbol.
+\msckey{measure distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+This key specifies at which \meta{distance} the measurement symbols are drawn from the
+\meta{instance} line.
+}
+\msckey{measure symbol width}{\meta{width}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{width} of the measurement triangle symbol.
+}
+
+The following example illustrates marks and measurements in an \MSC{}..
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{Time measurements}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\mess{m1}{i}{j}[1]
+\mscmark{t=0.0}{i}
+\measure{0.6}{i}{j}[4]
+\nextlevel
+\mscmark[position=above,side=right]{t=0.3}{j}
+\nextlevel[3]
+\mess{m2}{j}{k}
+\measurestart*[side=right]{0.2}{k}{g}
+\nextlevel[6]
+\mess{m3}{k}{i}
+\mscmark[position=below,side=left]{t=1.0}{i}
+\measureend*[side=right]{0.2}{k}{g}
+\nextlevel
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Lost and found messages}
+\label{lostfound}
+\begin{command}{\lost\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{gate}\marg{instance}}
+A lost message is denoted by an arrow starting at an instance and
+ending at a filled circle.
+The argument \meta{instance} determines the instance to which the
+arrow is attached. The \meta{name} of the message is put above the
+message arrow. The \meta{gate} is a text associated to the circle.
+The keys |side|, |label position|, |pos|, |label distance| and
+|self message width|
+function in similar way as in the |\mess| command
+(Section~\ref{messages}). That is, |side| controls the placement of the lost or
+found message with respect to the instance axis. The |label position| and |pos|
+controls the placement of the \meta{name} with respect to the message arrow.
+The key |self message width| determines the length of the arrow and |label
+distance| specifies the distance between the name and the arrow.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\found\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{gate}\marg{instance}}
+A found message is denoted by an arrow starting at an open circle and ending at
+an instance. Otherwise the command is identical to the |\lost| command.
+\end{command}
+\msckey{lost symbol radius}{\meta{radius}}{
+ Determines the \meta{radius} of the circle for lost and found messages.
+}
+
+The following example shows a found and a lost message.
+
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{lost and found}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\found{m}{g}{i}
+\nextlevel
+\mess{p}{i}{j}
+\nextlevel
+\lost[side=right]{n}{}{j}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+
+\subsection{Conditions}
+\label{conditions}
+There are two commands to draw condition boxes:
+\begin{command}{\condition\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{text}\marg{instance list}}
+ A condition is denoted by a hexagon. It is used to express that the
+ system has entered a certain state. A condition relates to a number of
+ instances. All conditions which take part in the condition are covered
+ by the condition symbol. The other instances are drawn through the
+ condition symbol.
+
+ The \meta{text} is placed in the center of the condition. The
+ \meta{instance list} expresses which instances take part in the
+ condition. It is a list of nicknames of instances, separated by
+ commas. Take care not to add extra white space around the nicknames,
+ since this is considered part of the nickname in \LaTeX.
+ The order in which the instances are listed is immaterial.
+
+ The starred version of the command |\condition*|, produces the same
+ result as the command |\condition|, except that the width of the
+ condition symbol is not adjusted to fit the contents of the hexagon.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\ncondition\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{text}\marg{instance list}}
+The |\ncondition| command produces a condition with a diagonal
+cross in it. It is otherwise identical to the |\condition| command.
+\end{command}
+
+There are several keys that controls the shape of the condition
+symbol:
+\msckey{condition height}{\meta{hegiht}}{
+ Determines the \meta{height} of the condition symbol.
+}
+\msckey{condition overlap}{\meta{distance}}{
+ The \meta{distance} determines the width of the part of the condition
+ symbol which extends over the rightmost/leftmost contained instance
+ axis.
+}
+
+The following example contains some conditions.
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-10.6cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{conditions}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\condition{some condition}{i,k}
+\nextlevel[3]
+\mess{m}{i}{j}
+\action{a}{k}
+\nextlevel
+\condition{C}{i}
+\ncondition{D}{j}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\condition{A, B, C}{i,j,k}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Generalized ordering}
+\label{ordering}
+A generalized order is treated much like a regular message (see
+Section~\ref{messages}). There
+are three differences: a generalized order is drawn with a
+dotted line, it has no label, and the arrow head is in the middle of
+the line. A generalized order is defined with the following command.
+\begin{command}{\order\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{sender}\marg{receiver}\opt{\oarg{level offset}}}
+The \meta{sender} and \meta{receiver} are the nicknames of the
+instances which are connected by the generalized ordering symbol.
+At the \meta{receiver} instance, the generalized ordering symbol ends
+at the current level plus the \meta{level offset}. The
+\meta{level offset} is an optional integer value, with default 0.
+
+In case \meta{sender} and \meta{receiver} denote the same instance,
+the order is a \emph{self order}. The placement of the order arrow of
+a self order is controlled by the key |side|. It
+can have values |left| (meaning that the ordering symbol is drawn
+left of the instance axis) and |right| (meaning that the ordering
+symbol is drawn right of the instance axis). By default it is drawn at
+the left side of the instance.
+
+The position of the arrow is controlled with the |pos| key. The key |self
+message width| specify the width of the polyline used for drawing orderings on a
+single instance axis. The key |arrow scale| controls the size of the arrow.
+
+Orderings to or from the environment (i.e.,\ the left or the right side
+of the \MSC{} frame) can be
+specified by setting the sender or the receiver argument to the value
+|envleft| or |envright|.
+\end{command}
+
+An example of a generalized order is given in the following diagram.
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.6cm]
+\begin{msc}[head top distance=0.8cm]
+ {generalized order}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\mess{m}{envleft}{i}
+\order{i}{j}[1]
+\nextlevel
+\mess{k}{j}{envright}
+\nextlevel
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Instance regions}
+\label{regions}
+A part of the instance axis can be drawn in a different style. Such a
+part is called an {\em instance region}. The following
+regions are supported:
+{\em coregion} (the instance axis is dashed, which means that the order of the
+attached instances is immaterial),
+{\em suspension region} (a small rectangle with dashed left and right
+sides, which denotes that the instance is suspended),
+{\em activation region} (a small filled rectangle, which denotes that
+the instance has control).
+
+The following commands are used to draw an instance region.
+\begin{command}{\regionstart\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{type}\marg{instance name}}
+ After this command the instance axis of \meta{intstance name} is drawn in the
+ shape determined by \meta{type} starting from the current level.
+ The \meta{type} can have values |coregion|, |suspension|, and |activation|.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\regionend\marg{instance name}}
+ After this command the instance axis for the \meta{instance name} is drawn in
+ the usual way. In other words it ends current region.
+\end{command}
+The following keys control the shape of on instance region:
+\msckey{region width}{
+ Determines the \meta{width} of the coregion start and end symbol and the \meta{width} of the activation and suspension rectangle.
+}
+
+In the following example, several instance regions are demonstrated.
+Note that the relative order of |\mess|, |\regionstart|, and
+|\regionend| commands does not matter. Also notice that the
+second activation region on~$i$ ends with a method reply
+(which is produced by the command |\mess*|).
+
+\medskip
+
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.6cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{regions}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\regionstart{activation}{i} \nextlevel[3]
+\regionend{i}
+\mess{m}{i}{j} \nextlevel
+\regionstart{coregion}{j} \nextlevel
+\regionstart{suspension}{k}
+\mess{p}{j}{k} \nextlevel
+\regionstart{activation}{i}
+\mess{q}{j}{i} \nextlevel
+\regionend{j} \nextlevel[3]
+\regionend{i}
+\mess*{r}{i}{j} \nextlevel
+\mess{s}{j}{k}
+\regionend{k} \nextlevel
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Instance creation and instance stop}
+\label{createstop}
+The \MSC{} language offers constructs for dynamic instance creation and
+instance destruction.
+An instance can dynamically create another instance by issuing a
+create command. An instance creation is drawn as a dashed message
+arrow. At the side of the arrow head, the instance head symbol for the
+created instance is drawn.
+An instance end symbol does not denote the end of the specified
+process, but merely the end of its current description. Therefore, a
+different symbol is needed which denotes that an instance stops before
+the end of the \MSC{} in which it is contained.
+The instance stop symbol is a cross.
+
+The following commands are used for instance creation and instance
+stop.
+\begin{command}{\dummyinst\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{created instance}}
+ This command reserve space for on instance which will be created dynamically.
+ |\dummyinst| command is mixed with the declarations of normal instances (see
+ the |\declinst| command, Section~\ref{instances}). The argument \meta{created
+ instance} is the nickname of the instance that will be created later.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\startinst\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{instance name}%
+ \marg{text above}\marg{text inside}}
+ This command create an instance. The created instance must have been declared
+ first with the |\dummyinst| command. The name of the created instance consists
+ of two parts. The part called \meta{text above} is placed above the instance
+ head and the \meta{text inside} is centered within the instance head.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\create\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{creator}\marg{instance name}%
+ \marg{text above}\marg{text inside}}
+ This command is identical to |\startinst| command except it allows to specify
+ the creator of the instance. The command results in a horizontal message arrow
+ labelled with \meta{name}. The arrow starts at the current level at the
+ instance with the nickname \meta{creator} and ends at the current level at the
+ instance head of the instance with nickname \meta{instance name}.
+ As with normal messages, placement of the message label is controlled by the
+ keys |label position| and |pos|.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\stop\opt*\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{instance name}}
+ An instance is stopped with the |\stop| command.
+ The \meta{instance} is the nickname of the stopped instance. The
+ instance axis is not drawn any further below the level at which the
+ |\stop| command is issued. Also, the instance foot symbol is not
+ drawn.
+
+ If the |\stop*| command is used, then the instance foot symbol is
+ drawn instead of the stop symbol.
+\end{command}
+\msckey{stop width}{\meta{width}}{
+ The \meta{width} determines the size of the stop symbol.
+}
+
+
+Take care not to specify any events on an instance which has not yet
+been created or which has already been stopped. However, it is possible
+to create an instance after it has stopped, as showed in the next example.
+
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.6cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{dynamic instances}
+\declinst{i}{}{j}
+\dummyinst{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+
+\mess{p}{i}{k}
+\nextlevel[3]
+\create[label position=below]{kick}{k}{j}{}{j}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\stop*{k}
+\nextlevel
+\mess{ok}{j}{i}
+\nextlevel
+\stop{j}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\startinst{k}{}{again}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{\MSC{} references}
+\label{references}
+Within an \MSC{} a reference to other \MSC{}s can be included. Such a
+reference is drawn as a rectangle with rounded corners, covering part
+of the \MSC{}. The following commands are used to draw \MSC{} references.
+
+\begin{command}{\referencestart\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}
+ \marg{text}\marg{left instance}\marg{right instance}}
+ The reference symbol starts at the level where the
+ |\referencestart| command is used, and ends at the level where
+ the corresponding |\referenceend| command occurs. These commands
+ correspond if they have the same \meta{nickname}.
+ The \meta{text} is
+ placed in the center of the reference symbol. The reference covers all
+ instances from \meta{leftinstance} to \meta{rightinstance}.
+
+ The left and right edge of the reference symbol are
+ \meta{nickname}|left| and \meta{nickname}|right|, where \meta{nickname} is
+ the nickname of the \MSC{} reference as defined in the
+ |\referencestart| command.
+ These names can be used at every place where the nickname of an
+ instance is required, e.g.\ as the sender or receiver of a message.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\referenceend\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}}
+ This command end the reference \meta{nickname} that has been started with the
+ |\referencestart| command.
+\end{command}
+The following keys affect the drawing of reference symbol:
+\msckey{left reference overlap}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Determines the \meta{distance} between the left edge of the reference symbol and the
+ leftmost covered instance axis.
+}
+\msckey{right reference overlap}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Determines the \meta{distance} between the right edge of the reference symbol and the
+ rightmost covered instance axis.
+}
+
+The following example shows the usage of references:
+
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.6cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{references}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\mess{a}{j}{k}
+\nextlevel
+\referencestart{r}{a reference}{i}{j}
+\nextlevel
+\mess{b}{rright}{k}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\referenceend{r}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\referencestart{p}{another reference}{i}{k}
+\nextlevel
+\mess{c}{envright}{pright}
+\nextlevel[4]
+\referenceend{p}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Inline expressions}
+\label{inlines}
+An inline expression is a part of an \MSC{} on which an operation is
+defined. A rectangle surrounds the part of the \MSC{} containing the
+operands. The operands are separated by horizontal dashed lines.
+The operator is placed in the upper left corner of the inline
+expression symbol.
+The following commands are used to draw inline expressions.
+
+\begin{command}{\inlinestart\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}\marg{operator}\marg{left instance}\marg{right instance}}
+ Starts the inline expression at the current level. The inline expression
+ spans over the instances from \meta{left instance} to \meta{right instance}.
+ The \meta{operand} is placed in the upper left corner of the rectangle.
+%
+ The left and right edge of the inline expression symbol are named
+ \meta{nickname}|left| and \meta{nickname}|right|, where \meta{nickname} is
+ the nickname of the inline expression as defined in the
+ |\inlinestart| command.
+ These names can be used at every place where the nickname of an
+ instance is required, e.g.\ as the sender or receiver of a message.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\inlineseparator\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}}
+ Draws a dashed line at the current level for the inline expression with
+ nickname \meta{nickname}.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\inlineend\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}}
+ Ends the inline expresion with the nickname \meta{nickname} at the current level.
+ The command |\inlineend*| does the same as the command
+ |\inlineend|, except that the bottom line of the rectangle is
+ This is used to indicate that the operand is optional.
+ dashed.
+\end{command}
+
+\msckey{left inline overlap}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Determines the \meta{distance} which is a distance between the left edge of the inline expression
+ symbol and the leftmost included instance axis.
+}
+\msckey{right inline overlap}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Determines the \meta{distance} which is a distance between the right edge of the inline expression
+ symbol and the rightmost included instance axis.
+}
+
+The following example shows how to draw inline expressions:
+
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.6cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{inline expressions}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\inlinestart{exp1}{par}{i}{k} \nextlevel
+\mess{a}{k}{j} \nextlevel
+\inlinestart[left inline overlap=0.6cm]
+ {exp2}{alt}{i}{j} \nextlevel[2]
+\mess{b}{j}{i} \nextlevel
+\inlineseparator{exp2} \nextlevel
+\mess{c}{j}{i} \nextlevel
+\inlineend{exp2} \nextlevel
+\inlineseparator{exp1} \nextlevel
+\mess{d}{j}{k} \nextlevel
+\inlineend{exp1} \nextlevel
+\inlinestart{exp3}{opt}{i}{j} \nextlevel
+\mess{e}{envright}{exp3right}
+\mess{e}{exp3right}{j} \nextlevel
+\mess{f}{j}{i} \nextlevel
+\inlineend*{exp3}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+%
+\subsection{Gates}
+\label{gates}
+
+A gate determines a connection point for messages.
+
+The following command can be used to draw gates.
+
+\begin{command}{\gate\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{gate name}\marg{instance name}}
+ The unstarred version produces a normal (invisible) gate. The starred
+ version produces a visible gate (a small dot). The gate is drawn at the
+ current level at the instance \meta{instance name} (which can also be the
+ left and right edge of e.g.\ an \MSC{} reference). The
+ \meta{gate name} is attached to the gate. The positioning of the \meta{gate
+ name} relative to the gate is determined by the keys |side| (|left| or
+ |right|) and |position| (|above|, |mid| or |below|).
+\end{command}
+
+There are several keys to control the size and shape of the gate symbol:
+\msckey{gate symbol radius}{\meta{radius}}{
+ The \meta{radius} defines the radius of the gate symbol.
+}
+
+The next example shows a number of gates.
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.6cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{gates}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\referencestart{r}{ref}{i}{j}
+\nextlevel
+\gate{$g$}{rright}
+\mess{b}{rright}{envright}
+\gate[r][c]{$h$}{envright}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\mess{c}{rright}{k}
+\gate*[l][b]{$h'$}{rright}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\referenceend{r}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{High-level \MSC{}s}
+\label{hmsc}
+A High-level \MSC{} (\HMSC{}) is a drawing which defines the relation between
+a number of \MSC{}s. It is composed of a start symbol (an upside down
+triangle), a number of end symbols (represented by triangles), a
+number of \MSC{} references (these are rectangles with rounded corners),
+a number of conditions (hexagons) and possibly several connection
+points (circles). These symbols are connected by arrows.
+
+The following commands can be used to draw \HMSC{}s.
+\begin{environment}{{hmsc}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{hmsc name}\opt{(\meta{llx},\meta{lly})(\meta{urx},\meta{ury})}}
+ In order to draw \HMSC{}s, a new environment is defined, which is called
+ |hmsc|. The command to begin this environment has several
+ arguments.
+
+ The header of an \HMSC{} is
+ formed from the value of the key |hmsc keyword| (initially |hmsc|), followed by the
+ \meta{hmsc name}. The positioning of the header depends on the key
+ |title position|. The possible values are |left|, |right| and |center|. The
+ keys |title top distance| and |title distance| control the distances of the
+ header from the frame.
+ The size of the \HMSC{} frame is calculated automatically unless the optional
+ parameters (\meta{llx},\meta{lly}) and (\meta{urx},\meta{ury}) are specified. In
+ such case the frame is determined by the
+ coordinates of the lower-left corner,(\meta{llx},\meta{lly}) , and the
+ coordinates of the upper-right corner, (\meta{urx},\meta{ury}).
+\msckey{hmsc keyword}{\meta{keyword}}%
+{The \meta{keyword} will be a starting word in a header of \HMSC{}.}
+\msckey{north hmsc margin}{\meta{distance}}%
+{The \meta{distance} determines the north margin of hmsc environment}
+\msckey{south hmsc margin}{\meta{distance}}%
+{The \meta{distance} determines the south margin of hmsc environment}
+\msckey{east hmsc margin}{\meta{distance}}%
+{The \meta{distance} determines the east margin of hmsc environment}
+\msckey{west hmsc margin}{\meta{distance}}%
+{The \meta{distance} determines the west margin of hmsc environment}
+\msckey{west hmsc margin}{\meta{distance}}%
+{The \meta{distance} determines the west margin of hmsc environment}
+\begin{stylekey}{/msc/hmsc margin=\meta{distance}}
+ Sets the |north hmsc margin|, |south hmsc margin|, |west hmsc margin|,
+ |east hmsc margin| to \meta{distance}.
+\end{stylekey}
+\end{environment}
+In the \HMSC{} we can draw number of symbols. Each symbol is in fact a \tikz{}
+node and \meta{options} can be used to specify for example the placement
+relative to the other nodes. The following commands are used to draw the symbols:
+\begin{command}{\hmscstartsymbol\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nicknamee}\opt{(\meta{x},\meta{y})}}
+ Draws an equilateral triangle pointed down representing the start symbol. The
+ \meta{nickname} can be used later as a reference to the drawn symbol. Optional
+ \meta{x} and \meta{y} specify the coordinates at which the symbol should be
+ drawn.
+\end{command}
+\begin{stylekey}{/msc/start symbol}
+ A style that is applied to draw a triangle node in
+ the |\hmscstartsymbol| command.
+\end{stylekey}
+\msckey{hmsc symbol width}{\meta{width}}{
+ Sets the width of the triangle of the start and end symbol in hmsc to the \meta{width}.
+}
+\begin{command}{\hmscendsymbol\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}\opt{(\meta{x},\meta{y})}}
+ The command in identical to |\hmscstartsymbol| command but draws an
+ equilateral triangle pointed up representing the start symbol.
+\end{command}
+\begin{stylekey}{/msc/end symbol}
+ A style that is applied to draw a triangle node in
+ the |\hmscendsymbol| command.
+\end{stylekey}
+\begin{command}{\hmscreference\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}\marg{text}\opt{(\meta{x},\meta{y})}}
+ Draws a \meta{text} inside a frame with rounded corners. The \meta{nickname}
+ can be used later to connect it to other hmsc elements.
+\end{command}
+\begin{stylekey}{/msc/reference}
+ A style that is applied to draw a reference node in the |\hmscreference| command.
+\end{stylekey}
+\msckey{reference height}{\meta{height}}%
+{ Sets the minimal height of the reference to \meta{height}.}
+\msckey{reference width}{\meta{width}}%
+{ Sets the minimal width of the reference to \meta{width}.}
+\begin{command}{\hmsccondion\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}\marg{text}\opt{(\meta{x},\meta{y})}}
+ Draws a \meta{text} inside a rectangular frame with diamond shaped sides. The \meta{nickname}
+ can be used later to connect it to other hmsc elements.
+\end{command}
+\msckey{hmsc condition height}{\meta{height}}%
+{ Sets the minimal height of the condition to \meta{height}.}
+\msckey{hmsc condition width}{\meta{width}}%
+{ Sets the minimal width of the condition to \meta{width}.}
+\begin{command}{\hmscconnection\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}\opt{(\meta{x},\meta{y})}}
+ Draws a small circle symbolizing connection at coordinates
+ (\meta{x},\meta{y}). Later we can refer to the connection using \meta{nickname}.
+\end{command}
+\msckey{hmsc connection radius}{\meta{distance}}%
+{ Sets the radius of the connection symbol to the \meta{distance}}
+
+The \HMSC{} grid is not drawn, but used to control the positioning of the
+\HMSC{} symbols (|startsymbol|, |endsymbol|, |reference|,
+|condition|, and |connection|).
+The center of each symbol is drawn on the grid point
+with coordinates (\meta{x},\meta{y}). Each symbol also has a \meta{nickname}
+for later reference.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\hmscreference{nickname}{text}(x,y)
+\hmsccondition{nickname}{text}(x,y)
+\hmscconnection{nickname}(x,y)
+\arrow{from-nickname}[coord-list]{to-nickname}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\HMSC{} symbols can be connected by means of the \verb+arrow+ command.
+This draws an arrow from the symbol with nickname \verb+from-nickname+
+to the symbol with nickname \verb+to-nickname+. The optional argument
+\verb+coord-list+ can be used if the line connecting the source and
+the destination should not be straight. The \verb+coord-list+ has
+the following syntax: \verb+(x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xk,yk)+. This means
+that the connecting line goes through the points with coordinates
+(x1,y1), (x2,y2), \ldots, (xk,yk).
+
+Arrows always leave the start symbol at the bottom. They enter the end symbol
+at the top.
+Arrows start and end either at the middle of the top or at the middle
+of the bottom of a reference and condition symbol. The incoming
+(outgoing) direction of the arrow determines whether it will start
+(end) at the top or at the bottom.
+
+There are several parameters to control the size and shape of the
+symbols (see Section~\ref{parameters}). These are
+\verb+\hmscconditionheight+ (the height of the condition symbol),
+\verb+\hmscconditionwidth+ (the width of the condition symbol,
+excluding the left and right angular parts),
+\verb+\hmscreferenceheight+ (the height of the reference symbol),
+\verb+\hmscreference width+ (the width of the reference symbol),
+\verb+\messarrowscale{size}+ (a command to set the size of the arrow
+head of a connection line);
+\verb+setconnectiontype(type)+ (set the shape of the polyline
+connection the symbols; \verb+type+ can be \verb+straight+,
+\verb+rounded+, and \verb+curved+),
+\verb+\startsymbolwidth+ (the width of the start and end symbol),
+\verb+\topnamedist+ (sets the distance between the top of the \HMSC{} frame
+and the \HMSC{} header).
+
+An example of an \HMSC{} is in the following diagram. Notice that the
+width and height of reference symbols are changed locally (i.e.,
+between \verb+{+ and \verb+}+ braces) just before the big
+reference~\verb+b+ is defined.
+
+\medskip
+
+\noindent
+\begin{minipage}[c]{0.375\linewidth}
+
+\begin{hmsc}{High level}(-3,0)(3,12)
+\hmscstartsymbol{s}(0,10)
+\hmscreference{a}{A}(0,9)
+\hmscconnection{c}(0,7.5)
+{
+\mscset{reference width=2cm}
+\mscset{reference height=2\baselineskip}
+% \setlength{\hmscreferencewidth}{2cm}
+% \setlength{\hmscreferenceheight}{3\baselineskip}
+\hmscreference{b}{\parbox{1.9cm}
+ {\centering
+ this is a big
+ hmsc reference}
+ }(0,6)
+}
+\hmsccondition{t}{Again}(1,4.25)
+\hmsccondition{ok}{Ok}(0,3.5)
+\hmsccondition{q}{\textit{Break}}(-2,3.5)
+\hmscendsymbol{e1}(-2,2)
+\hmscreference{do}{Do it!}(0,2)
+\hmscendsymbol{e2}(0,1)
+
+\arrow{s}{a}
+\arrow{a}{c}
+\arrow{c}{b}
+\arrow{c}[(-2,7.5)]{q}
+\arrow{b}{q}
+\arrow{q}{e1}
+\arrow{b}{ok}
+\arrow{ok}{do}
+\arrow{do}{e2}
+\arrow{b}{t}
+\arrow{t}[(1,3.5)(2.5,3.5)(2.5,7.5)]{c}
+\end{hmsc}
+\end{minipage}\hfill
+\begin{minipage}[c]{0.6\linewidth}
+{\footnotesize
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{hmsc}{High level}(-3,0)(3,12)
+\hmscstartsymbol{s}(0,10)
+\hmscreference{a}{A}(0,9)
+\hmscconnection{c}(0,7.5)
+{\setlength{\hmscreferencewidth}{2cm}
+ \setlength{\hmscreferenceheight}
+ {3\baselineskip}
+ \hmscreference{b}{\parbox{1.9cm}
+ {\centering this is a big hmsc reference}
+ }(0,6)}
+\hmsccondition{t}{Again}(1,4.5)
+\hmsccondition{ok}{Ok}(0,3.5)
+\hmsccondition{q}{\textit{Break}}(-2,3.5)
+\hmscendsymbol{e1}(-2,2)
+\hmscreference{do}{Do it!}(0,2)
+\hmscendsymbol{e2}(0,1)
+\arrow{s}{a}
+\arrow{a}{c}
+\arrow{c}{b}
+\arrow{c}[(-2,7.5)]{q}
+\arrow{b}{q}
+\arrow{q}{e1}
+\arrow{b}{ok}
+\arrow{ok}{do}
+\arrow{do}{e2}
+\arrow{b}{t}
+\arrow{t}[(1,3.5)(2.5,3.5)(2.5,7.5)]{c}
+\end{hmsc}
+\end{verbatim}
+}
+\end{minipage}
+
+
+\subsection{\MSC{} documents}
+\label{mscdoc}
+An \MSCdoc{} is a drawing which contains various declarations
+of objects used in the \MSC{} description. For drawing \MSCdoc{}s
+he following commands are provided.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{mscdoc}[headerpos]{mscdocname}{text}(llx,lly)(urx,ury)
+\end{mscdoc}
+\reference{text}(x,y)
+\separator{y}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+As for \MSC{} and \HMSC{}, a new environment is defined, which is named
+\verb+mscdoc+. The command to begin an \MSCdoc{} has several
+arguments. The argument \verb+headerpos+ is optional. It controls
+positioning of the header of the \MSCdoc{}.
+This argument can have values
+\verb+l+ (for a left aligned header), \verb+c+ (for a centered header)
+and \verb+r+ (for a right aligned header).
+The header of an \MSCdoc{} is formed from the keyword \verb+mscdocument+,
+followed by the \verb+mscdocname+.
+The \verb+text+ is placed left-aligned below the \MSCdoc{} header.
+The size of the \MSCdoc{} frame is determined by
+coordinates of the lower-left corner, \verb+(llx,lly)+, and the
+coordinates of the upper-right corner, \verb+(urx,ury)+.
+
+The \MSCdoc{} grid is not drawn, but used to control the positioning of the
+\MSC{} references.
+The center of such a reference is drawn on the grid point
+with coordinates \verb+{x,y}+.
+
+The \verb+separator+ command draws a dashed horizontal line. The \MSC{}
+references above the separator are the exported, while the ones below
+the separator are local.
+
+There are several parameters to control the size and shape of the
+symbols (see Section~\ref{parameters}).
+\verb+\mscdocreferenceheight+ (the height of the reference symbol),
+\verb+\mscdocreferencewidth+ (the width of the reference symbol),
+\verb+\topnamedist+ (sets the distance between the top of the \MSCdoc{}
+frame and the \MSCdoc{} header).
+
+An example of an \MSCdoc{} is in the following diagram. Notice that
+the size of references in an \MSCdoc{} had to be changed for the last
+reference.
+
+\medskip
+
+
+\begin{minipage}{0.4\linewidth}
+\begin{mscdoc}{My declarations}%
+ (0,0)(6,8)
+\reference{a}(1,6)
+\reference{b}(3,6)
+\reference{c}(1,4)
+\reference{d}(3,4)
+\separator{3}
+\mscset{reference width=4.5cm}
+\mscset{reference height=2\baselineskip}
+\reference{%
+ \parbox{4cm}%
+ {\raggedright This is a
+ two-line reference}}
+ (3,1.5)
+\end{mscdoc}
+\end{minipage}
+%
+\begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
+{\small
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{mscdoc}{My declarations}%
+ (0,0)(6,8)
+\reference{a}(1,6)
+\reference{b}(3,6)
+\reference{c}(1,4)
+\reference{d}(3,4)
+\separator{3}
+\mscset{reference width=4.5cm}
+\mscset{reference height=2\baselineskip}
+\reference{%
+ \parbox{4cm}%
+ {\raggedright This is a
+ two-line reference}}
+ (3,1.5)
+\end{mscdoc}
+\end{verbatim}
+}
+\end{minipage}
+
+
+
+\section{Style parameters}
+\label{parameters}
+\definecolor{markColor}{rgb}{0.10,0.10,0.9}
+
+\makeatletter
+\NewDocumentCommand{\measureMark}{%
+ s % arrows outside the measured distance
+ D<>{1.5pt} % offset of marks
+ O{.75cm} % offset of label
+ m % first point
+ m % second point
+ m % label
+ D<>{o} % () coordinates -> angle
+ % h -> horizontal,
+ % v -> vertical
+ % o or what ever -> oblique
+ O{} % options for tikzset
+ }{%
+
+ {\tikzset{#8}
+
+ \coordinate (@1) at #4 ;
+ \coordinate (@2) at #5 ;
+
+ \if #7v % vertical
+ \coordinate (@0) at ($($#4!.5!#5$) + (#3,0)$) ;
+ \coordinate (@4) at (@0|- at 1) ;
+ \coordinate (@5) at (@0|- at 2) ;
+ \else
+ \if #7h % horizontal
+ \coordinate (@0) at ($($#4!.5!#5$) + (0,#3)$) ;
+ \coordinate (@4) at (@0-|@1) ;
+ \coordinate (@5) at (@0-|@2) ;
+ \else % cotation encoche
+ \ifnum\pdfstrcmp{\unexpanded\expandafter{\@car#7\@nil}}{(}=\z@
+ \coordinate (@5) at ($#7!#3!#5$) ;
+ \coordinate (@4) at ($#7!#3!#4$) ;
+ \else % cotation oblique
+ \coordinate (@5) at ($#5!#3!90:#4$) ;
+ \coordinate (@4) at ($#4!#3!-90:#5$) ;
+ \fi\fi\fi
+
+ \draw[dotted,very thin,shorten >= #2,shorten <= -2*#2] (@4) -- #4 ;
+ \draw[dotted,very thin,shorten >= #2,shorten <= -2*#2] (@5) -- #5 ;
+
+ \IfBooleanTF #1 {% with star
+ \draw[measureMark arrow,-,draw=none] (@4) -- (@5)
+ node[measureMark node] {#6\strut};
+ \draw[measureMark arrow,<-] (@4) -- ($(@4)!-2pt!(@5)$) ;
+ \draw[measureMark arrow,<-] (@5) -- ($(@5)!-2pt!(@4)$) ;
+ }{% without star
+ \ifnum\pdfstrcmp{\unexpanded\expandafter{\@car#7\@nil}}{(}=\z@
+ \draw[measureMark arrow] (@5) to[bend right]
+ node[measureMark node] {#6\strut} (@4) ;
+ \else
+ \draw[measureMark arrow] (@4) -- (@5)
+ node[measureMark node] {#6\strut};
+ \fi
+ }}
+ }
+\makeatother
+
+By means of a collection of parameters, the graphical appearance of
+an \MSC{} can be fine tuned to the user's taste.
+The general parameters
+are displayed in Figure~\ref{parametersfig} on page~\pageref{parametersfig}.
+%
+% %========================
+\begin{figure}[htb]
+ \begin{msc}[right environment distance=2.3cm]{Lengths}
+ \tikzset{%
+ measureMark node/.style={%
+ midway,
+ sloped,
+ fill=white,
+ text = markColor,
+ font=\footnotesize,
+ inner sep=1.5pt,
+ outer sep=2pt
+ },
+ measureMark arrow/.style={%
+ <->,
+ >=latex,
+ very thin,dashed
+ },
+ dimen/.style={<->,>=latex,thin,every rectangle node/.style={fill=white,midway,font=\sffamily}},
+ symmetry/.style={dashed,thin},
+ }
+ \declinst{m1}{aname}{iname}
+ \declinst{st}{}{}
+ \declinst{m2}{}{}
+
+ \mess{msg1}{m1}{st}
+ \nextlevel
+ \mess{msg2}{m1}{st}
+ \nextlevel
+ \mess{self}{m1}{m1}
+ \coregionstart{m2}
+ \nextlevel[2]
+ \coregionend{m2}
+ \nextlevel
+ \lost[r]{x}{}{m2}
+ \stop{st}
+ \settimer{T}{m1}
+ \nextlevel
+ \inlinestart[left inline overlap=0.9cm,right inline overlap=0.5cm]{alt}{alt}{m1}{m1}
+ \nextlevel[2]
+ \inlineend{alt}
+ \action{a}{m2}
+ \nextlevel
+ \referencestart{ref}{\small reference}{m1}{m1}
+ \nextlevel
+ \referenceend{ref}
+ \nextlevel
+ \gate*{}{m1}
+ \nextlevel
+ \condition{cond1}{m1,m2}
+ \nextlevel[3]
+ \mess{msg3}{m2}{m1}
+ \makeatletter
+ \msc at endmsc[]
+ \makeatother
+
+ \measureMark*[-2.5cm]{($(msc at env@nw)+(\mscget{title distance},0cm)$)}{($(msc at env@nw)+
+ (\mscget{title distance},-\mscget{title top distance})$)}%
+ {title top distance}%
+ [measureMark node/.append style={above right=-36pt and -2pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark*[-0.8cm]{($(msc at env@nw)+(0cm,-\mscget{title top distance}-1em)$)}{($(msc at env@nw)+
+ (\mscget{title distance},-\mscget{title top distance}-1em)$)}%
+ {title distance}[measureMark node/.append style={left=6pt}]
+
+ \measureMark*[-1.1cm]{(msc at nodem1.north)}{($(msc at nodem1.north)+ (0cm,\mscget{label distance})$)}%
+ {label distance}[measureMark node/.append style={above left=6pt and 9pt,rotate=-90}]
+
+ \measureMark*[-1.6cm]{($(msc at level2-|msc at nodem1)+(1.5cm,0)$)}
+ {($(msc at level2-|msc at nodem1)+ (1.5cm,\mscget{label distance})$)}%
+ {label distance}[measureMark node/.append style={above left=6pt and 9pt,rotate=-90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.0cm]{($(msc at env@nw)+(4cm,0)$)}{(msc at nodest.north)}%
+ {head top distance}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={right=0pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{($(msc at env@nw)+(0,-3cm)$)}{(msc at nodem1.south)}%
+ {left environment distance}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={above left=0pt and -7pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[1.0cm]{($(msc at nodem1.south)+(-\mscget{self message
+ width},-2.4cm)$)}{($(msc at nodem1.south)+(0cm,-2.4cm)$)}%
+ {self message width}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={left=8pt}]
+
+ \measureMark*[0.21cm]{($(msc at nodem1.south)+(-\mscget{self message width}-
+ \mscget{timer width}/2,-2.9cm)$)}
+ {($(msc at nodem1.south)+(-\mscget{self message width}+\mscget{timer width}/2,-2.9cm)$)}%
+ {timer width}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={left=7pt,yshift=1pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.17cm]{($(msc at level8-|msc at nodem1)+(-0.9cm,-10pt)$)}
+ {($(msc at level8-|msc at nodem1)+(0,-10pt)$)}%
+ {left inline overlap}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={left=12pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.17cm]{($(msc at level8-|msc at nodem1)+(0.5cm,-2pt)$)}
+ {($(msc at level8-|msc at nodem1)+(0,-2pt)$)}%
+ {right inline overlap}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={right=6pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.0cm]{($(msc at level11-|msc at nodem1)+(-\mscget{left reference overlap},4pt)$)}
+ {($(msc at level11-|msc at nodem1)+(0,4pt)$)}%
+ {left reference overlap}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={left=14pt}]
+
+ \measureMark*[-0.2cm]{($(msc at level12-|msc at nodem1)+(0,\mscget{gate symbol radius})$)}
+ {($(msc at level12-|msc at nodem1)$)}%
+ {gate symbol radius}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={left=1pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[-0.3cm]{($(msc at level17-|msc at nodem1)+(-\mscget{instance width}/2,0pt)$)}
+ {($(msc at level17-|msc at nodem1)+(\mscget{instance width}/2,0pt)$)}%
+ {instance width}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={below=0pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{(msc at level0-|msc at nodest)}
+ {(msc at level1-|msc at nodest)}%
+ {first level height}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=0pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{(msc at level1-|msc at nodest)}
+ {(msc at level2-|msc at nodest)}%
+ {level height}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=0pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{(msc at nodem2.north east)}
+ {(msc at nodem2.south east)}%
+ {head height}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=0pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{($(msc at level3-|msc at nodem2)+(\mscget{region width}/2,0)$)}
+ {($(msc at level3-|msc at nodem2)+(-\mscget{region width}/2,0)$)}%
+ {region width}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=5pt}]
+
+ \measureMark*[0.2cm]{($(msc at level6-|msc at nodem2)+(\mscget{self message width},\mscget{lost symbol radius})$)}
+ {($(msc at level6-|msc at nodem2)+(\mscget{self message width},0pt)$)}%
+ {lost symbol radius}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=0pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[-0.2cm]{($(msc at level6-|msc at nodest)+(-\mscget{stop width}/2,-\mscget{stop width}/2)$)}
+ {($(msc at level6-|msc at nodest)+(\mscget{stop width}/2,-\mscget{stop width}/2)$)}%
+ {stop width}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=7pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[-0.2cm]{($(msc at level4-|msc at nodem1)$)}
+ {($(msc at level4-|msc at nodest)$)}%
+ {instance\\ distance}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,fill=none,yshift=-1pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{($(msc at level9-|msc at nodem2)+(-\mscget{action width}/2,0)$)}
+ {($(msc at level9-|msc at nodem2)+(\mscget{action width}/2,0)$)}%
+ {action width}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,above=-1pt,xshift=3pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{($(msc at level9-|msc at nodem2)+(\mscget{action width}/2,0)$)}
+ {($(msc at level9-|msc at nodem2)+(\mscget{action width}/2,-\mscget{action height})$)}%
+ {action height}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=1pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.5cm]{($(msc at level13-|msc at nodem2)+(\mscget{condition overlap},0)$)}
+ {($(msc at level13-|msc at nodem2)+(\mscget{condition overlap},-\mscget{condition height})$)}%
+ {condition height}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=1pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{($(msc at level13-|msc at nodem2)+(\mscget{condition overlap},0)$)}
+ {($(msc at level13-|msc at nodem2)+(0,0pt)$)}%
+ {right condition overlap}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,above=-1pt}]
+
+ \measureMark<2pt>[0.2cm]{($(msc at level13-|msc at nodem2)+(\mscget{condition overlap},0)$)}
+ {($(msc at level13-|msc at nodem2)+(0,0pt)$)}%
+ {right condition overlap}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,above=-1pt}]
+
+ \measureMark<2pt>[0.2cm]{($(msc at level16-|msc at nodem2)+(0,0)$)}
+ {($(msc at level17-|msc at nodem2)+(0,0pt)$)}%
+ {last level height}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=-2pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark*[0.2cm]{($(msc at level17-|msc at nodem2)+(\mscget{instance width}/2,0)$)}
+ {($(msc at level17-|msc at nodem2)+(\mscget{instance width}/2,-\mscget{foot height})$)}%
+ {foot height}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=1pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark<0pt>[0.0cm]{($(msc at level17-|msc at nodem2)+(0.3cm,-\mscget{foot height})$)}
+ {($(msc at env@se-|msc at nodem2)+(0.3cm,0)$)}%
+ {foot distance}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,left=-1pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{($(msc at env@se)+(0,7.5cm)$)}{(msc at nodem2.south)}%
+ {right\\ environment\\ distance}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=33pt}]
+
+ \mscset{draw frame=none,msc keyword={},msc/name={}}
+ \end{msc}
+
+ \caption{User controllable parameters}
+ \label{parametersfig}
+\end{figure}
+%
+% The value of a parameter can be changed using standard
+% \LaTeX\ commands, e.g.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \setlength{\levelheight}{1cm}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The following list describes all parameters.
+% The default values for drawing \MSC{}s at large, normal and small size are
+% included. See the command \verb+\setmscvalues{size}+ below for
+% restoring the parameters to their original values.
+%
+% %========================
+% \begin{defs}
+%
+% \item[\cmd{actionheight}]
+% Height of action symbols.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.5} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{actionwidth}]
+% Width of action symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.25}{1.25}{1.2} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{bottomfootdist}]
+% Distance between bottom of foot symbol and frame.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.7}{0.5} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{commentdist}]
+% Distance between a comment and its instance.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.5}{0.5} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{conditionheight}]
+% Height of condition symbols.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.5} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{conditionoverlap}]
+% Overlap of condition symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.5}{0.4} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{envinstdist}]
+% Distance between environments and nearest instance line.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{2.5}{2.0}{1.2} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{firstlevelheight}] Height of level just below head
+% symbols. Should not be changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{gatesymbolradius}] Radius of the gate symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.5}{0.5} mm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{hmscconditionheight}]
+% Height of \HMSC{} condition symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.375}{0.3}{0.25} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{hmscconditionwidth}]
+% Width of \HMSC{} condition symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.8}{0.7} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{hmscconnectionradius}]
+% Radius of \HMSC{} connection symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.06}{0.05}{0.04} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{hmscreferenceheight}]
+% Height of \HMSC{} reference symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.375}{0.3}{0.25} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{hmscreferencewidth}]
+% Width of \HMSC{} reference symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.8}{0.7} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{hmscstartsymbolwidth}]
+% Width of \HMSC{} start symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.3} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{inlineoverlap}]
+% Overlap of inline symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.0}{0.75} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{instbarwidth}]
+% Default width of vertical instance bars (applies to fat instances only).\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.0}{0.0}{0.0} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{instdist}]
+% Distance between instance axes.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{3.0}{2.2}{1.5} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{instfootheight}] Height of foot symbols. Should not be
+% changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.25}{0.2}{0.15} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{instheadheight}] Height of head symbols. Should not be
+% changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.55}{0.5} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{instwidth}]
+% Width of header and foot symbols.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.75}{1.6}{1.2} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{labeldist}]
+% Distance between labels and the symbols to which they belong (for instance, message labels and arrows).\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} ex.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{lastlevelheight}] Height of level just above foot
+% symbols. Should not be changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.4}{0.3} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{leftnamedist}] Distance between left of the frame and
+% (left of) \MSC, \HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} title.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.3}{0.2}{0.1} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{levelheight}]
+% Height of a level.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.5}{0.4} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{lostsymbolradius}]
+% Radius of the lost and found symbols.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.15}{0.12}{0.08} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{markdist}]
+% Horizontal distance from a mark to its instance.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{measuredist}]
+% Horizontal distance from a measure to its (closest) instance.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{measuresymbolwidth}]
+% Width of a measure symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{mscdocreferenceheight}]
+% Height of reference symbol in an \MSCdoc.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.375}{0.3}{0.25} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{mscdocreferencewidth}]
+% Width of reference symbol in an \MSCdoc.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.8}{0.7} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{referenceoverlap}]
+% Overlap of reference symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.0}{0.75} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{regionbarwidth}]
+% Width of region bars.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.4}{0.2} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{selfmesswidth}]
+% Length of horizontal arms of self messages.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{stopwidth}]
+% Width of the stop symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.5}{0.3} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{timerwidth}]
+% Width of the \emph{timer} symbols.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.4}{0.3}{0.2} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{topheaddist}]
+% Distance between top of head symbols and frame.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.3}{1.2} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{topnamedist}] Distance between top of the frame and
+% (top of) \MSC, \HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} title.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.3}{0.2}{0.2} cm.)
+%
+% \end{defs}
+%
+% In addition there are several commands which allow the user to adjust
+% the \MSC{} drawing to his own taste.
+%
+% \begin{defs}
+%
+% \item[\cmd{messarrowscale}\{\emph{scalefactor}\}] Sets the scale
+% factor (a positive real number) of message arrow
+% heads. (\lnsvalue{2}{1.5}{1.2})
+%
+% \item[\cmd{setmscscale}\{\emph{scalefactor}\}] Sets the scale factor
+% of the \MSC{} environment to \emph{scalefactor}. the scale factor is
+% supposed to be a real number. Scaling is done when the \MSC{}
+% environment ends (\verb|\end{msc}|). The default of \emph{scalefactor}
+% is~1. A more consistent way for
+% varying the size of the \MSC{} can be obtained by using the
+% \verb+\setmesvalues+ command as described below.
+% (default value 1.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{psset}\{\texttt{linewidth=D}\}] This command sets the width
+% of all lines in \MSC{}s, \HMSC{}s, and \MSCdoc{}s to length \verb+D+. If
+% this command is issued outside the msc environment, then the value is
+% set for the complete document. If it is used directly after the start
+% of the msc environment it only holds for this \MSC{}.\\
+% (large/normal/small value 0.8/0.7/0.6 pt.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{setfootcolor}\{\emph{color}\}] Sets the color of the foot
+% symbols of \MSC{} instances. Possible values are \emph{black},
+% \emph{white}, \emph{gray}, or \emph{lightgray}. For more color values,
+% see the documentation of the \LaTeXe{} \textsf{color} package.
+%
+% \end{defs}
+%
+% The following command can be used to set the above mentioned
+% style parameters to suitable values.
+%
+% \begin{defs}
+% \item[\cmd{setmscvalues}\{\emph{size}\}] Sets all parameters of the \mscpack{} to
+% predefined values. Valid values for \emph{size} are:
+% \verb|small|, \verb|normal|, and \verb|large|.
+% (The default value of \verb+size+ is \verb+normal+.
+% This can be used for drawings with at maximum six instances on a
+% sheet of A4 paper.
+% For sizes \verb+large+ and \verb+small+, a maximum of four and nine
+% instances respectively fit on a sheet of A4 paper.)
+% \end{defs}
+%
+% Caution has to be taken when changing the value of a parameter within
+% the \MSC{} definition. The following parameters can be changed within an
+% \MSC{} definition without unexpected side effects:
+%
+% \begin{flushleft}
+% \verb+\actionheight+,
+% \verb+\actionwidth+,
+% \verb+\bottomfootdist+,
+% \verb+\conditionheight+,
+% \verb+\conditionoverlap+,
+% \verb+\inlineoverlap+,
+% \verb+\instfootheight+,
+% \verb+\instwidth+ (however, this may cause different sizes of
+% corresponding instance header and footer symbols),
+% \verb+\labeldist+,
+% \verb+\lastlevelheight+,
+% \verb+\levelheight+,
+% \verb+\lostsymbolradius+,
+% \verb+\referenceoverlap+,
+% \verb+\regionbarwidth+,
+% \verb+\selfmesswidth+,
+% \verb+\stopwidth+,
+% \verb+\timerwidth+, and
+% \verb+\topnamedist+.
+% \end{flushleft}
+%
+%
+% In addition to the parameters specific to the \mscpack,
+% standard \LaTeX\ commands can be used to change the type style and
+% other details.
+% For example, if the command \verb+\sffamily+ is included directly after
+% the start of the msc environment, the text in the \MSC{}
+% is drawn using a {\sf sans serif} font. Likewise, the text size can be
+% changed by inserting, e.g., the command \verb+\small+.
+% The \verb+\raisebox+ and \verb+\parbox+ commands
+% can also be used to position and format names.
+
+
+\section{Example}
+\label{example}
+Figure~\ref{ex} on page~\pageref{ex} shows the \MSC{} defined in the
+following \LaTeX\ fragment.
+
+{\small
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{msc}{Example}
+\declinst{usr}{The user}{User}
+\declinst{m1}{Control}{M1}
+\dummyinst{m2}
+\declinst{m3}{Another Machine}{M3}
+
+\create{start}{m1}{m2}{Processing}{M2}
+\mess{msg 0}{envleft}{usr}
+\mess{msg 1}{envright}{m2}[1]
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess{msg 2}{usr}{m1}
+\order{m1}{m2}[4]
+\action{a}{m3}
+
+\nextlevel
+\found{msg x}{}{usr}
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess{msg 3}{usr}{m2}[-1]
+\coregionstart{m1}
+\settimeout{S}{m3}[2]
+\nextlevel
+
+
+\mess{msg 4}{m1}{usr}
+\coregionstart{m2}
+\settimer[r]{T}{m3}
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess[r]{msg 5}{m2}{m2}[3]
+\mess{msg 6}{usr}{usr}[2]
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess{msg 7}{m2}{usr}
+\timeout[r]{T}{m3}
+\nextlevel
+
+\coregionend{m2}
+\nextlevel
+
+\coregionend{m1}
+\stoptimer[r]{T'}{m3}
+\nextlevel
+
+\lost[r]{msg y}{Mach 1}{usr}
+\mess{msg 8}{m1}{envright}
+\nextlevel
+
+\condition{condition 1}{usr,m2}
+\setstoptimer[r]{U}{m3}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\stop{usr}
+
+\end{msc}
+\end{verbatim}
+}
+
+\begin{figure}[htb]
+\begin{center}
+\begin{msc}{Example}
+\declinst{usr}{The user}{User}
+\declinst{m1}{Control}{M1}
+\dummyinst{m2}
+\declinst{m3}{Another Machine}{M3}
+
+\create{start}{m1}{m2}{Processing}{M2}
+\mess{msg 0}{envleft}{usr}
+\mess{msg 1}{envright}{m2}[1]
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess{msg 2}{usr}{m1}
+\order{m1}{m2}[4]
+\action{a}{m3}
+
+\nextlevel
+\found{msg x}{}{usr}
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess{msg 3}{usr}{m2}[-1]
+\coregionstart{m1}
+\settimeout{S}{m3}[2]
+\nextlevel
+
+
+\mess{msg 4}{m1}{usr}
+\coregionstart{m2}
+\settimer[r]{T}{m3}
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess[r]{msg 5}{m2}{m2}[3]
+\mess{msg 6}{usr}{usr}[2]
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess{msg 7}{m2}{usr}
+\timeout[r]{T}{m3}
+\nextlevel
+
+\coregionend{m2}
+\nextlevel
+
+\coregionend{m1}
+\stoptimer[r]{T'}{m3}
+\nextlevel
+
+\lost[r]{msg y}{Mach 1}{usr}
+\mess{msg 8}{m1}{envright}
+\nextlevel
+
+\condition{condition 1}{usr,m2}
+\setstoptimer[r]{U}{m3}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\stop{usr}
+
+\end{msc}
+
+\caption{A menagerie of \MSC{} symbols}
+\label{ex}
+\end{center}
+\end{figure}
+
+
+\section{Acknowledgments}
+Thanks are due to the following people for providing us with useful
+input: Cas Cremers, Hugo Jonker, Peter Peters, Sa\v{s}a Radomirovi\'c,
+Michel Reniers, and Pim Vullers.
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain}
+\bibliography{biblio}
+\printindex
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/refman.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/refman.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/refman.tex 2022-05-13 21:35:58 UTC (rev 63290)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/refman.tex 2022-05-13 21:37:05 UTC (rev 63291)
@@ -1,1547 +0,0 @@
-% file: refman.tex
-% Copyright 2008 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, and S. Mauw
-% This file is part of the MSC Macro Package.
-%
-\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
-\usepackage{a4wide}
-
-\usepackage{multicol}
-\usepackage{msc}
-
-\newlength{\rpwidth}
-\setlength{\rpwidth}{.5cm}
-\newlength{\rpheight}
-\setlength{\rpheight}{0.5\levelheight}
-\newcommand{\rpN}{%
- \psframe(-0.5\rpwidth,-\rpheight)(0.5\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](0\rpwidth,-0.8\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{n}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpNE}{%
- \psframe(-\rpwidth,-\rpheight)(0\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](-.5\rpwidth,-0.8\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{ne}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpE}{%
- \psframe(-\rpwidth,-.5\rpheight)(0\rpwidth,.5\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](-.5\rpwidth,-0.3\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{e}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpSE}{%
- \psframe(-\rpwidth,0\rpheight)(0\rpwidth,\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](-.5\rpwidth,0.2\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{se}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpS}{%
- \psframe(-.5\rpwidth,\rpheight)(.5\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[t](0\rpwidth,0.8\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{s}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpSW}{%
- \psframe(0\rpwidth,0\rpheight)(\rpwidth,\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](.5\rpwidth,0.2\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{sw}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpW}{%
- \psframe(0\rpwidth,-.5\rpheight)(\rpwidth,.5\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](.5\rpwidth,-0.3\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{w}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpNW}{%
- \psframe(0\rpwidth,-\rpheight)(\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](.5\rpwidth,-0.8\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{nw}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-
-
-
-% The following code is taken from the doc package. It defines a global
-% macro \bslash that produces a bslash (if present in the current font).
-\makeatletter
-{\catcode`\|=\z@ \catcode`\\=12 |gdef|bslash{\}}
-\makeatother
-\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\bslash #1}}
-
-\usepackage{url}
-\newcommand{\acro}[1]{{\scshape\lowercase{#1}}}
-
-\newcommand\MSC{\acro{MSC}}
-\newcommand\HMSC{\acro{HMSC}}
-\newcommand{\MSCdoc}{\MSC{}doc}
-\newcommand{\mscpack}{\MSC{} macro package}
-
-\newcommand{\env}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\opt}[1]{[#1]}
-\newcommand{\cmdarg}[1]{\{\emph{#1}\}}
-\newcommand{\coordarg}[1]{\emph{#1}}
-\newcommand{\coordargs}[2]{(\coordarg{#1},\coordarg{#2})}
-\newcommand{\lnsvalue}[3]{large/normal/small value #1/#2/#3}
-
-\newenvironment{defs}{%
- \begin{list}{}%
- {\setlength{\labelwidth}{0pt}%
- \setlength{\labelsep}{1em}%
- \setlength{\leftmargin}{1em}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{1ex}%
- \setlength{\listparindent}{0pt}%
- \setlength{\rightmargin}{0pt}%
- \renewcommand{\makelabel}[1]{##1}%
- \raggedright%
- }%
- }{%
- \end{list}}
-
-\title{
- A \LaTeX\ macro package for Message Sequence Charts\\{\large Reference Manual}
-}
-
-\author{
- \begin{tabular}{c}
- \begin{tabular}{ccc}
- Victor Bos &
- Ton van Deursen &
- Sjouke Mauw \\
- &
- \scriptsize Universit\'e du Luxembourg &
- \scriptsize Universit\'e du Luxembourg \\[-0.8ex]
- \scriptsize \texttt{vbos at abo.fi} &
- \scriptsize \texttt{ton.vandeursen at uni.lu} &
- \scriptsize \texttt{sjouke.mauw at uni.lu}
- \end{tabular}\\
- \end{tabular}
-}
-
-\date{\small Version \mscversion, last update \today\\
- Describing \mscpack{} version \mscversion}
-
-
-
-\begin{document}
-\maketitle
-
-\tableofcontents
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-The \mscpack{} was developed to draw (actually, to write)
-\emph{Message Sequence Charts} (\MSC{}s) with \LaTeX. The current
-version supports most of the \MSC{} language standardized
-in~\cite{z120}. The manual~\cite{BM02a} describes how to use the
-\mscpack{} and is illustrated with numerous examples. This reference manual
-briefly describes the main concepts of the package and it provides
-lists of all available environments and commands. In addition, it
-lists both the user-definable lengths and the internal lengths that
-are used by the package to compute the layout of \MSC{}s.
-\section{Concepts}
-
-The \mscpack{} offers three different kinds
-of diagrams:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item \MSC{} diagrams (normal \MSC{}s)
-\item \HMSC{} diagrams (high level \MSC{}s)
-\item \MSCdoc{} diagrams (\MSC{} documents)
-\end{itemize}
-For each of these diagrams, the package provides a \LaTeX{}
-environment. Figure~\ref{fig:types:of:diagrams} shows an example of
-each diagram. The source code for these diagrams is given in
-Figure~\ref{fig:sources}. Depending on the environment, different
-\mscpack{} commands can be used. Furthermore, since each environment
-is implemented as a \texttt{pspicture} (see \textsf{pstricks}
-documentation), it is possible to use \textsf{pstricks} commands
-inside the \MSC{} environments.
-
-\begin{figure}
-\begin{center}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\begin{tabular}{ccc}
-\begin{msc}%
- {Example 1}%
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{a}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\mess{b}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}%
-%
-&
-\begin{hmsc}%
- {Example 2}%
- (0,0)(4,4.65)
-\hmscstartsymbol{S}(2,3.75)
-\hmscconnection{c}(2,3.25)
-\hmscreference{R1}{A}(2,2.5)
-\hmsccondition{C}{?}(2,1.5)
-\hmscendsymbol{E}(1.5,0.5)
-\arrow{S}{c}
-\arrow{c}{R1}
-\arrow{R1}{C}
-\arrow{C}
- [(2.5,1)(3,1)(3,3.25)]
- {c}
-\arrow{C}[(1.5,1)]{E}
-\end{hmsc}%
-&
-\begin{mscdoc}%
- {Example 3}%
- (0,0)(4,4.65)
-\reference{A}(1,3.0)
-\reference{B}(3,3.0 )
-\separator{2.0}
-\reference{C}(2,1.0)
-\end{mscdoc}%
-\\
-(a) \MSC{} diagram &
-(b) \HMSC{} diagram &
-(c) \MSCdoc{} diagram
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-
-\caption{Examples of different diagrams}
-\label{fig:types:of:diagrams}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\hrulefill
-\begin{center}
-\begin{minipage}[t]{0.3\linewidth}
-\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}%
- {Example 1}
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{a}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\mess{b}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{minipage}
-\hfil
-\begin{minipage}[t]{0.3\linewidth}
-\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{hmsc}%
- {Example 2}%
- (0,0)(4,4.65)
-\hmscstartsymbol{S}(2,3.75)
-\hmscconnection{c}(2,3.25)
-\hmscreference{R1}{A}(2,2.5)
-\hmsccondition{C}{?}(2,1.5)
-\hmscendsymbol{E}(1.5,0.5)
-\arrow{S}{c}
-\arrow{c}{R1}
-\arrow{R1}{C}
-\arrow{C}
- [(2.5,1)(3,1)(3,3.25)]
- {c}
-\arrow{C}[(1.5,1)]{E}
-\end{hmsc}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{minipage}
-\hfil
-\begin{minipage}[t]{0.3\linewidth}
-\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{mscdoc}%
- {Example 3}%
- (0,0)(4,4.65)
-\reference{A}(1,3.0)
-\reference{B}(3,3.0 )
-\separator{2.0}
-\reference{C}(2,1.0)
-\end{mscdoc}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{minipage}
-\end{center}
-\hrulefill
-\caption{Source code for diagrams of Figure~\ref{fig:types:of:diagrams}}
-\label{fig:sources}
-\end{figure}
-
-
-The \MSC{} environment provides most functionality of the package. The
-following concepts should help in understanding the user-commands of
-this environment.
-
-
-\begin{defs}
-\item[\emph{current height}] The \emph{current height} of an \MSC{} is a
-length that indicates the y-postion relative to the top of the msc
-frame. The \MSC{} drawing commands use this y-position to draw msc
-symbols, e.g., instance heads, messages, actions, and instance
-feet. The internal length \verb|\msc at currentheight| is the current
-height. This variables is changed whenever the command
-\verb|\nextlevel| is invoked.
-
-\item[\emph{current width}] The \emph{current width} of an \MSC{} is the
-distance from the left side of the \MSC{} frame to the right side of the
-\MSC{} frame. As such, it depends on the lengths \verb|\envinstdist| and
-\verb|\instdist| as well as on the number of instances. The internal
-length \verb|\msc at currentwidth| is the current width. During
-construction of an msc, that is, in between \verb|\begin{msc}| and
-\verb|\end{msc}|, \verb|\msc at currentwidth| is equal to
-$\verb|\envinstdist| + (n \times \verb|instdist|)$, provided that~$n$ is
-the number of instances defined so far (see \verb|\mscinstcnt| in the
-section \emph{Internal counters} below) and the length
-\verb|\instdist| is not changed between instances. At the end of an
-\MSC{} construction, an additional \verb|\envinstdist| is added to
-\verb|\msc at currentwidth|. The \verb|\msc at currentwidth| determines the
-x-position of new \MSC{} instances.
-
-\item[\emph{level}] A level is a horizontal layer in an \MSC{} which is
-used to construct msc's in a top-down fashion. Each level is
-\verb|\levelheight| units high and spans the complete width of the
-msc. The first level starts at $\verb|\topheaddist| +
-\verb|\instheadheight| + \verb|\firstlevelheight|$ units below the top
-of the \MSC{} frame. The \verb|\nextlevel| commands advances the \MSC{} to
-the next (lower) level.
-
-\item[\emph{\MSC{} instance}] The main building blocks of MSC diagrams
-are \emph{instances}. Instances are represented by vertical
-bars. \emph{Fat} instances are represented by two vertical
-lines. Usually, an instance has both a head symbol and a foot symbol.
-In the \mscpack, each \MSC{} instance has a \emph{nickname} by which
-the instance is identified. In the \mscpack{} there are special
-instances:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-
-\item The left environment (nickname \verb|envleft|).
-
-\item The right environment (nickname \verb|envright|).
-
-\item The left side of an inline expression. If the nickname of the
-inline expression is \verb|nm|, the nickname of the left side is
-\verb|nmleft|.
-
-\item The right side of an inline expression. If the nickname of the
-inline expression is \verb|nm|, the nickname of the left side is
-\verb|nmright|.
-
-\item The left side of an reference expression. If the nickname of the
-reference expression is \verb|nm|, the nickname of the left side is
-\verb|nmleft|.
-
-\item The right side of an reference expression. If the nickname of the
-reference expression is \verb|nm|, the nickname of the left side is
-\verb|nmright|.
-
-\item A \emph{dummy} instance is an instance that is invisible; it
-reserves space needed to draw an instance. It is useful to create
-(see \verb|create| command) instances with create-messages.
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-\item[\emph{nickname}] A nickname is a unique identification of an
-\emph{instance}.
-
-\item[\emph{message label reference points}] In order to place a
-message label somewhere near the message arrow, the \mscpack{}
-computes a \emph{reference point} for each message label. This is a
-location on the bounding box of the label such that the distance
-between the arrow and the reference point is minimized. Figures
-\ref{fig:refpoints} (page~\pageref{fig:refpoints})
-and~\ref{fig:refpoints:B} (page~\pageref{fig:refpoints:B}) show the
-location of reference points for all possible locations of message
-labels. Note that the boxes with the location of the reference points
-are not generated by the \LaTeX{} code given in these figures; we
-enriched the \LaTeX{} code with some extra \textsf{pstricks} code (see
-\LaTeX{} source code of this document).
-
-\end{defs}
-
-\begin{figure}[!htb]
-\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\begin{multicols}{2}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m0}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m1}{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m1}{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m0}{m1}[2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m1}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m1}{m0}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m2}{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m1}{m0}[2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m2}{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m0}{m1}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m1}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\bigskip
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{S}{m0}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m1}{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{S}{m1}{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SW}{m0}{m1}[2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m1}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SW}{m1}{m0}[-2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m2}{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SE}{m1}{m0}[2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m2}{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SE}{m0}{m1}[-2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m1}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{multicols}
-\end{minipage}
-\caption{Reference points of message labels}
-\label{fig:refpoints}
-\end{figure}
-
-
-\begin{figure}[!htb]
-\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\begin{multicols}{2}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points (2)}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m0}[.9]{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m1}[.9]{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m0}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m1}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m1}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m0}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\bigskip
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points (2)}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{S}{m0}[.9]{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{S}{m1}[.9]{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SW}{m0}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SW}{m1}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SE}{m1}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SE}{m0}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{multicols}
-\end{minipage}
-\caption{Reference points of shifted message labels}
-\label{fig:refpoints:B}
-\end{figure}
-
-
-\section{Environments}
-
-\begin{defs}
-
-\item[\cmd{begin}\texttt{\{msc\}}\opt{titlepos}\{\emph{title}\}\texttt{...\cmd{end}\{msc\}}]
-The environment to draw msc's. The parameter \emph{title} defines the
-title of the msc. The optional parameter \emph{titlepos} defines the
-position of the title relative to the frame of the msc. Valid
-positions are \verb|l|~(left), \verb|c|~(center), and
-\verb|r|~(right). The default position is~\verb|l|.
-
-\item[\cmd{begin}\texttt{\{hmsc\}}\opt{titlepos}\{\emph{title}\}\texttt{...\cmd{end}\{hmsc\}}\coordargs{llx}{lly}\coordargs{urx}{ury}]
-The environment to draw \HMSC's. The parameter \emph{title} defines the
-title of the \HMSC. The optional parameter \emph{titlepos} defines the
-position of the title relative to the frame of the \HMSC. Valid
-positions are \verb|l|~(left), \verb|c|~(center), and
-\verb|r|~(right). The default position is~\verb|l|. The size of the
-\HMSC{} is determined by two pairs of coordinates. The coordinates
-\coordargs{llx}{lly} define the lower left corner of the \HMSC. The
-coordinates \coordargs{urx}{ury} define the upper right corner of the
-\HMSC.
-
-\item[\cmd{begin}\texttt{\{mscdoc\}}\opt{titlepos}\{\emph{title}\}\texttt{...\cmd{end}\{mscdoc\}}\coordargs{llx}{lly}\coordargs{urx}{ury}]
-The environment to draw \MSCdoc{} documents. The parameter
-\emph{title} defines the title of the \MSCdoc{} document. The optional
-parameter \emph{titlepos} defines the position of the title relative
-to the frame of the \MSCdoc{} document. Valid positions are \verb|l|~(left),
-\verb|c|~(center), and \verb|r|~(right). The default position
-is~\verb|l|. The size of the \MSCdoc{} is determined by two pairs of
-coordinates. The coordinates \coordargs{llx}{lly} define the lower
-left corner of the \MSCdoc. The coordinates \coordargs{urx}{ury}
-define the upper right corner of the \MSCdoc.
-
-
-\end{defs}
-
-
-\section{Commands}
-
-\begin{defs}
-
-\item[\cmd{action(*)}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{nm}\}] Draws an \emph{action}
-symbol on the instance with nickname \emph{nm}. The parameter \emph{txt}
-defines the name of the action. The size of the action symbol is
-controlled by the \verb|\actionheight| and \verb|\actionwidth|
-lengths. The starred version adjusts the height and width of the
-action symbol to the size of the contents.
-
-\item[\cmd{arrow}\cmdarg{nm0}\opt{\coordargs{xpos${}_1$}{ypos${}_1$}$\ldots$\coordargs{xpos${}_n$}{ypos${}_n$}}\cmdarg{nm1}]
-Draws an arrow in an \HMSC{} diagram. The arrow starts at the symbol
-with nickname~\emph{nm0} and ends at the symbol with
-nickname~\emph{nm1}. The optional parameter
-\coordargs{xpos${}_1$}{ypos${}_1$}$\ldots$\coordargs{xpos${}_n$}{ypos${}_n$}
-is a list of intermediate points the arrow should pass through.
-
-\item[\cmd{changeinstbarwidth}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{wd}\}] Changes the
-bar width of instance \emph{nm} to \emph{wd}. The parameter \emph{wd}
-should be a valid \LaTeX{} length.
-
-\item[\cmd{msccomment}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{nm}\}] Puts a
-comment at instance \emph{nm}. The parameter \emph{txt} is the
-comment. The optional parameter \emph{pos} defines the horizontal
-position of the comment relative to instance \emph{nm}. Valid
-positions are \verb|l|~(left), \verb|r|~(right), and all valid
-lengths. If the position is \verb|l| or~\verb|r|, the comment will be
-put at \verb|\msccommentdist| units to the left or right, respectively, from
-the instance axis. If \emph{pos} is a length, the comment will be put
-\emph{pos} units from the instance axis. A negative \emph{pos} puts the
-comment to the left and a positive \emph{pos} puts it to the right of
-the instance axis.
-
-\item[\cmd{condition(*)}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{instancelist}\}] Draws a
-\emph{condition} symbol on the instances occurring in
-\emph{instancelist}. The parameter \emph{txt} defines the text to be
-placed in the \emph{condition} symbol. The parameter
-\emph{instancelist} is a comma separated list of instance
-nicknames. Note that there should be no white space between the commas
-and the nicknames; only if a nickname contains white space is a white
-space allowed in \emph{instancelist}. The starred version adjusts the
-height and width of the condition symbol to the size of the contents.
-
-\item[\cmd{coregionend}\{\emph{nm}\}] Ends the co-region on the instance
-\emph{nm}. This command is obsolete (see \verb|\regionend|).
-
-\item[\cmd{coregionstart}\{\emph{nm}\}] Starts a co-region on the instance
-\emph{nm}. This command is obsolete (see \verb|\regionstart|).
-
-\item[\cmd{create}\{\emph{msg}\}\opt{\emph{labelpos}}\{\emph{creator}\}\opt{\emph{placement}}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{na}\}\{\emph{in}\}]
-Instance with nickname \emph{creator} sends a create message with
-label \emph{msg} to instance \emph{nm}. Instance \emph{nm} should be a
-dummy (invisible) instance at the time of the create message, see
-\cmd{dummyinst}. The head symbol of \emph{nm} is drawn at
-\verb|\msc at currentheight|. The parameter \emph{an} (above name) is put
-above the head symbol. The parameter \emph{in} (inside name) is put
-inside the head symbol. \emph{nm}'s y-position is set to
-\verb|\msc at currentheight| $+$ \verb|\instheadheight|. The optional
-parameter \emph{labelpos} defines the position of the message label. Valid
-values are \verb|t| and~\verb|b|, denoting a label position on top of
-the arrow and a label position below the arrow, respectively. The
-optional parameter \emph{placement} defines the relative position of
-the message label along the message arrow. Valid values are real
-numbers in the closed interval $[0,1]$, where~$0$ corresponds to the
-beginning of the arrow and~$1$ corresponds to the end of the
-arrow. The default value is~$0.5$.
-
-\item[\cmd{declinst(*)}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{an}\}\{\emph{in}\}]
-Defines an instance with nickname \emph{nm}. The starred version
-makes a \emph{fat instance}. The x-position is \verb|\instdist| to the
-right of \verb|\msc at currentwidth|. The head symbol of the instance is
-drawn at \verb|\msc at currentheight|. The parameter \emph{an} (above
-name) is put above the head symbol. The parameter \emph{in} (inside
-name) is put inside the head symbol. The
-instance y-position is set to \verb|\msc at currentheight| $+$ \verb|\instheadheight|.
-
-
-\item[\cmd{drawframe}\{\emph{str}\}] A command to turn on/off the
-drawing of the frame around msc's, hmsc's, and mscdoc's. If \emph{str}
-is `yes', the frame will be drawn, otherwise the frame will not be
-drawn.
-
-\item[\cmd{drawinstfoot}\{\emph{str}\}] A command to turn on/off
-drawing of instance foot symbols. If \emph{str} is `yes', the foot
-symbols will be drawn, otherwise they will not be drawn.
-
-\item[\cmd{drawinsthead}\{\emph{str}\}] A command to turn on/off
-drawing of instance head symbols. If \emph{str} is `yes', the head
-symbols will be drawn, otherwise they will not be drawn.
-
-\item[\cmd{dummyinst(*)}\{\emph{nm}\}] Defines a \emph{dummy instance}
-with nickname \emph{nm}. The starred version makes a \emph{fat
-instance}. The x-position is \verb|\instdist| to the right of
-\verb|\msc at currentwidth|. No head symbol is drawn. The
-instance y-position is undefined.
-
-\item[\cmd{found}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\opt{\emph{labelpos}}\{\emph{gate}\}\{\emph{nm}\}\opt{\emph{placement}}]
-Draws a \emph{found message} to instance \emph{nm}. The \emph{label}
-parameter defines the message name. The \emph{gate} parameter defines
-the gate name. The optional parameter \emph{pos} defines the position
-of the message relative to instance \emph{nm}. Valid positions are
-\verb|l| (left) and \verb|r| (right). The default position is
-\verb|l|. The optional parameter \emph{labelpos} defines the position
-of the message label with respect to the arrow. Valid values are
-\verb+t+ (on top) and \verb+b+ (below). The default value is \verb+t+.
-The optional parameter \emph{placement} defines the relative position
-of the message label along the message arrow. Valid values are real
-numbers in the closed interval $[0,1]$, where~$0$ corresponds to the
-beginning of the arrow and~$1$ corresponds to the end of the
-arrow. The default value is~$0.5$. The length of the arrow is
-determined by \verb+\selfmesswidth+.
-
-\item[\cmd{gate(*)}\opt{\emph{hpos}}\opt{\emph{vpos}}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{nm}\}]
-Draws a gate at instance \emph{nm}. The parameter \emph{txt} defines
-the name of the gate. The starred version produces a visible gate by
-drawing a black circle at instance \emph{nm}. The unstarred version
-produces an invisible gate. The position of the parameter \emph{txt}
-is controlled by the optional parameters \emph{hpos} and \emph{vpos}:
-\emph{hpos} defines the horizontal position relative to instance
-\emph{nm} and \emph{vpos} defines the vertical position relative to
-the current height (\verb|\msc at currentheight|). Valid horizontal
-positions are \verb|l|~(left) and \verb|r|~(right). The default
-horizontal position is~\verb|l|. Valid vertical positions are
-\verb|t|~(top), \verb|c|~(center), and \verb|b|~(bottom). The default
-vertical is~\verb|t|.
-
-\item[\cmd{hmsccondition}\cmdarg{nm}\cmdarg{txt}\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}]
-Draws an \HMSC{} condition symbol with nickname \emph{nm} at position
-\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}. The \emph{txt} parameter is placed inside the
-condition symbol.
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscconnection(*)}\cmdarg{nm}\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}] Draws
-an \HMSC{} connection symbol with nickname \emph{nm} at position
-\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}. The unstarred version produces an invisible
-connection symbol. The starred version produces a visible connection
-symbol (i.e., a small circle).
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscendsymol}\cmdarg{nm}\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}] Draws an
-\HMSC{} end symbol with nickname \emph{nm} at position
-\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}.
-
-\item[\cmd{hmsckeyword}] The \HMSC{} keyword. The default value is `hmsc'.
-
-\item[\cmd{hmsckeywordstyle}\{\emph{kw}\}] A one-parameter command to
-typeset the \HMSC{} keyword. The command can expect \verb|\hmsckeyword| to
-be the value of \emph{kw}. The default `value' is \verb|\textbf|.
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscreference}\cmdarg{nm}\cmdarg{txt}\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}]
-Draws an \HMSC{} reference symbol with nickname \emph{nm} at position
-\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}. The \emph{txt} parameter is placed inside the
-condition symbol.
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscstartsymbol}\cmdarg{nm}\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}]
-\HMSC{} start symbol with nickname \emph{nm} at position
-\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}.
-
-\item[\cmd{inlineend(*)}\{\emph{nm}\}] Ends the matching inline
-expression (matching means equal nicknames). The unstarred version
-draws a solid line to close the inline expression. The starred version
-draws a dashed line to close the inline expression.
-
-\item[\cmd{inlineseparator}\{\emph{nm}\}] Draws an inline separator
-line at the inline expression with nickname \emph{nm}. The separator
-is drawn at \verb|\msc at currentheight|.
-
-\item[\cmd{inlinestart}\opt{\emph{lo}}\opt{\emph{ro}}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{fi}\}\{\emph{li}\}]
-Defines an \emph{inline expression} with nickname \emph{nm}. The
-inline expression is started at \verb|\msc at currentheight| and
-continues until the level where a matching \cmd{inlineend} command is
-found (matching means equal nicknames). The \emph{txt} parameter
-defines the text of the inline expression. The first instance of the
-inline expression is \emph{fi}. The last instance of the inline
-expression is \emph{li}. The optional parameter \emph{lo} defines the
-left and right overlap of the inline expression. If the second
-optional parameter, \emph{ro}, is present, \emph{lo} defines the left
-and \emph{ro} defines the right overlap.
-
-\item[\cmd{inststart}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{an}\}\{\emph{in}\}] Starts
-instance with nickname \emph{nm}. Instance \emph{nm} should be a dummy
-(invisible) instance at the time of the \cmd{inststart} command, see
-\cmd{dummyinst}. The head symbol is drawn at
-\verb|\msc at currentheight|. The parameter \emph{an} (above name) is put
-above the head symbol. The parameter \emph{in} (inside name) is put
-inside the head symbol. The instance y-position is set to
-\verb|\msc at currentheight| $+$ \verb|\instheadheight|.
-
-\item[\cmd{inststop}\{\emph{nm}\}] Stops instance with nickname
-\emph{nm}. The foot symbol is drawn at \verb|\msc at currentheight|. The
-instance y-position is undefined after this command.
-
-\item[\cmd{lost}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\opt{\emph{labelpos}}\{\emph{gate}\}\{\emph{nm}\}\opt{\emph{placement}}]
-Draws a \emph{lost message} from instance \emph{nm}. The \emph{label}
-parameter defines the message name. The \emph{gate} parameter defines
-the gate name. The optional parameter \emph{pos} defines the position
-of the message relative to instance \emph{nm}. Valid positions are
-\verb|l| (left) and \verb|r| (right). The default position is
-\verb|l|. The optional parameter \emph{labelpos} defines the position
-of the message label with respect to the arrow. Valid values are
-\verb+t+ (on top) and \verb+b+ (below). The default value is \verb+t+.
-The optional parameter \emph{placement} defines the relative position
-of the message label along the message arrow. Valid values are real
-numbers in the closed interval $[0,1]$, where~$0$ corresponds to the
-beginning of the arrow and~$1$ corresponds to the end of the
-arrow. The default value is~$0.5$. The length of the arrow is
-determined by \verb+\selfmesswidth+.
-
-\item[\cmd{measure(*)}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{nm1}\}\{\emph{nm2}\}\opt{\emph{offset}}]
-Puts a \emph{measure} at instances \emph{nm1} and \emph{nm2}. The
-parameter \emph{txt} defines the label of the measure. The starred
-version puts the triangular measure symbols outside the measure; the
-unstarred version puts the triangular measure symbols inside the
-measure. The optional \emph{pos} parameter defines the horizontal
-position of the measure relative to instances \emph{nm1}
-and~\emph{nm2}. Valid positions are \verb|l|~(left), \verb|r|~(right),
-and all valid lengths. If the position is \verb|l| or~\verb|r|, the
-measure will be put at \verb|\measuredist| units to the left or right,
-respectively, from the closest instance axis. If \emph{pos} is a
-length, the measure will be put \emph{pos} units from the closest
-instance axis. A negative \emph{pos} puts the measure to the left and
-a positive \emph{pos} puts it to the right of the instances. The
-optional parameter \emph{offset} defines the number of levels the
-measure should extend vertically. The default value for \emph{offset}
-is~1.
-
-
-\item[\cmd{measureend(*)}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{gate}\}]
-Puts a \emph{measure end} symbol at instance \emph{nm}. The starred
-version puts the triangular measure symbol outside the measure; the
-unstarred version puts the triangular measure symbol inside the
-measure. The \emph{txt} parameter defines the label of the
-measure. The \emph{gate} parameter defines the name of the gate of the
-measure end symbol. The optional \emph{pos} parameter defines the
-horizontal position of the measure relative to the
-\emph{nm} instance. Valid positions are \verb|l|~(left), \verb|r|~(right), and
-all valid lengths. If the position is \verb|l| or~\verb|r|, the
-measure will be put at \verb|\measuredist| units to the left or right,
-respectively, from the instance axis. If \emph{pos} is a length, the
-measure will be put \emph{pos} units from the instance axis. A
-negative \emph{pos} puts the measure to the left and a positive
-\emph{pos} puts it to the right of the instance.
-
-\item[\cmd{measurestart(*)}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{gate}\}]
-Puts a \emph{measure start} symbol at instance \emph{nm}.The starred
-version puts the triangular measure symbol outside the measure; the
-unstarred version puts the triangular measure symbol inside the
-measure. The \emph{txt} parameter defines the label of the
-measure. The \emph{gate} parameter defines the name of the gate of the
-measure start symbol. The optional parameter \emph{pos} defines the
-horizontal position of the measure relative to instance
-\emph{nm}. Valid positions are \verb|l|~(left), \verb|r|~(right), and
-all valid lengths. If the position is \verb|l| or~\verb|r|, the
-measure will be put at \verb|\measuredist| units to the left or right,
-respectively, from the instance axis. If \emph{pos} is a length, the
-measure will be put \emph{pos} units from the instance axis. A
-negative \emph{pos} puts the measure to the left and a positive
-\emph{pos} puts it to the right of the instance.
-
-\item[\cmd{mess(*)}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\opt{\emph{labelpos}}\{\emph{sender}\}\opt{\emph{placement}}\{\emph{receiver}\}\opt{\emph{offset}}]
-Draws a message from \emph{sender} instance to \emph{receiver}
-instance. The starred version draws a dashed line arrow, instead of a
-solid arrow. This can be used to distinguish method calls from method
-replies. The \emph{sender} and \emph{receiver} may be the same
-instance, in which case the message is a \emph{self message}. The
-parameter \emph{label} defines the message name. The message starting
-y-position is \verb|\msc at currentheight| and the ending y-position of
-the message is defined by \verb|\msc at currentheight| $+$
-$(\textit{offset}\ \times $ \verb|\levelheight|$)$. The optional
-parameter \emph{pos} defines the position of self messages with
-respect to the instance axis. Valid values are \verb+l+ (left) and
-\verb+r+ (right). The default value is \verb+l+. The optional
-parameter \emph{labelpos} defines the position of the message
-label. In case of a self message, valid values are \verb|l| and
-\verb|r|, denoting a label position left from the arrow and right from
-the arrow, respectively. For self-messages the default value of
-\verb+labelpos+ is the value of \verb+pos+. In case of a non-self
-message, valid values are \verb|t| (default) and \verb|b|, denoting a
-label position on top of the message arrow and below the message
-arrow, respectively. The optional parameter \emph{placement} defines
-the relative position of the message label along the message
-arrow. Valid values are real numbers in the closed interval $[0,1]$,
-where~$0$ corresponds to the beginning of the arrow and~$1$
-corresponds to the end of the arrow. The default value is~$0.5$. The
-default value of the optional parameter \emph{offset} is~0 for normal
-messages and~1 for self messages.
-
-\item[\cmd{messarrowscale}\{\emph{scalefactor}\}] Sets the scale
-factor (a real number) of message arrow heads. The default value
-is~1.5
-
-\item[\cmd{mscdate}] The date of the \mscpack.
-
-
-\item[\cmd{mscdockeyword}] The \MSCdoc{} keyword. The default value is `mscdoc'.
-
-\item[\cmd{mscdockeywordstyle}\{\emph{kw}\}] A one-parameter command to
-typeset the mscdoc keyword. The command can expect \verb|\mscdockeyword| to
-be the value of \emph{kw}. The default `value' is \verb|\textbf|.
-
-
-
-\item[\cmd{msckeyword}] The \MSC{} keyword. The default value is `msc'.
-
-\item[\cmd{msckeywordstyle}\{\emph{kw}\}] A one-parameter command to
-typeset the \MSC{} keyword. The command can expect \verb|\msckeyword| to
-be the value of \emph{kw}. The default `value' is \verb|\textbf|.
-
-\item[\cmd{mscmark}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{nm}\}] Puts a
-mark at instance \emph{nm}. The parameter \emph{txt} is the name of
-the mark. The optional parameter \emph{pos} defines the horizontal and
-vertical position of the mark relative to instance \emph{nm} and the
-current height \verb|\msc at currentheight|. Valid positions are
-\verb|tl|~(top-left), \verb|tr|~(top-right), \verb|bl|~(bottom-left),
-and \verb|br|~(bottom-right). The default position is \verb|tl|. The
-horizontal distance between the mark and the instance is defined by
-\verb+\markdist+.
-
-\item[\cmd{mscunit}] A string denoting the (default) unit of all
-lengths used by the \mscpack. Valid values are \emph{cm},
-\emph{em}, \emph{ex}, \emph{in}, \emph{mm}, \emph{pt}, etc. The
-default value is~\emph{cm}.
-
-\item[\cmd{setmscunit}\{\emph{unit}\}] Changes the value of
-\cmd{mscunit} into \emph{unit}. Valid values for \emph{unit} are
-\emph{cm}, \emph{em}, \emph{ex}, \emph{in}, \emph{mm}, \emph{pt}, etc.
-
-\item[\cmd{mscversion}] The version number of the \mscpack.
-
-\item[\cmd{nextlevel}\opt{\emph{offset}}] Increases the number of
-levels by the value of the optional parameter \emph{offset}. The
-default value of \emph{offset} is~1. Increasing the level number means
-that \verb|\msc at currentheight| is increased by $\textit{offset} \times
-\verb|\levelheight|$. The first time this macro is used, the actual
-increase of \verb|\msc at currentheight| is $\verb|\firstlevelheight| +
-((\textit{offset} - 1) \times \verb|\levelheight|)$. Negative values
-of \emph{offset} back up a number of levels. There are situations
-where this is useful, see Section~\ref{sec:tricks}.
-
-\item[\cmd{nogrid}] Turns off grid drawing in \MSC, \HMSC, and
-\MSCdoc{} diagrams. This command should not be used inside an \MSC,
-\HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} evironment.
-
-\item[\cmd{order}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{sender}\}\{\emph{receiver}\}\opt{\emph{offset}}]
-Draws an \emph{order line} from the \emph{sender} instance to the
-\emph{receiver} instance. The \emph{sender} and \emph{receiver} may be
-the same instance, in which case the order is a \emph{self-order}. The
-order starting y-position is \verb|\msc at currentheight| and the ending
-y-position of the order is defined by \verb|\msc at currentheight| $+$
-$(\textit{offset}\ \times $ \verb|\levelheight|$)$. In case of a
-self-order, the optional parameter \emph{pos} defines the position of
-the order relative to the \emph{sender} instance. Valid positions are
-\verb|l| (left) and \verb|r| (right). The default position is
-\verb|l|. In case of a non-self-order, the \emph{pos} parameter is
-ignored. The default value of the optional parameter \emph{offset}
-is~0 for normal orders and~1 for self orders.
-
-\item[\cmd{reference}\cmdarg{txt}\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}] Draws an
-\MSCdoc{} reference symbol. The \emph{txt} parameter defines the text to
-be placed inside the \MSCdoc{} reference symbol. The coordinates
-\coordargs{xpos}{ypos} define the position of the reference symbol.
-
-\item[\cmd{referenceend}\{\emph{nm}\}] Ends the reference expression with
-nickname \emph{nm}.
-
-\item[\cmd{referencestart}\opt{\emph{lo}}\opt{\emph{ro}}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{fi}\}\{\emph{li}\}]
-Defines a \emph{reference expression} with nickname \emph{nm}. The
-reference expression is started at \verb|\msc at currentheight| and
-continues until the level where a matching \verb|\referenceend| command
-is found. The \emph{txt} parameter defines the text of the reference
-expression. The first instance of the reference expression is
-\emph{fi}. The last instance of the reference expression is
-\emph{li}. The optional parameter \emph{lo} defines the left and right
-overlap of the reference expression. If the second optional parameter,
-\emph{ro}, is present, \emph{lo} defines the left and \emph{ro}
-defines the right overlap.
-
-\item[\cmd{regionend}\{\emph{nm}\}] Ends the current region on
-instance \emph{nm}. The region style of the instance \emph{nm} is
-reset to \emph{normal} again. Note: this command makes
-\verb|\coregionend| obsolete.
-
-\item[\cmd{regionstart}\{\emph{rstyle}\}\{\emph{nm}\}] Starts a region
-on the instance \emph{nm}. The style of the region is defined by the
-\emph{rstyle} parameter. Valid region styles are \emph{coregion},
-\emph{suspension}, \emph{activation}, and \emph{normal}. Note: this
-command makes \verb|\coregionstart| obsolete.
-
-\item[\cmd{separator}\cmdarg{ypos}] Draws a separator in an \MSCdoc{}
-diagram. The \coordarg{ypos} parameter defines the vertical position of the
-separator in the \MSCdoc{} diagram.
-
-\item[\cmd{setfootcolor}\{\emph{color}\}] Sets the color of the foot symbols of
-\MSC{} instances. Possible values are \emph{black}, \emph{white},
-\emph{gray}, or \emph{lightgray}. For more color values, see the
-documentation of the \LaTeXe{} \textsf{color} package.
-
-\item[\cmd{sethmsckeyword}\{\emph{kw}\}] Sets the \HMSC{} keyword to
-\emph{kw}. For this command to be effective, it should be used outside
-the \HMSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{sethmsckeywordstyle}\{\emph{kwstylemacro}\}] Redefines the
-\verb|\hmsckeywordstyle| macro to the macro \emph{kwstylemacro}. This
-should be a 1-argument macro, like the standard \LaTeX{}
-\cmd{textbf} and \cmd{textit} commands. For this command to be effective, it
-should be used outside the \HMSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{setmscdockeyword}\{\emph{kw}\}] Sets the \MSCdoc{} keyword to
-\emph{kw}. For this command to be effective, it should be used outside
-the \MSCdoc{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{setmscdockeywordstyle}\{\emph{kwstylemacro}\}] Redefines the
-\verb|\mscdockeywordstyle| macro to the macro \emph{kwstylemacro}. This
-should be a 1-argument macro, like the standard \LaTeX{}
-\cmd{textbf} and \cmd{textit} commands. For this command to be effective, it
-should be used outside the \MSCdoc{} environment.
-
-
-\item[\cmd{setmsckeyword}\{\emph{kw}\}] Sets the \MSC{} keyword to
-\emph{kw}. For this command to be effective, it should be used outside
-the \MSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{setmsckeywordstyle}\{\emph{kwstylemacro}\}] Redefines the
-\verb|\msckeywordstyle| macro to the macro \emph{kwstylemacro}. This
-should be a 1-argument macro, like the standard \LaTeX{}
-\cmd{textbf} and \cmd{textit} commands. For this command to be effective, it
-should be used outside the \MSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{setmscscale}\{\emph{scalefactor}\}] Sets the scale factor
-of the \MSC{} environment to \emph{scalefactor}. the scale factor is
-supposed to be a real number. Scaling is done when the \MSC{}
-environment ends (\verb|\end{msc}|). The default of \emph{scalefactor}
-is~1.
-
-
-\item[\cmd{setmscvalues}\{\emph{size}\}] Sets the msc-lengths to one
-of the predefined \emph{sizes}. Valid values for \emph{size} are:
-\verb|small|, \verb|normal|, and \verb|large|.
-
-\item[\cmd{setstoptimer}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\{\emph{nm}\}\opt{\emph{offset}}]
-Draws both a \emph{timer} and a \emph{stop timer} symbol on the
-instance \emph{nm}. The parameter \emph{label} defines the name of
-the timer. The optional parameter \emph{pos} defines the position of
-the \emph{timer} relative to the \emph{nm} instance. Valid positions
-are \verb|l| (left) and \verb|r| (right). The default position
-is~\verb|l|. The horizontal distance between the timer symbol and the
-instance axis is defined by \verb+selfmesswidth+.
-
-\item[\cmd{settimeout}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\{\emph{nm}\}\opt{\emph{offset}}]
-Draws a \emph{timer} symbol on the instance \emph{nm} and connects the
-\emph{timer} symbol and the instance with an arrow. The parameter
-\emph{label} defines the name of the \emph{timer}. The optional
-parameter \emph{pos} defines the position of the \emph{timer} relative
-to the \emph{nm} instance. Valid positions are \verb|l| (left) and
-\verb|r| (right). The default position is~\verb|l|. The optional
-parameter \emph{offset} defines the number of levels between the
-\emph{timer} symbol and the point where the arrow meets the \emph{nm}
-instance. The default \emph{offset} is~2. The horizontal distance
-between the timer symbol and the instance axis is defined by
-\verb+selfmesswidth+.
-
-\item[\cmd{settimer}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\{\emph{nm}\}]
-Draws a \emph{timer} symbol on the instance \emph{nm}. The parameter
-\emph{label} defines the name of the timer. The optional parameter
-\emph{pos} defines the position of the \emph{timer} relative to the
-\emph{nm} instance. Valid positions are \verb|l| (left) and \verb|r|
-(right). The default position is~\verb|l|. The horizontal distance
-between the timer symbol and the instance axis is defined by
-\verb+selfmesswidth+.
-
-\item[\cmd{showgrid}] Turns on grid-drawing in \MSC, \MSCdoc, and \HMSC{}
-diagrams. This is useful to determine the values of the user definable
-lengths or if normal \textsf{pstricks} commands should be included in
-the diagram. (Note that the vertical axis of the \MSC{} grid has no positive
-labels.) This command should not be used inside an \MSC,
-\HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} evironment.
-
-\item[\cmd{stop}\{\emph{nm}\}] Stops the instance with nickname
-\emph{nm}. The instance line of \emph{nm} is drawn from its y-position
-to the current y-position of the \MSC{} (\verb|\msc at curentheight|). At
-the current height, a \emph{stop} symbol is drawn.
-
-\item[\cmd{stoptimer}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\{\emph{nm}\}]
-Draws a \emph{stop timer} symbol on the instance \emph{nm}. The
-parameter \emph{label} defines the name of the timer. The optional
-parameter \emph{pos} defines the position of the \emph{timer} relative
-to the \emph{nm} instance. Valid positions are \verb|l| (left) and
-\verb|r| (right). The default position is~\verb|l|. The horizontal
-distance between the timer symbol and the instance axis is defined by
-\verb+selfmesswidth+.
-
-\item[\cmd{timeout}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\{\emph{nm}\}]
-Draws a \emph{timer} symbol on the instance \emph{nm} and connects the
-symbol and the instance with an arrow. The parameter \emph{label}
-defines the name of the timeout. The optional parameter \emph{pos}
-defines the position of the \emph{timer} symbol relative to the
-\emph{nm} instance. Valid positions are \verb|l| (left) and \verb|r|
-(right). The default position is~\verb|l|. The horizontal distance
-between the timer symbol and the instance axis is defined by
-\verb+selfmesswidth+.
-
-\end{defs}
-
-
-\section{User definable lengths}
-
-This section lists the user-definable lengths of the \mscpack. For
-each length, the default values for large, normal, and small diagrams
-are given. The appearance of \MSC, \HMSC, and \MSCdoc{} diagrams can be
-changed by adjusting these lengths. Use the normal \cmd{setlength}
-command to change these lengths.
-
-\begin{defs}
-
-\item[\cmd{actionheight}]
-Height of action symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{actionwidth}]
-Width of action symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.25}{1.25}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{bottomfootdist}]
-Distance between bottom of foot symbol and frame.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.7}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{commentdist}]
-Distance between a comment and its instance.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.5}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{conditionheight}]
-Height of condition symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{conditionoverlap}]
-Overlap of condition symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.5}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{envinstdist}]
-Distance between environments and nearest instance line.\\
-(\lnsvalue{2.5}{2.0}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{firstlevelheight}] Height of level just below head
-symbols. Should not be changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscconditionheight}]
-Height of \HMSC{} condition symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.375}{0.3}{0.25} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscconditionwidth}]
-Width of \HMSC{} condition symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.8}{0.7} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscconnectionradius}]
-Radius of \HMSC{} connection symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.06}{0.05}{0.04} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscreferenceheight}]
-Height of \HMSC{} reference symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.8}{0.7}{0.6} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscreferencewidth}]
-Width of \HMSC{} reference symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.6}{1.4}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscstartsymbolwidth}]
-Width of \HMSC{} start symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.85}{0.7}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{inlineoverlap}]
-Overlap of inline symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.0}{0.75} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instbarwidth}]
-Default width of vertical instance bars (applies to fat instances only).\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.0}{0.0}{0.0} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instdist}]
-Distance between instance axes.\\
-(\lnsvalue{3.0}{2.2}{1.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instfootheight}] Height of foot symbols. Should not be
-changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.25}{0.2}{0.15} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instheadheight}] Height of head symbols. Should not be
-changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.55}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instwidth}]
-Width of header and foot symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.75}{1.6}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{labeldist}]
-Distance between labels and the symbols to which they belong (for instance, message labels and arrows).\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} ex.)
-
-\item[\cmd{lastlevelheight}] Height of level just above foot
-symbols. Should not be changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.4}{0.3} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{leftnamedist}] Distance between left of the frame and
-(left of) \MSC, \HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} title.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.3}{0.2}{0.1} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{levelheight}]
-Height of a level.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.5}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{lostsymbolradius}]
-Radius of the lost and found symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.15}{0.12}{0.08} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{markdist}]
-Horizontal distance from a mark to its instance.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{measuredist}]
-Horizontal distance from a measure to its (closest) instance.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{measuresymbolwidth}]
-Width of a measure symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{mscdocreferenceheight}]
-Height of reference symbol in an \MSCdoc.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.8}{0.7}{0.6} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{mscdocreferencewidth}]
-Width of reference symbol in an \MSCdoc.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.6}{1.4}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{referenceoverlap}]
-Overlap of reference symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.0}{0.75} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{regionbarwidth}]
-Width of region bars.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.4}{0.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{selfmesswidth}] Length of horizontal arms of self-messages,
-self-orders, lost messages and found messages as well as horizontal
-distance between instance axis and timer symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{stopwidth}]
-Width of the stop symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.5}{0.3} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{timerwidth}]
-Width of the \emph{timer} symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.4}{0.3}{0.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{topheaddist}]
-Distance between top of head symbols and frame.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.3}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{topnamedist}] Distance between top of the frame and
-(top of) \MSC, \HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} title.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.3}{0.2}{0.2} cm.)
-
-\end{defs}
-
-
-\section{lnternal lengths}
-
-The \mscpack{} uses some scratch lengths to perform
-calculations. Below, these scratch lengths are listed.
-
-\begin{defs}
-\item[\cmd{msc at commentdist}] Internal length to compute distance
-between comments and instances. (This length should be removed in the
-future.)
-
-\item[\cmd{msc at currentheight}]
-The current height of the current \MSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{msc at currentwidth}]
-The current width of the current \MSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{msc at totalheight}]
-The final height of the current \MSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{msc at totalwidth}]
-The final width of the current \MSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp at X}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp at Xa}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp at Xb}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp at Xc}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp at Xd}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp at Y}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp at Ya}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp at Yb}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp at Yc}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp at Yd}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\end{defs}
-
-\section{Internal boxes}
-
-\begin{defs}
-
-\item[\cmd{mscbox}]
-The box that contains the current \MSC{} just before it is put on paper.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp at box}]
-Scratch box for intermediate computations
-\end{defs}
-
-
-\section{Internal counters}
-
-\begin{defs}
-\item[\cmd{mscinstcnt}] The \MSC{} instance counter. This counter is
-increased each time an instance is created.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmpcnt}] Scratch counter for intermediate computations.
-
-\end{defs}
-
-\section{Limitations}
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-
-\item The frames in an MSC do not automatically scale with the text
-inside the frame. However, the size of the frames can be set manually.
-
-\item Start and end points of messages are computed at the current
-level. This can give ill-looking effects if the width of the bar of an
-instance changes after the message is drawn, e.g., if an activation
-region starts or ends after the message is drawn.
-
-\item Messages that cause the start of a region should be drawn after
-the \verb|\regionstart| command, but in the same level.
-
-\item Messages that denote the end of a region should be
-drawn before the \verb|\regionend| command.
-
-\item Activation regions make crossing messages partly invisible. A
-solution for this problem is to first draw the instance foot symbols
-at the right level (using \verb|\inststop{i}|), then back up the total
-number of levels of the MSC (using \verb|\nextlevel[-n]|), and then
-drawing the messages.
-
-
-\item Documents using the \mscpack{} cannot be compiled with
-\emph{pdflatex}. The reason for this is that \textsf{pstricks} is not
-supported by \emph{pdflatex}.
-
-\item The source code of the \mscpack{} is only marginally
-documented. Therefore, changes/improvements by others are unlikely.
-
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\section{Tricks}
-\label{sec:tricks}
-
-In this section we describe some tricks to use the \mscpack{}
-efficiently.
-
-\paragraph{Multi-line text arguments}
-Many graphical objects in \MSC{} diagrams have text labels. In general,
-the commands to draw these objects put the text arguments on one
-line. If the text should consist of multiple lines, the \LaTeX{}
-\cmd{parbox} command can be used. For instance, to generate a message
-with a two-line label, write:
-
-\verb|\mess{\parbox{1cm}{two\\lines}}{s}{r}|
-
-
-\paragraph{Specifying lengths}
-The \mscpack{} imports the \textsf{calc} package in order to have a
-more natural syntax for arithmetical expressions. Consequently, if a
-command expects a \LaTeX{} length argument, it is possible to use the
-expression syntax offered by \textsf{calc}.
-
-For example, consider the \MSC{} of
-Figure~\ref{fig:specifying:lengths}. To make sure the comment for
-instance~$j$ appears 1ex to the right of the \MSC{} frame, the value
-of the optional \emph{pos} parameter of the \cmd{comment} command
-should be
-\[ \cmd{instdist} + \cmd{envinstdist} + 1\textrm{ex}. \]
-
-To express this in normal \LaTeX, one should write something like
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newlength{\l}
-\setlength{\l}{\instdist}
-\addtolength{\l}{\envinstdist}
-\addtolength{\l}{1ex}
-\msccomment[\l]{Comment for $j$}{j}
-\end{verbatim}
-inside the \MSC{} code. However, using \textsf{calc}'s expression
-syntax, it is also possible to write
-\begin{verbatim}
-
-\msccomment[\instdist + \envinstdist + 1ex]{Comment for $j$}{j}
-\end{verbatim}
-The complete code for the diagram of
-Figure~\ref{fig:specifying:lengths} is given below. Since the
-\textsf{calc} package is included in the standard \LaTeX{}
-distribution, there should be no compatibility problems.
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\begin{center}
-\begin{msc}{Specifying lengths}
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\declinst{k}{$k$}{}
-
-\nextlevel
-\msccomment[\instdist + \envinstdist + 1ex]{Comment for $j$}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-
-\caption{Specifying lengths}
-\label{fig:specifying:lengths}
-\end{center}
-\end{figure}
-
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{Specifying lengths}
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\declinst{k}{$k$}{}
-
-\nextlevel
-\msccomment[\instdist + \envinstdist + 1ex]{Comment for $j$}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-
-\paragraph{Level backup}
-It is possible to back-up several levels: just use a negative value in
-the \cmd{nextlevel} command. This \emph{feature} can be useful to draw
-messages over regions instead of regions over messages. Compare the
-diagrams of Figure~\ref{fig:level:backup}. The code for these diagrams
-is given below.
-
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\begin{center}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\begin{tabular}{cc}
-\begin{msc}{Invisible message label}
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\declinst{k}{$k$}{}
-
-\regionstart{activation}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{Message a}{i}[0.25]{k}[2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\regionend{j}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-
-&
-
-\begin{msc}{Level backup makes it visible}
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\declinst{k}{$k$}{}
-
-\regionstart{activation}{j}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\regionend{j}
-\nextlevel[-2]% backing up
-\mess{Message a}{i}[0.25]{k}[2]
-\nextlevel[2]% fast forward
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-\end{tabular}
-
-\caption{Level back-up}
-\label{fig:level:backup}
-\end{center}
-
-\end{figure}
-
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{Invisible message label}
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\declinst{k}{$k$}{}
-
-\regionstart{activation}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{Message a}{i}[0.25]{k}[2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\regionend{j}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-
-
-\begin{msc}{Level backup makes it visible}
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\declinst{k}{$k$}{}
-
-\regionstart{activation}{j}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\regionend{j}
-\nextlevel[-2]% backing up
-\mess{Message a}{i}[0.25]{k}[2]
-\nextlevel[2]% fast forward
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-
-\bibliographystyle{plain}
-\bibliography{biblio}
-
-\end{document}
-
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/msc/msc.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/msc/msc.sty 2022-05-13 21:35:58 UTC (rev 63290)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/msc/msc.sty 2022-05-13 21:37:05 UTC (rev 63291)
@@ -1,8 +1,7 @@
%% MSC Macro Package
%% msc.sty
-%% June 2, 2008
%%
-%% Copyright 2008 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, and S. Mauw
+%% Copyright 2022 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, P. Kordy, and S. Mauw
%
% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
@@ -13,2544 +12,2769 @@
% version 2005/12/01 or later.
%
% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is T. van Deursen.
%
-% This program consists of the files
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is P. Kordy
+%
+% This program consists of the files
% msc.sty
% manual.tex
-% manual.pdf
-% refman.tex
-% refman.pdf
+% manual_macros.tex
% biblio.bib
-% maintenance.tex
-% maintenance.pdf
% README
% COPYRIGHT
-%
% Contact address:
-% Ton van Deursen
-% Universit\'e du Luxembourg
-% Facult\'e des Sciences, de la Technologie et de la Communication
-% 6, rue Richard Coudenhove-Kalergi
-% L-1359 Luxembourg
-% Email: ton.vandeursen at uni.lu
-% Updates via: http://satoss.uni.lu/mscpackage/
-%
+% Reynaldo Gil Pons
+% Université du Luxembourg
+% Maison du Nombre
+% 6 Av. de la Fonte
+% L-4364 Esch-sur-Alzette
+% Email: reynaldo.gilpons at uni.lu
+% Website: http://satoss.uni.lu/mscpackage/
-\def\mscdate{2008/06/02}% update this whenever this file changes
-\def\mscversion{1.16}% update this whenever a new version is ready
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+\def\mscdate{2022/05/13}% update this whenever this file changes
+\def\mscversion{2.00}% update this whenever a new version is ready
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{msc}[\mscdate, v\mscversion]
\typeout{msc version \mscversion. (\mscdate)}
-\RequirePackage{color,pstricks,calc,ifthen}
-%
-% mscunit: the unit of msc lengths
-\def\mscunit{cm}%
-\def\setmscunit#1{\gdef\mscunit{#1}}
-%
-%
-%
-% msc lengths
-% First the customizable lengths:
+\RequirePackage{tikz,xstring,calc}
+\usetikzlibrary{
+ positioning,
+ fit,
+ calc,
+ arrows,
+ decorations.markings,
+ shapes.misc,
+ shapes.geometric,
+ shapes.symbols
+}
+\pgfdeclarelayer{background} %background for drawing grid
+\pgfsetlayers{background,main}
-\newlength{\actionheight}% height of action symbols
-\newlength{\actionwidth}% width of action symbol
-\newlength{\bottomfootdist}% distance between bottom of foot symbol and frame
-\newlength{\msccommentdist}% distance of comment to its instance
-\newlength{\conditionheight}% height of condition symbols
-\newlength{\conditionoverlap}% overlap of condition symbol
-\newlength{\envinstdist}% distance between environments and nearest instance line
-\newlength{\firstlevelheight}% height of level just below head symbols
-\newlength{\hmscconditionheight}% height of hmsc condition symbol
-\newlength{\hmscconditionwidth}% width of hmsc condition symbol
-\newlength{\hmscconnectionradius}% radius of hmsc connection symbols
-\newlength{\hmscreferenceheight}% height of hmsc reference symbol
-\newlength{\hmscreferencewidth}% width of hmsc reference symbol
-\newlength{\hmscstartsymbolwidth}% width of hmsc start symbol
-\newlength{\inlineoverlap}% overlap of inline symbol
-\newlength{\instbarwidth}% default width of vertical instance bars
-\newlength{\instdist}% distance between (vertical) instance lines
-\newlength{\instfootheight}% height of foot symbols
-\newlength{\instheadheight}% height of head symbols
-\newlength{\instwidth}% width of header and foot symbols
-\newlength{\labeldist}% distance between labels and message lines or head symbol boxes
-\newlength{\lastlevelheight}% height of level just above foot symbols
-\newlength{\leftnamedist}% distance between left of frame and (top of) msc title
-\newlength{\levelheight}% height of a level
-\newlength{\lostsymbolradius}% radius of the lost and found symbols
-\newlength{\markdist}% distance between mark and its instance
-\newlength{\measuredist}% user definable length for horizontal measure distance
-\newlength{\measuresymbolwidth}% width of measure symbols
-\newlength{\mscdocreferenceheight}% minimal height of mscdoc reference
-\newlength{\mscdocreferencewidth}% minimal width of mscdoc reference
-\newlength{\referenceoverlap}% overlap of reference symbol
-\newlength{\regionbarwidth}% width of region bars
-\newlength{\selfmesswidth}% length of horizontal arms of self messages
-\newlength{\stopwidth}% width of the stop symbol
-\newlength{\timerwidth}% width of the timer symbols
-\newlength{\topheaddist}% distance between top of head symbols and frame
-\newlength{\topnamedist}% distance between top of frame and (top of) msc title
-%
-% Now the internal lengths
-\newlength{\tmp at X}
-\newlength{\tmp at Y}
-\newlength{\tmp at Xa}
-\newlength{\tmp at Ya}
-\newlength{\tmp at Xb}
-\newlength{\tmp at Yb}
-\newlength{\tmp at Xc}
-\newlength{\tmp at Yc}
-\newlength{\tmp at Xd}
-\newlength{\tmp at Yd}
-\newlength{\msc at currentheight}
-\newlength{\msc at currentwidth}
-\newlength{\msc at totalwidth}
-\newlength{\msc at totalheight}
-\newlength{\msc at commentdist}% distance of comment to its instance
-%
-%
-\newcommand{\msc at incrcounter}[1]{\addtocounter{#1}{1}}%
-%
-% internal box
-\newsavebox{\tmp at box}
-%
-% some internal offsets
-\def\msc at leveloffset{0}%
-\def\mscscalefactor{1}%
-\newcommand{\setmscscale}[1]{\def\mscscalefactor{#1}}%
-%
-% Command to change the footer color (legal values are black, gray,
-% lightgray, and white)
-\def\setfootcolor#1{\def\msc at footcolor{#1}}
-%
-% And some internal counters
-\newcounter{mscinstcnt}
-\newcounter{tmpcnt}
-%
-% \messlabelpos defines the position of message labels.
-% The default value is "l" (left) other value(s) are "r" (right)
-\def\timerpos{l}
-%
-% \msc at timerpos is the internal variant of \timerpos
-% This internal variant is used by the actual drawing commands for self messages
-\def\msc at timerpos{l}
-%
-% \msc at settimerpos sets the internal \mes at timerpos
-\def\msc at settimerpos#1{
- \ifthenelse{\not\(\equal{#1}{l} \or \equal{#1}{r}\)}{%
- \msc at unknowntimerposerr{#1}}{% else
- \def\msc at timerpos{#1}%
- }%
+% {string}{target1}{target2}{code for match}{code for no match}
+\newcommand*{\msc at StrEqEither}[5]{
+ \IfEqCase{#1}{{#2}{#4}{#3}{#4}}[#5]
}
-%
-% \dummyinst{#1} (\dummyinst*{#1}) declares a dummy msc-instance and does not
-% draws its head symbol nor its instance axis until an instance create/start is
-% encountered. The starred version declares a fat instance.
-% #1: nickname that can be used in \mess -like commands
-%
-\def\dummyinst{\@ifstar{\msc at dummyinststar}{\msc at dummyinstnostar}}
-\def\msc at dummyinstnostar#1{%
- \msc at makedummyinst{\the\instbarwidth}{#1}%
+\newcommand*{\msc at caseFiveEither}[8]{
+ \IfEqCase{#1}{{#2}{#7}{#3}{#7}{#4}{#7}{#5}{#7}{#6}{#7}}[#8]
}
-\def\msc at dummyinststar#1{%
- \msc at makedummyinst{\the\instwidth}{#1}%
+%\newlength{\msc at textheight}
+%\newlength{\msc at textdepth}
+%\newlength{\msc at textwidth}
+\newsavebox{\msc at box}
+\newcommand{\msc at savebox}[1]{
+ \savebox{\msc at box}{\pgfinterruptpicture#1\endpgfinterruptpicture}
}
-\def\msc at makedummyinst#1#2{%
- \@ifundefined{mscinst#2}{%
- \ifthenelse{\value{mscinstcnt}=2}{% Aha: this is the first msc instance, so, add the
- \addtolength{\msc at currentwidth}{\envinstdist}% left \envinstdist to \msc at currentwidth
- }{%not the first instance , so add the instdist to the \mec at currentwidth
- \addtolength{\msc at currentwidth}{\instdist}%
- }% and update x-pos of right environment
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at currentwidth+\envinstdist}%
- \msc at setinstxpos{envright}{\the\tmp at X}%
- % make an instance with empty inside name and empty above name:
- \msc at declinst{#2}{\relax}{\relax}{#1}%
- % make y-pos undefined, to make sure that no instance line will be drawn
- \msc at setinstypos{#2}{undefined}% --added sm
- }{% else: nickname #2 already defined!
- \msc at nicknamedefinederr{#2}%
- }%
-}
%
-% \declinst[*] declares a new msc-instance and draws its head symbol
-% the starred versions makes a fat instance.
-% #1: nickname that can be used in \mess
-% #2: name of the instance (above instance head symbol)
-% #3: name of the instance (inside instance head symbol)
-%
-%
-\def\declinst{\@ifstar{\msc at declinststar}{\msc at declinstnostar}}
-%
-% Some commands are defined as well (INSTNR is the arabic
-% representation of the instance number):
-% \instabname#1: `above name' of instance with nickname #1
-% \instinname#1: `inside name' of instance with nickname #1
-% \instnicknameINSTNR: returns the nickname of instance INSTNR
-% \instxposINSTNR: returns the x-position of instance with nickname #1
-% \instyposINSTNR: returns the last y-position of instance with nickname #1
-% \instlinestyle#1: the line style (dashed or solid) of instance with nickname #1
-\def\msc at declinstnostar#1#2#3{% user command to declare instances
- \msc at dummyinstnostar{#1}%
- %\inststart{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- % define above name and inside name
- \expandafter\def\csname instabname#1\endcsname{#2}% `above name'
- \expandafter\def\csname instinname#1\endcsname{#3}% `inside name'
- % draw the instance header symbol
- \msc at drawinstanceheadsymbol{#1}{\the\topheaddist}%
- % redefine the instance's y position
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight}%
- \msc at setinstypos{#1}{\the\tmp at Y}%
+%% \tracingmacros=2 \tracingcommands=2 %used for debugging
+% "msc" is a family
+\pgfkeys{/msc/.is family}
+% set up a search path:
+\pgfkeys{/msc/.search also={/tikz}}
+% \pgfkeys{/msc/message/.search also={/msc}}
+\newif\ifmsc at isstar
+\newif\ifmsc at ismessreplay
+\def\mscset{\pgfqkeys{/msc}}
+\def\mscget#1{\pgfkeysvalueof{/msc/#1}}
+% * Arrow *
+\pgfarrowsdeclare{mscarrow}{mscarrow}
+{
+ \pgfmathparse{\pgfgetarrowoptions{mscarrow}}%
+ \ifpgfmathunitsdeclared%
+ \pgfmathparse{\pgfmathresult pt}%
+ \else%
+ \pgfmathparse{\pgfmathresult*\pgflinewidth}%
+ \fi%
+ \let\thickness=\pgfmathresult
+% \edef\msc at thickness=\pgfmathresult
+ \pgfutil at tempdima=0.28pt%
+ \pgfutil at tempdimb=\pgfmathresult pt
+ \ifdim\pgfinnerlinewidth>0pt%
+ \pgfmathsetlength\pgfutil at tempdimb{.6\pgfutil at tempdimb-.4*\pgfinnerlinewidth}%
+ \fi%
+ \advance\pgfutil at tempdima by.3\pgfutil at tempdimb%
+ \pgfarrowsleftextend{-3\pgfutil at tempdima}
+ \pgfarrowsrightextend{+5\pgfutil at tempdima}
}
-%
-\def\msc at declinststar#1#2#3{% user command to declare instances
- \msc at dummyinststar{#1}%
- % define above name and inside name
- \expandafter\def\csname instabname#1\endcsname{#2}% `above name'
- \expandafter\def\csname instinname#1\endcsname{#3}% `inside name'
- % draw the instance header symbol
- \msc at drawinstanceheadsymbol{#1}{\the\topheaddist}%
- % redefine the instance's y position
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight}%
- \msc at setinstypos{#1}{\the\tmp at Y}%
+{
+ \pgfmathparse{\pgfgetarrowoptions{mscarrow}}%
+ \ifpgfmathunitsdeclared%
+ \pgfmathparse{\pgfmathresult pt}%
+ \else%
+ \pgfmathparse{\pgfmathresult*\pgflinewidth}%
+ \fi%
+ \let\thickness=\pgfmathresult
+ \pgfsetlinewidth{\thickness pt}
+ \pgfutil at tempdima=0.28pt%
+ \pgfutil at tempdimb=\pgflinewidth%
+ \ifdim\pgfinnerlinewidth>0pt%
+ \pgfmathsetlength\pgfutil at tempdimb{.6\pgflinewidth-.4*\pgfinnerlinewidth}%
+ \fi%
+ \advance\pgfutil at tempdima by.3\pgfutil at tempdimb%
+ \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfqpoint{5\pgfutil at tempdima}{0pt}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{-3\pgfutil at tempdima}{4\pgfutil at tempdima}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpointorigin}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{-3\pgfutil at tempdima}{-4\pgfutil at tempdima}}
+ \pgfusepathqfill
}
-%
-% \msc at declinst: internal command to declare instances.
-% Some commands are defined as well (INSTNR is the arabic
-% representation of the instance number):
-% \instabnameINSTNR: returns the instance above name of #1
-% \instnicknameINSTNR: returns the nickname of instance #1
-% \instxposINSTNR: returns the x-position of instance with nickname #1
-% \instyposINSTNR: returns the last y-position of instance with nickname #1
-% \instlinestyle#1: the line style (dashed or solid) of instance with nickname #1
-% \instregionstyle#1: the region style (normal, coregion, suspension, or activation)
-\def\msc at declinst#1#2#3#4{% internal command to declare instances
- \@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \@namedef{mscinst#1}{\relax}%
- \expandafter\def\csname instabname#1\endcsname{#2}% `above name'
- \expandafter\def\csname instinname#1\endcsname{#3}% `inside name'
- \expandafter\def\csname instbarwidth#1\endcsname{#4}% width of the vertical instance bar
- % the x position of an instance, \instxpos#1, is stored as a string, not as
- % a TeX-length, since that would use up too much of TeX limited number of
- % length-registers.
- % However, this means we first have to calculate the x-pos, and then
- % assign the string representation of the result to \instxpos#1:
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at currentwidth}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname instxpos#1\endcsname{\the\tmp at X}%
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\instbarwidth < #4}}%
- {%
- \expandafter\def\csname instisfat#1\endcsname{true}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{#4}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{-.5\tmp at Xa}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname instlxpos#1\endcsname{\the\tmp at X}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xa}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname instrxpos#1\endcsname{\the\tmp at X}%
- }%
- {%
- \expandafter\def\csname instisfat#1\endcsname{false}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname instlxpos#1\endcsname{\the\tmp at X}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname instrxpos#1\endcsname{\the\tmp at X}%
- }%
- \expandafter\def\csname instnickname\arabic{mscinstcnt}\endcsname{#1}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname instypos#1\endcsname{\the\tmp at Y}%
- \expandafter\def\csname instlinestyle#1\endcsname{solid}%
- \expandafter\def\csname instfootcolor#1\endcsname{\msc at footcolor}%
- \expandafter\def\csname instregionstyle#1\endcsname{normal}%
- \msc at incrcounter{mscinstcnt}%
- }{% else, #1 already defined
- \msc at nicknamedefinederr{#1}%
- }%
+\newlength{\actionheight} % height of action symbols
+\newlength{\actionwidth} % width of action symbol
+\newlength{\bottomfootdist} % distance between bottom of foot symbol and frame
+\newlength{\msccommentdist} % distance of comment to its instance
+\newlength{\conditionheight} % height of condition symbols
+\newlength{\conditionoverlap} % overlap of condition symbol
+\newlength{\envinstdist} % distance between environments and nearest instance line
+\newlength{\firstlevelheight} % height of level just below head symbols
+\newlength{\gatesymbolradius} % radius of the gate symbol
+\newlength{\hmscconditionheight} % height of hmsc condition symbol
+\newlength{\hmscconditionwidth} % width of hmsc condition symbol
+\newlength{\hmscconnectionradius} % radius of hmsc connection symbols
+\newlength{\hmscreferenceheight} % % height of hmsc and mscdoc reference symbol
+\newlength{\hmscreferencewidth} % width of hmsc and mscdoc reference symbol
+\newlength{\hmscstartsymbolwidth} % width of hmsc start/end symbol
+\newlength{\inlineoverlap} % overlap of inline symbol
+\newlength{\instbarwidth} % default width of vertical instance bars
+\newlength{\instdist} % distance between (vertical) instance lines
+\newlength{\instfootheight} % height of foot symbols
+\newlength{\instheadheight} % height of head symbols
+\newlength{\instwidth} % width of header and foot symbols
+\newlength{\labeldist} % distance between labels and message lines or head symbol boxes
+\newlength{\lastlevelheight} % height of level just above foot symbols
+\newlength{\leftnamedist} % distance between left of frame and (top of) msc title
+\newlength{\levelheight} % height of a level
+\newlength{\lostsymbolradius} % radius of the lost and found symbols
+\newlength{\markdist} % distance between mark and its instance
+\newlength{\measuredist} % user definable length for horizontal measure distance
+\newlength{\measuresymbolwidth} % width of measure symbols
+\newlength{\mscdocreferenceheight} % minimal height of mscdoc reference
+\newlength{\mscdocreferencewidth} % minimal width of mscdoc reference
+\newlength{\referenceoverlap} % overlap of reference symbol
+\newlength{\regionbarwidth} % the width of the coregion start and end symbol
+\newlength{\selfmesswidth} % length of horizontal arms of self messages
+\newlength{\stopwidth} % width of the stop symbol
+\newlength{\timerwidth} % width of the timer symbols
+\newlength{\topheaddist} % distance between top of head symbols and frame
+\newlength{\topnamedist} % distance between top of frame and (top of) msc title
+\mscset{%
+ %mscdoc keys
+ /msc/mscdoc margin/.code={
+ \mscset{
+ north mscdoc margin/.initial=#1,
+ south mscdoc margin/.initial=#1,
+ east mscdoc margin/.initial=#1,
+ west mscdoc margin/.initial=#1
+ }
+ },
+ top mscdoc margin/.style={north mscdoc margin=#1},
+ bottom mscdoc margin/.style={south mscdoc margin=#1},
+ left mscdoc margin/.style={west mscdoc margin=#1},
+ right mscdoc margin/.style={east mscdoc margin=#1},
+ /msc/mscdoc margin=0.5cm,
+ /msc/mscdoc keyword/.initial=mscdoc,
+ %hmsc keys
+ /msc/hmsc keyword/.initial=hmsc,
+ /msc/hmsc margin/.code={
+ \mscset{
+ north hmsc margin/.initial=#1,
+ south hmsc margin/.initial=#1,
+ east hmsc margin/.initial=#1,
+ west hmsc margin/.initial=#1
+ }
+ },
+ top hmsc margin/.style={north hmsc margin=#1},
+ bottom hmsc margin/.style={south hmsc margin=#1},
+ left hmsc margin/.style={west hmsc margin=#1},
+ right hmsc margin/.style={east hmsc margin=#1},
+ /msc/hmsc margin=0.5cm,
+ %msc keys
+ /msc/msc keyword/.initial=msc,
+ /msc/inline overlap/.code={
+ \mscset{
+ right inline overlap/.initial=#1,
+ left inline overlap/.initial=#1
+ }
+ },
+ environment distance/.code={
+ \mscset{
+ right environment distance/.initial=#1,
+ left environment distance/.initial=#1
+ }
+ }, % distance between environments and the % first level
+ /msc/reference overlap/.code={
+ \mscset{
+ right reference overlap/.initial=#1,
+ left reference overlap/.initial=#1
+ }
+ },
+ /msc/message options/.is family, %options for message
+ /msc/action options/.is family, %options for action and naction
+ /msc/msccomment options/.is family, %options for message comments
+% Default value keys
+ /msc/line width/.initial=0.7pt,
+ side/.initial=left, %side on which to draw self message
+ position/.initial=above, %how to draw mscmark - possible %values:above mid below
+ /msc/side/.belongs to family=/msc/message options,
+ /msc/side/.belongs to family=/msc/msccomment options,
+ /msc/msccomment distance/.belongs to family=/msc/msccomment options,
+ /msc/offset/.belongs to family=/msc/msccomment options,
+ /msc/offset/.belongs to family=/msc/message options,
+ /msc/timer width/.belongs to family=/msc/msccomment options,
+ /msc/self message width/.belongs to family=/msc/msccomment options,
+ /msc/label distance/.belongs to family=/msc/msccomment options,
+ /msc/label position/.initial=above, %position of label in self message
+ /msc/label position/.belongs to family=/msc/message options,
+ /msc/level shift/.initial=0, %level shift in message
+ /msc/offset/.initial=2, %level shift in timers/self message etc
+ /msc/dummy text/.initial={ }, %text used for determining the size of dummy node
+ /msc/level shift/.belongs to family=/msc/message options,
+ /msc/pos/.initial=0.5, %placement of label in message
+ /msc/pos/.belongs to family=/msc/message options,
+ level offset/.initial=1, %level shift in nextlevel
+ level offset/.default=1,
+ /tikz/font=\small,
+ /msc/draw frame/.initial=, %color of the frame - if "none" we do not draw - "empty" uses last color usually black
+ /msc/draw frame/.default=,
+ /msc/draw head/.initial=, %color of the instance head
+ /msc/draw head/.default=,
+ /msc/draw foot/.initial=, %color of the instance foot
+ /msc/draw foot/.default=,
+ /msc/draw grid/.initial=none, %style to draw help lines - if empty we do
+ %not draw, other possible values are "none", "grid" or "color grid"
+ /msc/draw grid/.default=grid,
+ /msc/draw color grid/.style={draw grid=color grid},
+% the lengths
+ fat/.initial=normal,
+ fat/.default=fat,
+ %sizes
+ /tikz/font=\normalsize, % use normal size of font
+ action height/.initial=\the\actionheight, % height of action symbols
+ action height/.code={\setlength{\actionheight}{#1}},
+ action width/.initial=\the\actionwidth, % width of action symbol
+ action width/.code={\setlength{\actionwidth}{#1}},
+ foot distance/.initial=\the\bottomfootdist, % distance between bottom of foot symbol and frame
+ foot distance/.code={\setlength{\bottomfootdist}{#1}},
+ msccomment distance/.initial=\the\msccommentdist, % distance of comment to its instance
+ msccomment distance/.code={\setlength{\msccommentdist}{#1}}, % distance of comment to its instance
+ condition height/.initial=\the\conditionheight, % height of condition symbols
+ condition height/.code={\setlength{\conditionheight}{#1}}, % height of condition symbols
+ condition overlap/.initial=\the\conditionoverlap, % overlap of condition symbol
+ condition overlap/.code={\setlength{\conditionoverlap}{#1}}, % overlap of condition symbol
+ first level height/.initial=\the\firstlevelheight, % height of level just below head symbols
+ first level height/.code={\setlength{\firstlevelheight}{#1}},
+ gate symbol radius/.initial=\the\gatesymbolradius, % radius of the gate symbol
+ gate symbol radius/.code={\setlength{\gatesymbolradius}{#1}},
+ hmsc condition height/.initial=\the\hmscconditionheight, % height of hmsc condition symbol
+ hmsc condition height/.code={\setlength{\hmscconditionheight}{#1}},
+ hmsc condition width/.initial=\the\hmscconditionwidth, % width of hmsc condition symbol
+ hmsc condition width/.code={\setlength{\hmscconditionwidth}{#1}},
+ hmsc connection radius/.initial=\the\hmscconnectionradius, % radius of hmsc connection symbols
+ hmsc connection radius/.code={\setlength{\hmscconnectionradius}{#1}},
+ reference height/.initial=\the\hmscreferenceheight, % height of hmsc and mscdoc reference symbol
+ reference height/.code={\setlength{\hmscreferenceheight}{#1}},
+ reference width/.initial=\the\hmscreferencewidth, % width of hmsc and mscdoc reference symbol
+ reference width/.code={\setlength{\hmscreferencewidth}{#1}}, % width of hmsc and mscdoc reference symbol
+ hmsc symbol width/.initial=\the\hmscstartsymbolwidth, % width of hmsc start/end symbol
+ hmsc symbol width/.code={\setlength{\hmscstartsymbolwidth}{#1}}, % width of hmsc start/end symbol
+ instance distance/.initial=\the\instdist, % distance between (vertical) instance lines
+ instance distance/.code={\setlength{\instdist}{#1}},
+ foot height/.initial=\the\instfootheight, % height of foot symbols
+ foot height/.code={\setlength{\instfootheight}{#1}},
+ head height/.initial=\the\instheadheight, % height of head symbols
+ head height/.code={\setlength{\instheadheight}{#1}},
+ instance width/.initial=\the\instwidth, % width of header and foot symbols
+ instance width/.code={\setlength{\instwidth}{#1}},
+ label distance/.initial=\the\labeldist, % distance between labels and message lines or head symbol boxes
+ label distance/.code={\setlength{\labeldist}{#1}},
+ last level height/.initial=\the\lastlevelheight, % height of level just above foot symbols
+ last level height/.code={\setlength{\lastlevelheight}{#1}},
+ title distance/.initial=\the\leftnamedist, % distance between left of frame and (top of) msc title
+ title distance/.code={\setlength{\leftnamedist}{#1}},
+ level height/.initial=\the\levelheight, % height of a level
+ level height/.code={\setlength{\levelheight}{#1}},
+ lost symbol radius/.initial=\the\lostsymbolradius, % radius of the lost and found symbols
+ lost symbol radius/.code={\setlength{\lostsymbolradius}{#1}},
+ mark distance/.initial=\the\markdist, % distance between mark and its instance
+ mark distance/.code={\setlength{\markdist}{#1}},
+ measure distance/.initial=\the\measuredist, % user definable length for horizontal measure distance
+ measure distance/.code={\setlength{\measuredist}{#1}},
+ measure symbol width/.initial=\the\measuresymbolwidth, % width of measure symbols
+ measure symbol width/.code={\setlength{\measuresymbolwidth}{#1}},
+% reference overlap/.initial=\the\referenceoverlap, % overlap of reference symbol
+% reference overlap/.code={\setlength{\referenceoverlap}{#1}},
+ region width/.initial=\the\regionbarwidth, % the width of the coregion start and end symbol
+ region width/.code={\setlength{\regionbarwidth}{#1}},
+% region width/.initial=0.4cm, % the width of the activation, suspension and coregion rectangle
+ self message width/.initial=\the\selfmesswidth, % length of horizontal arms of self messages
+ self message width/.code={\setlength{\selfmesswidth}{#1}},
+ stop width/.initial=\the\stopwidth, % width of the stop symbol
+ stop width/.code={\setlength{\stopwidth}{#1}},
+ timer width/.initial=\the\timerwidth, % width of the timer symbols
+ timer width/.code={\setlength{\timerwidth}{#1}},
+ head top distance/.initial=\the\topheaddist, % distance between top of head symbols and frame
+ head top distance/.code={\setlength{\topheaddist}{#1}},
+ title top distance/.initial=\the\topnamedist, % distance between top of frame and (top of) msc title
+ title top distance/.code={\setlength{\topnamedist}{#1}},
+ instance end/.initial=stop, % type of ending for the instance foot (foot or stop) - changed to follow ITU-T Z.120
+ title position/.initial=left, % justification of the title: left, right or center
+ arrow scale/.initial=1.5, % scale for the
+ % arrows
+ msc scale/.initial=1, % sets the scale factor
+ msc scale/.code={ % that scales everynthing including text but one must be
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{msc at tikzstarted}{\relax}{ % careful with rotation transformations
+ \mscset{
+ /tikz/scale=#1,
+ /tikz/every node/.style={scale=#1}}
+ }
+ \mscset{msc scale/.initial=#1}
+ },
+%Styles
+ every instance head/.style={}, % style applied to all instance heads
+ every instance foot/.style={}, % style applied to all instance feet
+ every instance line/.style={}, % style applied to all instance lines
+ every message/.style={}, % style applied to all message arrows
+ every msccomment/.style={}, % style applied to all msccomments
+ every mscmark/.style={}, % style applied to all mscmarks
+ every action/.style={}, % style applied to all actions and nactions
+ every action node/.style={}, % style applied to all actions and nactions nodes
+ every region/.style={}, % style applied to all regions
+ every coregion/.style={}, % style applied to all coregions
+ every suspension/.style={}, % style applied to all suspension regions
+ every activation/.style={}, % style applied to all activation regions
+ every timer/.style={}, % style applied to simple timers
+ every measure/.style={}, % style applied to all measures
+ every lostfound/.style={}, % style applied to all lost and found messages
+ every condition/.style={}, % style applied to all conditions
+ every order/.style={}, % style applied to all orders
+ every reference/.style={}, % style applied to all references
+ every inline/.style={}, % style applied to all inline expressions
+ large values/.style={%
+ /tikz/font=\normalsize,
+ /tikz/line width=0.8pt,
+ /msc/line width=0.8pt,
+ action height=0.75cm,
+ /msc/action height/.belongs to family=/msc/action options,
+ action width=1.25cm,
+ /msc/action width/.belongs to family=/msc/action options,
+ foot distance=1cm,
+ msccomment distance=1.5cm,
+ condition height=0.75cm,
+ condition overlap=0.6cm,
+ environment distance=2.5cm,
+ first level height=0.75cm,
+ gate symbol radius=0.5mm,
+ hmsc condition height=0.8cm,
+ hmsc condition width=1.6cm,
+ hmsc connection radius=0.06cm,
+ reference height=0.8cm,
+ reference width=1.6cm,
+ hmsc symbol width=0.85cm,
+ inline overlap=1.5cm,
+ instance distance=1.25cm,
+ foot height=0.25cm,
+ head height=0.6cm,
+ instance width=1.75cm,
+ label distance=1ex,
+ last level height=0.5cm,
+ title distance=0.3cm,
+ level height=0.75cm,
+ lost symbol radius=0.15cm,
+ mark distance=1cm,
+ measure distance=0.75cm,
+ measure symbol width=0.25cm,
+ reference overlap=1.5cm,
+ region width=0.5cm,
+ self message width=0.75cm,
+ stop width=0.6cm,
+ timer width=0.4cm,
+ head top distance=1.5cm,
+ title top distance=0.3cm,
+ arrow scale=2
+ },
+ normal values/.style={%
+% /tikz/font=\small,%
+ /tikz/line width=0.7pt,
+ /msc/line width=0.7pt,
+ action height=0.6cm,
+ action width=1.25cm,
+ foot distance=0.7cm,
+ msccomment distance=1.1cm,
+ condition height=0.6cm,
+ condition overlap=0.5cm,
+ environment distance=2cm,
+ first level height=0.6cm,
+ gate symbol radius=0.5mm,
+ hmsc condition height=0.7cm,
+ hmsc condition width=1.4cm,
+ hmsc connection radius=0.05cm,
+ reference height=0.7cm,
+ reference width=1.4cm,
+ hmsc symbol width=0.7cm,
+ inline overlap=1cm,
+ instance distance=0.6cm,
+ foot height=0.2cm,
+ head height=0.55cm,
+ instance width=1.6cm,
+ label distance=1ex,
+ last level height=0.4cm,
+ title distance=0.2cm,
+ level height=0.5cm,
+ lost symbol radius=0.12cm,
+ mark distance=1cm,
+ measure distance=0.6cm,
+ measure symbol width=0.2cm,
+ reference overlap=1cm,
+ region width=0.4cm,
+ self message width=0.6cm,
+ stop width=0.5cm,
+ timer width=0.3cm,
+ head top distance=1.3cm,
+ title top distance=0.2cm,
+ arrow scale=1.5
+ },
+ small values/.style={%
+ /tikz/font=\small,%
+ /tikz/line width=0.6pt,
+ /msc/line width=0.6pt,
+ action height=0.5cm,
+ action width=1.2cm,
+ foot distance=0.5cm,
+ msccomment distance=0.75cm,
+ condition height=0.5cm,
+ condition overlap=0.4cm,
+ environment distance=1.2cm,
+ first level height=0.4cm,
+ gate symbol radius=0.5mm,
+ hmsc condition height=0.6cm,
+ hmsc condition width=1.2cm,
+ hmsc connection radius=0.04cm,
+ reference height=0.6cm,
+ reference width=1.2cm,
+ hmsc symbol width=0.4cm,
+ inline overlap=0.75cm,
+ instance distance=0.3cm,
+ foot height=0.15cm,
+ head height=0.5cm,
+ instance width=1.2cm,
+ label distance=0.8ex,
+ last level height=0.3cm,
+ title distance=0.1cm,
+ level height=0.4cm,
+ lost symbol radius=0.08cm,
+ mark distance=0.4cm,
+ measure distance=0.4cm,
+ measure symbol width=0.15cm,
+ reference overlap=0.75cm,
+ region width=0.2cm,
+ self message width=0.4cm,
+ stop width=0.3cm,
+ timer width=0.2cm,
+ head top distance=1.2cm,
+ title top distance=0.1cm,
+ arrow scale=1.2
+ },
+ /msc/start symbol/.style={draw,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},
+ inner sep=0,
+ isosceles triangle,isosceles triangle apex angle=60,
+ shape border rotate=-90,minimum width=\mscget{hmsc symbol width}},
+ /msc/end symbol/.style={start symbol,shape border rotate=90},
+%style to %draw hmsc condition
+ /msc/condition/.style={draw,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},
+ minimum width=\mscget{hmsc condition width},
+ minimum height=\mscget{hmsc condition height},
+ inner sep=0pt,
+ signal pointer angle=120,
+ signal to=east and west,
+ signal},
+ /msc/connection/.style={draw,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},
+ minimum width=2*(\mscget{hmsc connection radius}) + \mscget{line width},
+ circle
+ },
+ /msc/reference/.style={draw,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},
+ minimum width=\mscget{reference width},
+ minimum height=\mscget{reference height},
+ inner sep=2pt,
+ rounded corners=0.125cm,
+ rectangle,
+ },
+ mscdash/.style={%
+ dash pattern=on 4pt off 4pt
+ },
+ suspension dash/.style={%
+ dash pattern=on 7pt off 7pt,
+ dash phase=3.5pt
+ },
+ settimer style/.style={%
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, draw,
+ to path={-- ++(60:#1) -- ++(-#1,0) -- ++(-60:2*#1) -- ++(-#1,0) -- ++(60:#1) -- (\tikztotarget)}
+ },
+ timeout style/.style={%
+ settimer style={#1}, arrow style
+ },
+ stoptimer style/.style={%
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, draw,
+ to path={ ++(0.5*#1,0.5*#1) -- ++(-#1,-#1) ++(0,#1) -- ++(#1,-#1) ++(-0.5*#1,0.5*#1) -- (\tikztotarget)}
+ },
+ set mscarrow thickness/.code={
+ \pgfsetarrowoptions{mscarrow}{#1}},
+ arrow style/.default=\mscget{arrow scale}*\mscget{line width},
+ arrow style/.style={set mscarrow thickness=#1,
+ shorten >=\mscget{line width}/2,
+ -mscarrow
+ },
+ instance head/.style={%
+ rectangle,
+ text height=1.5ex,%
+ inner sep=2pt,
+% text width=\mscget{instance width}, text centered,%uncomment to get old behaviour
+% transform shape,
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},
+ minimum height=\mscget{head height},%
+ minimum width=\mscget{instance width},%
+ label={[text height=1.5ex,text depth=0ex,
+ inner sep=0pt, /tikz/label distance=\mscget{label
+ distance}-\mscget{line width}-0.1ex]above:#1}%
+ },
+ replay/.style={%
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},
+ line cap=butt,
+ mscdash
+ },
+ msccomment/.style={%
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},
+ line cap=round,
+ },
+ msccomment line/.style={%
+ mscdash
+ },
+ message/.style={%
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},
+ arrow style,
+ line cap=round,
+ },
+ %action/.style={%
+ %/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},
+ %line cap=round,
+ %},
+ instance line/.style={%
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},
+ draw,%orange
+% line cap=round
+ },
+ message loop/.default=\mscget{self message width},
+ message loop/.style={%
+ to path={-- ++(#1,0) coordinate (msc at somepoint) -- (msc at somepoint |-
+ \tikztotarget) \tikztonodes -- (\tikztotarget)}
+ },
+ order loop/.default=\mscget{self message width},
+ order loop/.style={%
+ set mscarrow thickness=\mscget{arrow scale}*\mscget{line width},
+ decoration={markings, mark=at position \mscget{pos} with {\arrow{mscarrow}}},
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},postaction={decorate},
+ line cap=round,
+ mscdash,
+ to path={-- ++(#1,0) coordinate (msc at somepoint) -- (msc at somepoint |-
+ \tikztotarget) \tikztonodes -- (\tikztotarget)}
+ },
+ order/.style={%
+ set mscarrow thickness=\mscget{arrow scale}*\mscget{line width},
+ decoration={markings, mark=at position \mscget{pos} with {\arrow{mscarrow}}},
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},postaction={decorate},
+ line cap=round,
+ mscdash,
+ },
+ settimeout style/.default={\mscget{self message width}}{\mscget{timer width}},
+ settimeout style/.style 2 args={/msc,
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, draw, arrow style,
+ to path={-- ++(#1,0) coordinate (msc at somepoint) -- ++(60:#2) --
+ ++(-#2,0)--++(-60:2*#2) coordinate (msc at somepoin) -- ++(-#2,0) --(msc at somepoint)
+ ($ (msc at somepoint)!0.866*#2!(\tikztotarget-|msc at somepoint) $) --
+ (\tikztotarget-|msc at somepoint) -> (\tikztotarget)
+ }
+ },
+ setstoptimer style/.default={\mscget{self message width}}{\mscget{timer width}},
+ setstoptimer style/.style 2 args={/msc,
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, draw,
+ to path={-- ++(#1,0) coordinate (msc at somepoint) -- ++(60:#2) --
+ ++(-#2,0)--++(-60:2*#2) coordinate (msc at somepoin) -- ++(-#2,0) --(msc at somepoint)
+ ($ (msc at somepoint)!0.866*#2!(\tikztotarget-|msc at somepoint) $) --
+ (\tikztotarget-|msc at somepoint) ++(0.5*#2,0.5*#2) -- ++(-#2,-#2)
+ ++(0,#2) -- ++(#2,-#2) ++(-0.5*#2,0.5*#2) --
+ (\tikztotarget)
+ }},
+ measure style/.default={\mscget{measure distance}}{\mscget{measure symbol width}},
+ measure style/.style 2 args={%
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, mscdash,
+ to path={-- ++(#1,0) coordinate (a)
+ ($ (a)!0.866*#2!(\tikztotarget-|a)$) -- ($(\tikztotarget-|a) !0.866*#2!(a) $)
+ (a|-\tikztotarget) \tikztonodes coordinate (b) -- (\tikztotarget)
+ \pgfextra{ \path[draw,/msc/mscdash,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}];}
+ (a)--($ (a)!#2!30:(\tikztotarget-|a)$) coordinate (a1)--($ (a1)!#2!60:(a)$) --cycle(a)
+ (b)--($ (b)!#2!30:(a)$) coordinate (b1)--($ (b1)!#2!60:(b)$) --cycle(b)
+ \pgfextra{ \path[draw,solid,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}];}
+ (\tikztotarget)
+ }},
+ measure* style/.default={\mscget{measure distance}}{\mscget{measure symbol width}},
+ measure* style/.style 2 args={%
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, mscdash,
+ to path={
+ -- ++(#1,0) coordinate (a)-- (\tikztotarget-|a) coordinate (b)\tikztonodes
+ -- (\tikztotarget)
+ \pgfextra{ \path[draw,/msc/mscdash,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}];}
+ (a)--($ (a)!#2!210:(b)$) coordinate (a1)--($ (a1)!#2!60:(a)$) --cycle(a)
+ (b)--($ (b)!#2!210:(a)$) coordinate (b1)--($ (b1)!#2!60:(b)$) --cycle(b)
+ \pgfextra{ \path[draw,solid,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}];}
+ (\tikztotarget)
+ }},
+ measurestart style/.default={\mscget{measure distance}}{\mscget{measure symbol width}},
+ measurestart style/.style 2 args={%
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, mscdash,
+ to path={
+ -- ++(#1,0) coordinate (a)
+ ($ (a)!0.866*#2!(\tikztotarget-|a)$)-- ($(\tikztotarget-|a)! 0.5*#2!(a) $) \tikztonodes
+ (\tikztotarget -| a) coordinate (b)
+ \pgfextra{ \path[draw,/msc/mscdash,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}];}
+ (a)--($ (a)!#2!30:(\tikztotarget-|a)$) coordinate (a1)--($ (a1)!#2!60:(a)$) --cycle(a)
+ (b) circle (0.5*#2)
+ \pgfextra{ \path[draw,solid,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}];}
+ (\tikztotarget)
+ }},
+ measurestart* style/.default={\mscget{measure distance}}{\mscget{measure symbol width}},
+ measurestart* style/.style 2 args={%
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, mscdash,
+ to path={
+ -- ++(#1,0) coordinate (a) -- ($(\tikztotarget-|a)! 0.5*#2!(a) $) \tikztonodes
+ (\tikztotarget -| a) coordinate (b)
+ \pgfextra{ \path[draw,/msc/mscdash,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}];}
+ (a)--($ (a)!#2!210:(b)$) coordinate (a1)--($ (a1)!#2!60:(a)$) --cycle(a)
+ (b) circle (0.5*#2)
+ \pgfextra{ \path[draw,solid,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}];}
+ (\tikztotarget)
+ }},
+ found style/.default={2*\mscget{lost symbol radius}},
+ found style/.style={%
+ /msc, /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},arrow style,
+ to path={
+ (\tikztotarget) circle (0.5*#1)
+ \pgfextra{ \path[draw,solid,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}];}
+ ($ (\tikztotarget)! 0.5*#1 !(\tikztostart) $) -> (\tikztostart)
+ \tikztonodes
+ }},
+ lost style/.default={2*\mscget{lost symbol radius}},
+ lost style/.style={%
+ /msc, /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},arrow style,
+ to path={
+ (\tikztotarget) circle (0.5*#1)
+ \pgfextra{ \path[draw,solid,fill,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}];}
+ (\tikztostart) -> ($ (\tikztotarget)! 0.50*#1 !(\tikztostart) $)
+ \tikztonodes
+ }},
}
-%
-% \msc at instnickname gets the nickname of msc instance with number #1
-% (This macro is used in \msc at drawinstancelevels)
-\def\msc at instnickname#1{%
- \csname instnickname\arabic{#1}\endcsname%
+\mscset{normal values}
+%special treatments of keys that can be specified as right or left but could not
+%be in the old verison of msc
+\setlength{\envinstdist}{\mscget{left environment distance}}
+\setlength{\inlineoverlap}{\mscget{left inline overlap}}
+\setlength{\referenceoverlap}{\mscget{left reference overlap}}
+\mscset{
+ left environment distance/.initial=\the\envinstdist, % distance between environments and the % first level
+ right environment distance/.initial=\the\envinstdist, % distance between
+ left inline overlap/.initial=\the\inlineoverlap,
+ right inline overlap/.initial=\the\inlineoverlap,
+ left reference overlap/.initial=\the\referenceoverlap,
+ right reference overlap/.initial=\the\referenceoverlap
}
-% \msc at instabname gets the above name of instance #1
-\def\msc at instabname#1{%
- \csname instabname#1\endcsname%
+\def\msc at save@target#1{%
+ \def\msc at target{#1}}
+\def\msc at save@start#1{%
+ \def\msc at start{#1}}
+%defining styles to draw grid with help lines - usage e.g. \draw (0,-10) to[/msc/color grid] (10,0);
+\mscset{
+ /msc/grid/.style={
+ to path={%
+ \pgfextra{%
+ \edef\msc@@target{(\tikztotarget)}%
+ \tikz at scan@one at point\msc at save@target\msc@@target\relax
+ \edef\msc@@start{(\tikztostart)}%
+ \tikz at scan@one at point\msc at save@start\msc@@start\relax
+ \draw[/msc/grid/minor lines] (\tikztostart) grid (\tikztotarget);
+ \draw[/msc/grid/major lines,line cap=rect] (\tikztostart) grid (\tikztotarget);
+ \msc at start
+ \pgfmathsetmacro{\msc at xa}{\the\pgf at x/1cm}
+ \pgfmathsetmacro{\msc at ya}{\the\pgf at y/1cm}
+ \msc at target
+ \pgfmathsetmacro{\msc at xb}{\the\pgf at x/1cm}
+ \pgfmathsetmacro{\msc at yb}{\the\pgf at y/1cm}
+ \pgfmathsetmacro{\msc at xc}{\msc at xa + \mscget{grid/major step}}
+ \pgfmathsetmacro{\msc at yc}{\msc at ya + \mscget{grid/major step}}
+ \foreach \x in {\msc at xa,\msc at xc,...,\msc at xb}
+ \node[/msc/grid/x labelstyle] at (\x,\msc at ya) {\pgfmathprintnumber{\x}};
+ \foreach \y in {\msc at ya,\msc at yc,...,\msc at yb}
+ \node[/msc/grid/y labelstyle] at (\msc at xa,\y) {\pgfmathprintnumber{\y}};
+ }
+ }
+ },
+ /msc/color grid/.style={
+ /msc/grid/labelstyle/.style={font=\tiny,text=blue},
+ /msc/grid/minor line width=0.2pt,
+ /msc/grid/major line width=0.4pt,
+ /msc/grid/minor lines/.style={
+ draw=green!10,line cap=rect,
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{grid/minor line width},
+ step=\mscget{grid/minor step}
+ },
+ /msc/grid/major lines/.style={
+ draw=red!10,line cap=rect,
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{grid/major line width},
+ step=\mscget{grid/major step}
+ },
+ /msc/grid
+ },
+ /msc/grid/.cd,
+ minor lines/.style={
+ help lines,line cap=rect,dotted,
+ step=\mscget{grid/minor step}
+ },
+ major lines/.style={
+ help lines,line cap=rect,
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{grid/major line width},
+ step=\mscget{grid/major step}
+ },
+ labelstyle/.style={font=\scriptsize,text=black},
+ x labelstyle/.style={/msc/grid/labelstyle,below},
+ y labelstyle/.style={/msc/grid/labelstyle,left},
+ minor step/.initial=.2,
+ major step/.initial=1,
+ minor line width/.initial=0.3pt,
+ major line width/.initial=0.5pt,
}
-% \msc at instinname gets the inside name of instance #1
-\def\msc at instinname#1{%
- \csname instinname#1\endcsname%
+% And some internal counters
+\newcount\c at mscinstcnt %number of intstances
+\newcount\c at condition %number of conditions
+\newcount\c at msclevelcnt %current level
+% \newcount\c at maxlevelcnt %maximum level seen
+%\advance\c at mscinstcnt by1
+\global\let\msc at tempa\relax
+\global\let\msc at tempb\relax
+%\newdimen\msc at x
+%\newdimen\msc at y
+
+\newcommand{\mscgetx}[2]{%
+ \tikz at scan@one at point\pgfutil at firstofone#1\relax
+ \edef#2{\the\pgf at x}%
}
-%
-% \msc at instxpos gets the x position (i.e., horizontal position) of the
-% msc instance with nickname #1.
-\def\msc at instxpos#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \expandafter\csname instxpos#1\endcsname}%
+
+\newcommand{\mscgety}[2]{%
+ \tikz at scan@one at point\pgfutil at firstofone#1\relax
+ \edef#2{\the\pgf at y}%
}
+
+% store the shifted level in #2 and level at which to draw message in #3
+% also update \c at maxlevelcnt
+% #1 - level difference
+\def\msc at getlevel shift#1#2#3{
+ \pgfkeys{/pgf/number format/precision=0}
+ \pgfmathparse{\the\c at msclevelcnt + #1}
+ \pgfmathparse{max(\pgfmathresult,0)}
+ \pgfmathroundto{\pgfmathresult}
+ \edef#2{\pgfmathresult} %calculate destination level
+ \pgfmathparse{max((\the\c at msclevelcnt),#2)}
+ \pgfmathroundto{\pgfmathresult}
+ \xdef#3{\pgfmathresult} %calculate at which level to draw message
+ \pgfmathparse{max(#3,\c at maxlevelcnt)}
+ \pgfmathroundto{\pgfmathresult}
+ \xdef\c at maxlevelcnt{\pgfmathresult} %update global max level counter
+}
+
%
+% * Shapes *
%
-\def\msc at instlxpos#1{
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \expandafter\csname instlxpos#1\endcsname}%
-}
%
-\def\msc at instrxpos#1{
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \expandafter\csname instrxpos#1\endcsname}%
-}
+%% A rectangle with right side open
%
-% \msc at setinstxpos sets the (l/r) x position of instance with nickname #1 to
-% the string #2
-\def\msc at setinstxpos#1#2{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \expandafter\edef\csname instxpos#1\endcsname{#2}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname instlxpos#1\endcsname{#2}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname instrxpos#1\endcsname{#2}%
- }%
+\pgfdeclareshape{right open rectangle}
+{%
+ \nodeparts{text}
+ %%
+ %% Anchors
+ %%
+ \inheritsavedanchors[from=rectangle]
+ \inheritanchorborder[from=rectangle]
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{north}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{north west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{north east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{center}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{mid}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{mid west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{mid east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{base}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{base west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{base east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{south}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{south west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{south east}
+ \backgroundpath{
+ % store lower right in xa/ya and upper right in xb/yb
+ \southwest \pgf at xa=\pgf at x \pgf at ya=\pgf at y
+ \northeast \pgf at xb=\pgf at x \pgf at yb=\pgf at y
+ \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xb}{\pgf at yb}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xa}{\pgf at yb}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xa}{\pgf at ya}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xb}{\pgf at ya}}
+ \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xb}{\pgf at yb}}
+ \pgfpathclose
+ }
}
%
-\def\msc at setinstlxpos#1#2{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \expandafter\edef\csname instlxpos#1\endcsname{#2}%
- }%
-}
+%% A rectangle with left side open
%
-\def\msc at setinstrxpos#1#2{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \expandafter\edef\csname instrxpos#1\endcsname{#2}%
- }%
+\pgfdeclareshape{left open rectangle}
+{%
+ \nodeparts{text}
+ %%
+ %% Anchors
+ %%
+ \inheritsavedanchors[from=rectangle]
+ \inheritanchorborder[from=rectangle]
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{north}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{north west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{north east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{center}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{mid}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{mid west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{mid east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{base}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{base west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{base east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{south}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{south west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{south east}
+ \backgroundpath{
+ % store lower right in xa/ya and upper right in xb/yb
+ \southwest \pgf at xa=\pgf at x \pgf at ya=\pgf at y
+ \northeast \pgf at xb=\pgf at x \pgf at yb=\pgf at y
+ \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xa}{\pgf at ya}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xb}{\pgf at ya}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xb}{\pgf at yb}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xa}{\pgf at yb}}
+ \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xa}{\pgf at ya}}
+ \pgfpathclose
+ }
}
%
-% \msc at instypos gets the last y position (i.e., vertical position) of the
-% msc instance with nickname #1.
-\def\msc at instypos#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname instypos#1\endcsname}%
-}
+%% A rectangle with sloped sides
%
-% \msc at setinstypos sets the last y position of instance with nickname #1 to
-% the string #2
-\def\msc at setinstypos#1#2{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \expandafter\edef\csname instypos#1\endcsname{#2}%
- }%
+\pgfdeclareshape{condition shape}
+{%
+ \nodeparts{text}
+ %%
+ %% Anchors
+ %%
+ \inheritsavedanchors[from=rectangle]
+ \inheritanchorborder[from=rectangle]
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{north}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{north west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{north east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{center}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{mid}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{mid west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{mid east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{base}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{base west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{base east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{south}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{south west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{south east}
+ \backgroundpath{
+ % store lower right in xa/ya and upper right in xb/yb
+ % store lower right in xa/ya and upper right in xb/yb
+ \southwest \pgf at xa=\pgf at x \pgf at ya=\pgf at y
+ \northeast \pgf at xb=\pgf at x \pgf at yb=\pgf at y
+ \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xb}{\pgf at yb}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xa}{\pgf at yb}}
+ \pgfmathparse{\pgf at xa-(\pgf at yb-\pgf at ya)*0.5}
+ \pgf at xc=\pgfmathresult pt\relax
+ \pgfmathparse{\pgf at yb*0.5+\pgf at ya*0.5}
+ \pgf at yc=\pgfmathresult pt\relax
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xc}{\pgf at yc}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xa}{\pgf at ya}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xb}{\pgf at ya}}
+ \pgfmathparse{\pgf at xb+(\pgf at yb-\pgf at ya)*0.5}
+ \pgf at xc=\pgfmathresult pt\relax
+ \pgfmathparse{\pgf at yb*0.5+\pgf at ya*0.5}
+ \pgf at yc=\pgfmathresult pt\relax
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xc}{\pgf at yc}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xb}{\pgf at yb}}
+ \pgfpathclose
+ }
}
+%% A rectangle with sloped sides and strike out
%
-% Change \instlinestyle command of msc instance with nickname #1 into #2
-% #2 should be one of: solid, dashed, or dotted
-\def\msc at setinstlinestyle#1#2{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \ifthenelse{\not\(\equal{#2}{solid} \or
- \equal{#2}{dashed} \or
- \equal{#2}{dotted}\)}{% unknown linestyle
- \msc at unknownlinestyleerr{#2}}{%
- \expandafter\def\csname instlinestyle#1\endcsname{#2}%
- }%
- }%
+\pgfdeclareshape{ncondition shape}
+{%
+ \nodeparts{text}
+ %%
+ %% Anchors
+ %%
+ \inheritsavedanchors[from=rectangle]
+ \inheritanchorborder[from=rectangle]
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{north}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{north west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{north east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{center}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{mid}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{mid west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{mid east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{base}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{base west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{base east}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{south}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{south west}
+ \inheritanchor[from=rectangle]{south east}
+ \backgroundpath{
+ % store lower right in xa/ya and upper right in xb/yb
+ % store lower right in xa/ya and upper right in xb/yb
+ \southwest \pgf at xa=\pgf at x \pgf at ya=\pgf at y
+ \northeast \pgf at xb=\pgf at x \pgf at yb=\pgf at y
+ \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xb}{\pgf at yb}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xa}{\pgf at yb}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xb}{\pgf at ya}}
+ \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xa}{\pgf at ya}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xb}{\pgf at yb}}
+ \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xa}{\pgf at yb}}
+ \pgfmathparse{\pgf at xa-(\pgf at yb-\pgf at ya)*0.5}
+ \pgf at xc=\pgfmathresult pt\relax
+ \pgfmathparse{\pgf at yb*0.5+\pgf at ya*0.5}
+ \pgf at yc=\pgfmathresult pt\relax
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xc}{\pgf at yc}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xa}{\pgf at ya}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xb}{\pgf at ya}}
+ \pgfmathparse{\pgf at xb+(\pgf at yb-\pgf at ya)*0.5}
+ \pgf at xc=\pgfmathresult pt\relax
+ \pgfmathparse{\pgf at yb*0.5+\pgf at ya*0.5}
+ \pgf at yc=\pgfmathresult pt\relax
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xc}{\pgf at yc}}
+ \pgfpathlineto{\pgfqpoint{\pgf at xb}{\pgf at yb}}
+ \pgfpathclose
+ }
}
-%
-% \msc at instlinestyle returns the linestyle of instance with nickname #1
-\def\msc at instlinestyle#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname instlinestyle#1\endcsname}%
+
+
+% \declinst[*] declares a new msc-instance and draws its head symbol
+% the starred versions makes a fat instance.
+% #1: msc/tikz options
+% #2: nickname that can be used in \mess
+% #3: name of the instance (above instance head symbol)
+% #4: name of the instance (inside instance head symbol)
+% Keys used:
+% /msc/instance/nick - contains number for instance with nick
+% /msc/instanceno/n - contains nick for instance with n, where n is a number
+%\declinst(*){nickname}{instancenameabove}{instancenamewithin}
+\def\declinst{\pgfutil at ifnextchar*{\msc at isstartrue\msc at declinst@nostar}{\msc at isstarfalse\msc at declinst@nostar*}}
+\def\msc at declinst@nostar*{\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at declinst@noopt{\msc at declinst@noopt[]}}
+\def\msc at declinst@noopt[#1]#2#3#4{%
+ \msc at nameinstance{#2}{#1}
+ \msc at previousinstance{#2}
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \node[/msc,draw=\mscget{draw head},
+ instance head={#3}, name={msc at node#2},
+ right=\mscget{instance distance} of msc at node\msc at inst@name.south east,
+% inner sep=2pt,
+ anchor=south west, every instance head,#1]{#4};
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \advance\c at msclevelcnt by -1\relax
+ \msc at createlevelnodes{#2}{0}
+ \coordinate (msc at lastlevel#2) at (msc at node#2.south);
+ \advance\c at msclevelcnt by 1\relax
+ \msc at drawinstanceline{#2}{1}
}
-%
-% Change the foot color for instance with nickname #1 into #2
-\def\msc at setinstfootcolor#1#2{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \expandafter\def\csname instfootcolor#1\endcsname{#2}%
- }%
+% \dummyinst(*)[options]{createdinst}
+\def\dummyinst{\pgfutil at ifnextchar*{\msc at isstartrue\msc at dummyinst@nostar}{\msc at isstarfalse\msc at dummyinst@nostar*}}
+\def\msc at dummyinst@nostar*{\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at dummyinst@noopt{\msc at dummyinst@noopt[]}}
+\def\msc at dummyinst@noopt[#1]#2{%
+ \msc at nameinstance{#2}{#1}
+ \mscset{
+ instance/#2/status/.initial=off
+ }
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \msc at previousinstance{#2}
+ \pgfmathparse{max(\mscget{instance width}, width(\mscget{dummy text})
+ +\pgfkeysvalueof{/pgf/inner xsep}*2+\mscget{line width}/2)}
+ \edef\msc at x{\pgfmathresult pt}
+ \node[/msc, name={msc at node#2},
+ inner sep=2pt,
+ right=\mscget{instance distance} of msc at node\msc at inst@name.south east,
+ minimum width=\msc at x,
+ minimum height=\mscget{head height},
+ anchor=south west, #1]{};
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \advance\c at msclevelcnt by -1\relax
+ \msc at createlevelnodes{#2}{0}
+ \coordinate (msc at lastlevel#2) at (msc at node#2.south);
+ \advance\c at msclevelcnt by 1\relax
}
-%
-% \msc at instfootcolor returns the color of the footer of instance with nicknam #1
-\def\msc at instfootcolor#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname instfootcolor#1\endcsname}%
+
+\def\inststart{\startinst}%old name of the command
+%dd siple command \startinst[options]{instname}{text above}{text inside}
+\def\startinst{\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at startinst{\msc at startinst[]}}
+\def\msc at startinst[#1]{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \edef\msc at option{#1}\edef\msc at name{}\edef\msc at creator{}
+ \pgfkeysactivatefamily{/msc/message options}
+ \pgfkeysfiltered{/msc,#1}
+ \msc at create
}
-%
-% Change \instregionstyle command of msc instance with nickname #1 into #2
-% #2 should be one of: normal, coregion, suspension, or activation
-\def\msc at setinstregionstyle#1#2{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \ifthenelse{\not\(\equal{#2}{normal} \or
- \equal{#2}{coregion} \or
- \equal{#2}{suspension} \or
- \equal{#2}{activation}\)}
- {% unknown region style
- \msc at unknownregionstyleerr{#2}
- }{%
- \expandafter\def\csname instregionstyle#1\endcsname{#2}%
- }%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#2}{suspension} \or \equal{#2}{activation}}
- {%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instisfat{#1}}{true}}
- {\relax}
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instxpos{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\regionbarwidth}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{-.5\tmp at Xa}%
- \msc at setinstlxpos{#1}{\the\tmp at X}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xa}%
- \msc at setinstrxpos{#1}{\the\tmp at X}%
- }
- }{% new region style is normal or coregion
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instisfat{#1}}{true}}%
- {\relax}%
- {\msc at setinstbarwidth{#1}{\instbarwidth}%
- \msc at setinstlxpos{#1}{\msc at instxpos{#1}}%
- \msc at setinstrxpos{#1}{\msc at instxpos{#1}}%
- }%
- }%
- }%
+% \create[options]{name}[label position]{creator}[pos]{createdinst}{instancenameabove}{instancenamewithin}
+\def\create{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at option{}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at create@opt{\msc at create@opt[]}
}
-%
-% \msc at instregionstyle returns the region style of instance with nickname #1
-\def\msc at instregionstyle#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname instregionstyle#1\endcsname}%
+\def\msc at create@opt[#1]#2{
+ \pgfkeysactivatefamily{/msc/message options}
+ \pgfkeysfiltered{/msc,#1}
+ \edef\msc at option{#1}
+ \def\msc at name{#2}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at create@label{\msc at create@label[]}
}
-%
-% \msc at instbarwidth returns the width of the bar of instance with nickname #1
-\def\msc at instbarwidth#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname instbarwidth#1\endcsname}%
+\def\msc at create@label[#1]#2{
+ \ifx#1t \mscset{label position=above}
+ \else \ifx#1b \mscset{label position=below}
+ \fi\fi
+ \edef\msc at creator{#2}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at create{\msc at create@pos[\mscget{pos}]}
}
-%
-% \msc at setinstbarwidth sets the width of the bar of instance with nickname #1
-% to the string #2
-\def\msc at setinstbarwidth#1#2{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \expandafter\edef\csname instbarwidth#1\endcsname{#2}%
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\instbarwidth < #2}}%
- {\expandafter\def\csname instisfat#1\endcsname{true}}%
- {\expandafter\def\csname instisfat#1\endcsname{false}}%
- }%
+\def\msc at create@pos[#1]{
+ \mscset{pos/.expanded=#1}
+ \msc at create
}
-%
-%\msc at isfateinst returns one of the strings `true' of `false', indicating if
-% the instance with nickname #1 is a fat instance.
-\def\msc at instisfat#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname instisfat#1\endcsname}%
+%\create{insance name}{label above}{label inside}
+\def\msc at create#1#2#3{
+% \mscset{pos/.expanded=#1}
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/#1/no}{
+ \IfStrEq{off}{\mscget{instance/#1/status}}{
+ \IfStrEq{fat}{\mscget{instance/#1/type}}{
+ \edef\msc at tempa{(msc at node#1.east)++(-\mscget{line width}/2,0) coordinate (msc at node#1 at r0)
+ coordinate (msc at node#1 at r\the\c at msclevelcnt)
+ (msc at node#1.west)++(\mscget{line width}/2,0) coordinate (msc at node#1 at l0)
+ coordinate (msc at node#1 at l\the\c at msclevelcnt)}
+ }{%
+ \edef\msc at tempa{(msc at node#1.east)++(-\mscget{line width}/2,0)
+ coordinate (msc at node#1 at r\the\c at msclevelcnt)
+ (msc at node#1.west)++(\mscget{line width}/2,0)
+ coordinate (msc at node#1 at l\the\c at msclevelcnt)}
+ }
+ \edef\msc at tempb{
+ [/msc, draw=\mscget{draw head}, instance head={#2}, name={msc at node#1}, every
+ instance head,
+ append after command={(msc at node#1.south) coordinate (msc at lastlevel#1)
+ \msc at tempa},
+ \msc at option] at (msc at node#1|-msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt){\unexpanded\expandafter{#3}};
+ }
+ \adddraw{#1}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}{\expandafter\node\msc at tempb}
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at creator/no}{
+ \edef\msc at tempb{[\msc at option]{\unexpanded\expandafter{\msc at name}}{\msc at creator}{#1}}
+ \expandafter\mess\msc at tempb
+ }{}
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \mscset{instance/#1/status=on}
+ }{
+ \msc at instancestarted{#1}\end{pgfscope}
+ }
+% \mscset{instance/#1/type=fat}
+ }{\msc at instundefinederr{#1}\end{pgfscope}}
}
-%
-%
-% \changeinstbarwidth changes the instance width of instance with nickname #1 to
-% the length #2
-\def\changeinstbarwidth#1#2{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}%
- {% else, #1 is defined
- \msc at drawinstanceline{#1}%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instxpos{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \msc at setinstypos{#1}{\the\tmp at Y}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{#2}%
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tmp at Xb > \instbarwidth}}%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{0.5\tmp at Xb}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at X}}%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at X}}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{true}{\msc at instisfat{#1}}}
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instbarwidth{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{0.5\tmp at Xa}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Xa}{\tmp at X}%
- }{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\tmp at X}%
- }%
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Y)%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{#2}%
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tmp at Xb > \instbarwidth}}%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{-0.5\tmp at Xb}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at X}}%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at X}}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{true}{\msc at instisfat{#1}}}
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instbarwidth{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{-0.5\tmp at Xa}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Xa}{\tmp at X}%
- }{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\tmp at X}%
- }%
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Y)%
- \msc at setinstbarwidth{#1}{#2}%
- }%
-}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% DUMMY INSTANCES (start and stop)
-%
-% Start a dummy inst
-%
-% \inststart{#1}{#2}{#3}
-% #1: nickname of stared instance
-% #2: name of the instance (above instance head symbol)
-% #3: name of the instance (inside instance head symbol)
-%
-\def\inststart#1#2#3{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- % set the above and inside names
- \expandafter\def\csname instabname#1\endcsname{#2}% `above name'
- \expandafter\def\csname instinname#1\endcsname{#3}% `inside name'
- % draw the instance header symbol
- \msc at drawinstanceheadsymbol{#1}{\the\msc at currentheight}%
- % redefine the instance's y position
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight+\instheadheight}%
- \msc at setinstypos{#1}{\the\tmp at Y}%
+% creates nodes to which we draw a line when advancing a level
+% #1 instance name
+%associates name with number #1 in corresponding pgfkeys. It updates
+%the right evironment
+ % #1 name of instance
+ % #2 options
+\def\msc at nameinstance#1#2{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/#1/no}{
+ \msc at nicknamedefinederr{#1}
+ }{
+ \advance\c at mscinstcnt by2\relax
+ \mscset{%update envright keys
+ instance/envright/no/.initial/.expanded=\the\c at mscinstcnt,
+ instanceno/\the\c at mscinstcnt/name/.initial/.expanded=envright
+ }
+ \advance\c at mscinstcnt by-1\relax%
+ \mscset{
+ instance/#1/no/.initial/.expanded=\the\c at mscinstcnt,
+ instanceno/\the\c at mscinstcnt/name/.initial/.expanded=#1,%
+ instance/#1/status/.initial=on, %possible values: on, off (no draw),
+ instance/#1/cover/.initial=0, %how many times instance is covered
+ instance/#1/region/.initial=normal, %possible %values:normal,coregion,suspension,activation,seminormal
+ instance/#1/region level/.initial=0,
+ instance/#1/region width/.initial=0pt
+ }
}
+ \begin{pgfscope}%parse options in scope not to propagate them
+ \mscset{#2}%
+ \ifnum\c at mscinstcnt<2\relax %the first instance
+ \coordinate[below=\mscget{first level height} of msc at level0] (msc at level1);
+ \fi
+ \ifmsc at isstar
+ \xdef\msc at tempa{fat}
+ \else
+ \xdef\msc at tempa{\mscget{fat}}
+ \fi
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \mscset{/msc/instance/#1/type/.initial/.expand once=\msc at tempa}
+ \iftikz at fullytransformed %when fully transformed lines width is wrong - submitted bug nr 3597513.
+ \pgfmathparse{\msc at tempa + (0.5-0.5/\pgf at pt@bb)*\mscget{line width}}
+ \xdef\msc at tempa{\pgfmathresult}
+ \fi
}
-%
-% \inststop{#1}
-% #1: nick name of instance
-%
-% Draws the footer of #1 at current level.
-\def\inststop#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \addtolength{\msc at currentheight}{\lastlevelheight}
- \msc at drawinstanceline{#1}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \msc at drawinstancefootsymbol{#1}{\the\tmp at Y}%
- \addtolength{\msc at currentheight}{-\lastlevelheight}
- \msc at setinstypos{#1}{undefined}
- }
+%assigns the name of the previous instance to the \msc at inst@name
+ % #1 name or number of the instance
+\def\msc at previousinstance#1{%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instanceno/#1/name}%
+ { \pgfmathsetcount{\c at pgf@counta}{#1} }
+ { \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/#1/no}
+ {\pgfmathsetcount{\c at pgf@counta}{\mscget{instance/#1/no}}}%
+ {\msc at instundefinederr{#1}}
+ }
+ \advance\c at pgf@counta by -1\relax%
+ \edef\msc at inst@name{\mscget{instanceno/\the\c at pgf@counta/name}}
}
+
+\def\msc at numsplit#1.#2{\def\msc at ta{#1}\def\msc at tb{#2}}
+% \nextlevel increases \msc at currentheight by #1 * \level height
+% (optional) #1: a nonnegative integer number (defaults to 1)
+% or tkiz options
%
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%5
-%
-% CREATE
-%
-% \create creates a new msc-instance and draws its head symbol
-% #1: text above creation message
-% #2: nickname of creating instance
-% #3: nickname of created instance
-% #4: name of the instance (above instance head symbol)
-% #5: name of the instance (inside instance head symbol)
-%
-% Some commands are defined as well (INSTNR is the arabic
-% representation of the instance number):
-% \instabname#3: `above name' of instance with nickname #3
-% \instinname#3: `inside name' of instance with nickname #3
-% \instlinestyle#3: the line style (dashed or solid) of instance with nickname #3
-\newcommand{\create}{%
- \@ifstar%
- {\def\mess at style{mess}\def\mess at linsestyle{dashed}\create at A}{\def\mess at style{mess}\def\mess at linestyle{solid}\create at A}%
-}%
-\newcommand{\create at A}[1]{%
- \def\mess at labeltext{#1}%
- \create at B%
+\def\nextlevel{
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at nextlevelopt{\msc at nextlevelopt[1]}
}
-\newcommand{\create at B}[2][t]{%
- \def\mess at labelposition{#1}%
- \def\mess at sender{#2}%
- \create at C%
+\def\msc at nextlevelopt[#1]{%
+ \let\msc at tempheight\relax
+ \if!\ifnum9<1#1!\else_\fi
+ \mscset{/msc/level offset=#1}
+ \else
+ \msc at numsplit#1\relax
+ \if!\ifnum9<1\msc at ta!\else_\fi
+ \mscset{/msc/level offset=\msc at ta}%we get only
+ \if!\ifnum9<1\msc at tb!\else_\fi
+ \pgfmathsetmacro{\msc at tempheight}{0.\msc at tb*\mscget{level height}}
+ \msc at notpositiveintegerwarn{\msc at ta}{\msc at tb}
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \mscgety{(msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt)}{\msc at y}
+ \foreach \msc at tempa [evaluate=\msc at tempc using \msc at y-(\msc at tempa*\mscget{level height})] in {1 ,...,\mscget{level offset}} {%
+ \advance\c at msclevelcnt by 1\relax
+ \coordinate (msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt) at (0,\msc at tempc pt);
+ \advance\c at msclevelcnt by -1\relax
+ \foreach \msc at tempb in {1,...,\c at mscinstcnt} {
+ \msc at createlevelnodes{\mscget{instanceno/\msc at tempb/name}}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }
+% \message{-----Showing code for level=\the\c at msclevelcnt------------------- }
+% \pgfkeys{/msc/level\the\c at msclevelcnt/draw/.show code,}
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/level\the\c at msclevelcnt/havedraw}{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \mscset{/msc/level\the\c at msclevelcnt/draw}
+ \msc at global@set{/msc/level\the\c at msclevelcnt/draw/.code={}}
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ }{
+ }
+ \global\advance\c at msclevelcnt by 1\relax
+ }
+ \foreach \msc at tempb in {1,...,\c at mscinstcnt} {
+ \msc at drawinstanceline{\mscget{instanceno/\msc at tempb/name}}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }
+ \ifx\msc at tempheight\relax\else
+ \edef\msc at ta{\mscget{level height}}
+ \mscset{level height/.expanded=\msc at tempheight pt}
+ \nextlevel[1]
+ \mscset{level height/.expanded=\msc at ta}
+ \fi
+ \mscset{level offset=1}
}
-\newcommand{\create at C}[4][0.5]{%
- \def\mess at labelplacement{#1}%
- \def\mess at receiver{#2}%
- \def\mess at leveloffset{0}%
- \def\mess at instanceoffset{0.5\instwidth}%
-%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst\mess at sender}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{\mess at sender}}{% else, \mess at sender is defined
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst\mess at receiver}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{\mess at receiver}}{% else, \mess at receiver is defined
- \expandafter\def\csname instabname\mess at receiver\endcsname{#3}% `above name'
- \expandafter\def\csname instinname\mess at receiver\endcsname{#4}% `inside name'
- % draw the instance header symbol
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instxpos{\mess at receiver}}% x-center head box
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}% y-center head box
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{-0.5\instwidth+\tmp at X}% x-upperleft head box
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight-0.5\instheadheight}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa+\instwidth}% x-lowerright head box
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\tmp at Ya+\instheadheight}% y-lowerright head box
- \psframe[dimen=middle](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- \rput[B](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Ya){\raisebox{\labeldist}{\makebox[0pt][c]{#3}}}%
- \rput[B](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){\raisebox{-.5ex}{\makebox[0pt][c]{#4}}}%
- % redefine the instance's y position
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight+0.5\instheadheight}%
- \msc at setinstypos{\mess at receiver}{\the\tmp at Y}%
- % draw creation arrow
- \msc at drawarrow%
- }%
- }%
+
+% \coordinate (msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt) at (0,#2);
+% draw a line for a given instance
+% #1 name of the instance
+% #2 level number
+\def\msc at drawinstanceline#1#2{
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{instance/#1/status}}{on}{
+% ifnum0<\mscget{instance/#1/cover} \else
+ \mscgety{(msc at level#2)}{\msc at tempa}
+ \mscgety{(msc at lastlevel#1)}{\msc at dil}
+ \pgfmathparse{max(\msc at tempa-\msc at dil,\mscget{instance/#1/cover})}
+ \ifnum0<\pgfmathresult\relax %draw only if last level is above current level
+ \mscgety{(msc at level#2)}{\msc at io}\msc at setlastlevel{#1}{\msc at io}
+ \else
+ \msc at StrEqEither{\mscget{instance/#1/region}}{normal}{seminormal}{
+ \draw[/msc,instance line,every instance line]
+ (msc at lastlevel#1-|msc at node#1 at l0)--(msc at level#2-|msc at node#1 at l0)
+ (msc at lastlevel#1-|msc at node#1 at r0)--(msc at level#2-|msc at node#1 at r0);
+ \mscgety{(msc at level#2)}{\msc at io}\msc at setlastlevel{#1}{\msc at io}
+ }{
+% \msc at regbody{#1}{#2}
+ }
+ \fi
+ }{}
}
-%
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% INLINE EXPRESSIONS (inlines)
-%
-%
-% \inlineestart creates an inline expression at the current level
-% [#1]: left overlap
-% [#2]: right overlap
-% #3: nickname of the inline
-% #4: text of the inline
-% #5: first instance of the inline
-% #6: final instance of the inline
-\newcommand{\inlinestart}[1][\inlineoverlap]{%
- \def\msc at leftoverlap{#1}\msc at inlinecont%
+
+% create nodes at a current level for a given instance
+% #1 name of the instance
+% #2 level number
+\def\msc at createlevelnodes#1#2{
+%assume node msc at level#2 exists
+ \IfEqCase{\mscget{instance/#1/type}}{
+ {fat} {
+ \coordinate[xshift=\mscget{line width} /2](msc at node#1 at l#2) at (msc at node#1.west|-msc at level#2);
+ \coordinate[xshift=-\mscget{line width} /2] (msc at node#1 at r#2) at (msc at node#1.east|-msc at level#2);
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{instance/#1/region}}{seminormal}{
+ \msc at global@set{instance/#1/region=normal}
+ }{}
+ }
+ {normal} {%
+ \msc at StrEqEither{\mscget{instance/#1/region}}{normal}{coregion}{%
+ \coordinate (msc at node#1 at r#2) at (msc at node#1 |-msc at level#2);
+ \coordinate (msc at node#1 at l#2) at (msc at node#1 |-msc at level#2);
+ }
+ {%
+ \msc at StrEqEither{\mscget{instance/#1/region}}{activation}{suspension} {
+ \path let \p1=(msc at node#1), \p2=(msc at level#2) in
+ coordinate(msc at node#1 at l#2) at (\x1-\mscget{instance/#1/region width}/2,\y2)
+ coordinate(msc at node#1 at r#2) at (\x1+\mscget{instance/#1/region width}/2,\y2);
+ }
+ {
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{instance/#1/region}}{seminormal}{
+ \path let \p1=(msc at node#1), \p2=(msc at level#2) in
+ coordinate(msc at node#1 at l#2) at (\x1-\mscget{instance/#1/region width}/2,\y2)
+ coordinate(msc at node#1 at r#2) at (\x1+\mscget{instance/#1/region width}/2,\y2);
+ \msc at global@set{instance/#1/region=normal}
+ }{%debug message
+ \message{[msc] Unknown region type: \mscget{instance/#1/region} for the nick: #1}
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ [\message{[msc] Unknown instance type: \mscget{instance/#1/type} for the nick: #1}]
+ }
+% }
+% { }
}
-\newcommand{\msc at inlinecont}[5][\msc at leftoverlap]{\msc at declinline{\msc at leftoverlap}{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}}%
-%
-% \inlineend draws and ends the inline expression with nickname #1
-%
-\newcommand{\inlineend}{%
- \@ifstar{\msc at inlineends}{\msc at inlineend}}
-%
-% \inlineseparator draws a ``separator'' (horizontal dashed line) through
-% inline expression with nickname #1
-\newcommand{\inlineseparator}[1]{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinl#1}{%
- \msc at inlundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \psline[linestyle=dashed](\msc at inlulx{#1},-\tmp at Y)(\msc at inllrx{#1},-\tmp at Y)%
- }%
+% \mess(*)[side]{name}[label position]{sender}[pos]{receiver}[level shift]
+\def\mess{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar*{\msc at isstartrue\msc at mess@nostar}{\msc at isstarfalse\msc at mess@nostar*}
}
-%
-% internal commands to implement the inline expressions:
-% #1: left overlap
-% #2: right overlap
-% #3: nickname of the inline
-% #4: text of the inline
-% #5: first instance of the inline
-% #6: final instance of the inline
-%
-\def\msc at declinline#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
- \@ifundefined{mscinl#3}{%
- \@ifundefined{mscinst#5}{% #5 is not an instance nickname
- \msc at instundefinederr{#5}}{%
- \@ifundefined{mscinst#6}{% #6 is not an instance nickname
- \msc at instundefinederr{#6}}{%
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\msc at instxpos{#5}>\msc at instxpos{#6}}}{%
- \msc at inlfirstlasterror{#3}{#5}{#6}}{%
- \@namedef{mscinl#3}{\relax}%
- \expandafter\def\csname inltext#3\endcsname{\raisebox{\depth}[\totalheight][0pt]{#4}}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{true}{\msc at instisfat{#5}}}%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instlxpos{#5}-#1}%
- }%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instxpos{#5}-#1}%
- }%
- \expandafter\edef\csname inlulx#3\endcsname{\the\tmp at X}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname inluly#3\endcsname{\the\msc at currentheight}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{true}{\msc at instisfat{#6}}}%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instrxpos{#6}+#2}%
- }%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instxpos{#6}+#2}%
- }%
- \expandafter\edef\csname inllrx#3\endcsname{\the\tmp at X}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname inllry#3\endcsname{undefined}%
- % two additional instances are defined
- \msc at declinst{#3left}{\relax}{\relax}{\the\instbarwidth}% left of inline
- \msc at setinstxpos{#3left}{\msc at inlulx{#3}}%
- \msc at setinstlxpos{#3left}{\msc at inlulx{#3}}%
- \msc at setinstrxpos{#3left}{\msc at inlulx{#3}}%
- \msc at setinstypos{#3left}{undefined}% no instance line drawing
- \msc at declinst{#3right}{\relax}{\relax}{\the\instbarwidth}% left of inline
- \msc at setinstxpos{#3right}{\msc at inllrx{#3}}%
- \msc at setinstlxpos{#3right}{\msc at inllrx{#3}}%
- \msc at setinstrxpos{#3right}{\msc at inllrx{#3}}%
- \msc at setinstypos{#3right}{undefined}% no instance line drawing
- }%
- }%
- }%
- }{% nickname #3 already defined
- \msc at nicknamedefinederr{#3}%
- }%
+\def\msc at mess@nostar*{\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at messopt{\msc at messopt[]}}
+\def\msc at messopt[#1]{%parsing of [side] and [options]
+ \ifx#1l \mscset{side=left}
+ \else \ifx#1r \mscset{side=right}
+ \else \ifx#1b \else \ifx#1t %ignoring t and b for backward compatibility
+ \else
+ \pgfkeysactivatefamily{/msc/message options}
+ \pgfkeysfiltered{/msc,#1}
+ \def\msc at options{#1}
+% \pgfutil at ifundefined{msc at mess@side}{\def\msc at mess@side{\mscget{side}}}{}
+ \fi \fi \fi
+ \fi
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at messopt}{\msc at mess@threeopt}
}
-%
-% \msc at inlulx gets the upper-left x-position of inline with nickname #1.
-\def\msc at inlulx#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinl#1}{%
- \msc at inlundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname inlulx#1\endcsname%
- }%
+\def\msc at mess@threeopt#1{%parsing of {name}
+ \def\msc at mess@name{#1}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at mess@twoopt{\msc at mess@twoopt[\mscget{label position}]}
}
-%
-% \msc at inluly gets the upper-left y-position of inline with nickname #1.
-\def\msc at inluly#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinl#1}{%
- \msc at inlundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname inluly#1\endcsname%
- }%
+\def\msc at mess@twoopt[#1]#2{%parsing of [label position] and {sender}
+ \ifx#1l \mscset{label position=left}
+ \else \ifx#1r \mscset{label position=right}
+ \else \ifx#1t \mscset{label position=above}
+ \else \ifx#1b \mscset{label position=below}
+ \fi \fi \fi \fi
+ \xdef\msc at sender{#2}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at mess@oneopt{\msc at mess@oneopt[\mscget{pos}]}
}
-%
-% \msc at inllrx gets the lower-right x-position of inline with nickname #1.
-\def\msc at inllrx#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinl#1}{%
- \msc at inlundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname inllrx#1\endcsname%
- }%
+\def\msc at mess@oneopt[#1]#2{%parsing of [placement] and {receiver}
+ \mscset{pos/.expanded=#1}
+ \xdef\msc at receiver{#2}
+ \IfStrEq{\msc at receiver}{\msc at sender}{
+ \edef\msc at tempb{\mscget{offset}}
+ }{
+ \edef\msc at tempb{\mscget{level shift}}
+ }
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at mess@noopt}{\msc at mess@noopt[\msc at tempb]}
}
-%
-% \msc at inllry gets the lower-right y-position of inline with nickname #1.
-\def\msc at inllry#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinl#1}{%
- \msc at inlundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname inllry#1\endcsname%
- }%
+
+\def\msc at mess@noopt[#1]{%parsing of [level shift]
+ \def\msc at undefined{false}
+ \msc at getlevel shift{#1}{\msc at level shift}{\msc at tempa}
+ \ifx\msc at sender\msc at receiver %self message
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{label position}}{above}{
+ \mscset{label position=\mscget{side}}
+ }{}
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at receiver/no}{%instance name
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \msc at selfmess{msc at node\msc at receiver @l\the\c at msclevelcnt}{msc at node\msc at receiver @l\msc at level shift}{-\mscget{self message width}}
+ }{
+ \msc at selfmess{msc at node\msc at receiver @r\the\c at msclevelcnt}{msc at node\msc at receiver @r\msc at level shift}{\mscget{self message width}}
+ }
+ }{
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{pgf at sh@ns at msc@node\msc at receiver}{% neither instance name nor reference node
+ \def\msc at undefined{true}
+ \msc at instundefinederr{\msc at receiver}
+ }{% reference node
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \msc at selfmess{msc at node\msc at receiver|-msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt}%
+ {msc at node\msc at receiver|-msc at level\msc at level shift}{-\mscget{self message width}}
+ }{
+ \msc at selfmess{msc at node\msc at receiver|-msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt}%
+ {msc at node\msc at receiver|-msc at level\msc at level shift} {\mscget{self message width}}
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ \else %not self message
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{pgf at sh@ns at msc@node\msc at receiver} {
+ \def\msc at undefined{true}
+ \msc at instundefinederr{\msc at receiver}
+ }{
+ \mscgetx{(msc at node\msc at receiver)}{\msc at minx}
+ }
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{pgf at sh@ns at msc@node\msc at sender} {
+ \def\msc at undefined{true}
+ \msc at instundefinederr{\msc at sender}
+ }{
+ \mscgetx{(msc at node\msc at sender)}{\msc at maxx}
+ }
+ \IfStrEq{\msc at undefined}{false}{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at sender/no}{%instance name
+% \pgfmathparse{\msc at maxx-\msc at minx}
+ \pgfmathparse{ifthenelse((\msc at maxx-\msc at minx)<0,"r","l")}
+ \edef\msc at left{msc at node\msc at sender @\pgfmathresult\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }{
+ \def\msc at left{msc at node\msc at sender|-msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at receiver/no}{%instance name
+ \pgfmathparse{ifthenelse((\msc at maxx-\msc at minx)<0,"l","r")}
+ \edef\msc at right{msc at node\msc at receiver @\pgfmathresult\msc at level shift}
+ }{
+ \def\msc at right{msc at node\msc at receiver|-msc at level\msc at level shift}
+ }
+ \msc at mess{\msc at left}{\msc at right}%stores result in \msc at tempb
+ }{}
+ \fi
+ \IfStrEq{\msc at undefined}{false}{
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \addDdraw{\msc at sender}{\msc at receiver}{\msc at tempa}{\expandafter\draw\msc at tempb}
+ }{
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ }
}
-%
-% \msc at inltext gets the text of inline with nickname #1
-\def\msc at inltext#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinl#1}{%
- \msc at inlundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname inltext#1\endcsname%
- }%
+% #1 - sender node
+% #2 - receiver node
+% #3 - message dist
+% result defined in \msc at tempb
+\def\msc at selfmess#1#2#3{
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{label position}}{left}{\xdef\msc at tempc{-1}}{\xdef\msc at tempc{1}}
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[\mscget{label position},/msc,message,message loop={#3},
+ \ifmsc at isstar replay,\fi, inner sep=0pt,
+ /tikz/pos=\mscget{pos}, every message, \msc at options]
+ (#1)
+ to node[xshift=\msc at tempc*\mscget{label distance}](msc at lastnode){\expandafter\noexpand\msc at mess@name}
+ (#2);
+ }%use macro to expand parameters
}
-%
-% \msc at inlineend completes the inline with nickname #1
-% (the bottom line is solid)
-\def\msc at inlineend#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinl#1}{%
- \msc at inlundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \expandafter\edef\csname inllry#1\endcsname{\the\msc at currentheight}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at inlulx{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at inluly{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at inllrx{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\msc at inllry{#1}}%
-%% Debug info:
-% \typeout{(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)}%
- \psframe[dimen=middle](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- \settowidth{\tmp at X}{\msc at inltext{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{1.1\tmp at X+\labeldist}%
- \settoheight{\tmp at Y}{\msc at inltext{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{1.1\tmp at Y+\labeldist}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at X+\labeldist}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\tmp at Y+\labeldist}%
- \rput(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya){%
- \rput[tl](\labeldist,-\labeldist){\msc at inltext{#1}}%
- \psline(0,-\tmp at Yb)(\tmp at X,-\tmp at Yb)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at Xb,0)%
- }%
- }%
+% #1 - sender node
+% #2 - receiver node
+% result defined in \msc at tempb
+\def\msc at mess#1#2{
+ \IfSubStr{\mscget{label position}}{above}{\xdef\msc at tempc{1}}{\xdef\msc at tempc{-1}}
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[/msc,\mscget{label position},message,
+ \ifmsc at isstar replay,\fi, inner sep=0pt, %
+ /tikz/pos=\mscget{pos}, every message, \msc at options]
+ (#1) ->
+ node[yshift=\msc at tempc*\mscget{label distance}](msc at lastnode){\unexpanded\expandafter{\msc at mess@name}}(#2);%cheating %and using eTeX expansion
+ % to use pure TeX see http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/40674/replacement-for-unexpanded-without-etex-extension
+ }
}
-%
-% \msc at inlineends completes the inline with nickname #1
-% (the bottom line is dashed)
-\def\msc at inlineends#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinl#1}{%
- \msc at inlundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \expandafter\edef\csname inllry#1\endcsname{\the\msc at currentheight}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at inlulx{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at inluly{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at inllrx{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\msc at inllry{#1}}%
-%% Debug info:
-% \typeout{(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)}%
- % first the solid part of the inline expression:
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Yb)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- % then the dashed bottom line:
- \psline[linestyle=dashed](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Yb)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)
- \settowidth{\tmp at X}{\msc at inltext{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{1.1\tmp at X+\labeldist}%
- \settoheight{\tmp at Y}{\msc at inltext{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{1.1\tmp at Y+\labeldist}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at X+\labeldist}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\tmp at Y+\labeldist}%
- \rput(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya){%
- \rput[tl](\labeldist,-\labeldist){\msc at inltext{#1}}%
- \psline(0,-\tmp at Yb)(\tmp at X,-\tmp at Yb)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at Xb,0)%
- }%
- }%
+%add code to be executed at given level
+% #1 - name of the instance
+% #2 - number of level at which to add the code
+% #3 - code to be added (expanded once - so prefix with \expandafter)
+\def\adddraw#1#2#3{
+ \msc at StrEqEither{#1}{envright}{envleft} {
+ \msc at global@set{/msc/levelenv/draw/.append code/.expand once={#3},
+ /msc/levelenv/havedraw/.initial=true}
+ }{
+ \msc at global@set{/msc/level#2/draw/.append code/.expand once={#3},
+ /msc/level#2/havedraw/.initial=true}
+ }
}
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% REFERENCES
-%
-%
-% \referencestart creates an msc reference at the current level
-% [#1] : left overlap
-% [#2] : right overlap
-% #3: nickname of the reference
-% #4: text of the reference
-% #5: first instance of the reference
-% #6: final instance of the reference
-\newcommand{\referencestart}[1][\referenceoverlap]{%
- \def\msc at leftoverlap{#1}\msc at referencecont%
+%add code to be executed at given level
+% #1 - name of the instance
+% #2 - name of the second instance
+% #3 - number of level at which to add the code
+% #4 - code to be added (expanded once - so prefix with \expandafter)
+\def\addDdraw#1#2#3#4{
+ \msc at StrEqEither{#1}{envright}{envleft} {
+ \msc at global@set{/msc/levelenv/draw/.append code/.expand once={#4},
+ /msc/levelenv/havedraw/.initial=true}
+ }{
+ \msc at StrEqEither{#2}{envright}{envleft} {
+ \msc at global@set{/msc/levelenv/draw/.append code/.expand once={#4},
+ /msc/levelenv/havedraw/.initial=true}
+ }{
+ \msc at global@set{/msc/level#3/draw/.append code/.expand once={#4},
+ /msc/level#3/havedraw/.initial=true}
+ }
+ }
}
-\newcommand{\msc at referencecont}[5][\referenceoverlap]{%
- \msc at declreference{\msc at leftoverlap}{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
- \setcounter{tmpcnt}{0}%
- \msc at reffindfirst{#2}{\msc at drawtorefaux}%
+% \msccomment[position]{text}{instname}
+\def\msccomment{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar*{\msc at isstartrue\msc at msccomment@nostar}{\msc at isstarfalse\msc at msccomment@nostar*}
}
-%
-% \referenceend draws and ends the reference with nickname #1
-\newcommand{\referenceend}[1]{%
- \msc at drawreference{#1}%
- \setcounter{tmpcnt}{0}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \msc at reffindfirst{#1}{\msc at refresetypos{\the\tmp at Y}}%
+\def\msc at msccomment@nostar*{\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at msccomment@opt{\msc at msccomment@opt[]}}
+\def\msc at msccomment@opt[#1]{%parsing of [side] and [options]
+ \ifx#1l \mscset{side=left}
+ \else \ifx#1r \mscset{side=right}
+ \else
+ \pgfkeysactivatefamily{/msc/msccomment options}
+ \pgfkeysfiltered{/msc,#1}
+ \def\msc at options{#1}
+% \pgfutil at ifundefined{msc at mess@side}{\def\msc at mess@side{\mscget{side}}}{}
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at msccomment@opt}{\msc at msccomment@noopt}
}
-%
-% internal commands to implement references:
-% #1: left overlap
-% #2: right overlap
-% #3: nickname of the reference
-% #4: text of the reference
-% #5: first instance of the reference
-% #6: final instance of the reference
-%
-\def\msc at declreference#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
- \@ifundefined{mscref#3}{%
- \@ifundefined{mscinst#5}{% #5 is not an instance nickname
- \msc at instundefinederr{#5}}{%
- \@ifundefined{mscinst#6}{% #6 is not an instance nickname
- \msc at instundefinederr{#6}}{%
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\msc at instxpos{#5}>\msc at instxpos{#6}}}{%
- \msc at reffirstlasterror{#3}{#5}{#6}}{%
- \@namedef{mscref#3}{\relax}%
- \expandafter\def\csname reftext#3\endcsname{#4}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{true}{\msc at instisfat{#5}}}%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instlxpos{#5}-#1}%
- }%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instxpos{#5}-#1}%
- }%
- \expandafter\edef\csname refulx#3\endcsname{\the\tmp at X}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname refuly#3\endcsname{\the\msc at currentheight}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{true}{\msc at instisfat{#6}}}%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instrxpos{#6}+#2}%
- }%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instxpos{#6}+#2}%
- }%
- \expandafter\edef\csname reflrx#3\endcsname{\the\tmp at X}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname reflry#3\endcsname{undefined}%
- \expandafter\def\csname reffirst#3\endcsname{#5}%
- \expandafter\def\csname reffinal#3\endcsname{#6}%
- % two additional instances are defined
- \msc at declinst{#3left}{\relax}{\relax}{\the\instbarwidth}% left of reference
- \msc at setinstxpos{#3left}{\msc at refulx{#3}}%
- \msc at setinstlxpos{#3left}{\msc at refulx{#3}}%
- \msc at setinstrxpos{#3left}{\msc at refulx{#3}}%
- \msc at setinstypos{#3left}{undefined}% no instance line drawing
- \msc at declinst{#3right}{\relax}{\relax}{\the\instbarwidth}% left of reference
- \msc at setinstxpos{#3right}{\msc at reflrx{#3}}%
- \msc at setinstlxpos{#3right}{\msc at reflrx{#3}}%
- \msc at setinstrxpos{#3right}{\msc at reflrx{#3}}%
- \msc at setinstypos{#3right}{undefined}% no instance line drawing
- }%
- }%
- }%
- }{% nickname #3 already defined
- \msc at nicknamedefinederr{#3}%
- }%
+
+\def\msc at msccomment@noopt#1#2{%parsing of {text}
+ \edef\msc at undefined{false}
+ \edef\msc at instname{#2}
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at instname/no}{
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node\msc at instname @l\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ } {
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node\msc at instname @r\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }
+ }{
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{pgf at sh@ns at msc@node\msc at instname}{% neither instance name nor reference node
+ \edef\msc at undefined{true}
+ \msc at instundefinederr{\msc at instname}
+ }
+ {
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node\msc at instname|-msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }
+ }
+ \IfStrEq{\msc at undefined}{false}{
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \def\msc at anchor{east}
+ \edef\msc at dist{-\mscget{msccomment distance}}
+ } {
+ \def\msc at anchor{west}
+ \edef\msc at dist{\mscget{msccomment distance}}
+ }
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[/msc,msccomment,msccomment line,
+ every msccomment, \msc at options]
+ let \noexpand\p1 = (\msc at node)
+ in (\noexpand\x1+\msc at dist,\noexpand\y1)
+ node [/msc,draw,solid,\mscget{side} open rectangle,anchor=\msc at anchor,
+ append after command={(\msc at node)
+ -- (\noexpand\tikzlastnode)},
+ every msccomment, \msc at options] {#1};
+ }%use macro to expand parameters
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \adddraw{#2}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}{\expandafter\draw\msc at tempb}
+ }{
+ \msc at instundefinederr{\msc at instname}\end{pgfscope}
+ }
}
-%
-% \msc at refulx gets the upper-left x-position of reference with nickname #1.
-\def\msc at refulx#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscref#1}{%
- \msc at refundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname refulx#1\endcsname%
- }%
+% \action(*){name}{instance}
+% \naction(*){name}{instance}
+\def\naction{
+ \begin{pgfscope}%,append after command={node[draw,cross out]{}}
+ \def\msc at crossout{,append after command={
+ [shorten >=1.2*\noexpand\mscget{line width},
+ shorten <=1.2*\noexpand\mscget{line width}]
+ (\noexpand\tikzlastnode.north west) edge (\noexpand\tikzlastnode.south east)
+ (\noexpand\tikzlastnode.north east) edge (\noexpand\tikzlastnode.south west)}}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar*{\msc at isstartrue\msc at action@nostar}{\msc at isstarfalse\msc at action@nostar*}
}
-%
-% \msc at refuly gets the upper-left y-position of reference with nickname #1.
-\def\msc at refuly#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscref#1}{%
- \msc at refundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname refuly#1\endcsname%
- }%
+\def\action{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at crossout{}
+ \def\msc at options{}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar*{\msc at isstartrue\msc at action@nostar}{\msc at isstarfalse\msc at action@nostar*}
}
-%
-% \msc at reflrx gets the lower-right x-position of reference with nickname #1.
-\def\msc at reflrx#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscref#1}{%
- \msc at refundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname reflrx#1\endcsname%
- }%
+% #1 options
+% #2 name
+% #3 insstance
+\def\msc at action@nostar*{\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at action@opt{\msc at action@opt[]}}
+\def\msc at action@opt[#1]#2#3{%parsing of [side] and [options]
+ \pgfkeysactivatefamily{/msc/action options}
+ \pgfkeysfiltered{/msc,#1}
+ \def\msc at options{#1}
+ \xdef\msc at instname{#3}
+ \ifmsc at isstar
+ \def\msc at tempa{}
+ \else
+ %\msc at savebox{#2}
+ \edef\msc at tempa{,
+ %text height={min({\the\ht\msc at box},\mscget{action height})},
+ %text depth={\the\dp\msc at box},
+ %inner sep=0,
+ align=center,
+ text width={max( \mscget{action width},\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\x2 -
+ \noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\x1)-2*\mscget{label distance}}
+ }
+ \fi
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at instname/no}{
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[, ]
+ let \noexpand\p1 = (msc at node\msc at instname @l\the\c at msclevelcnt),
+ \noexpand\p2 = (msc at node\msc at instname @r\the\c at msclevelcnt) in
+ ( {\noexpand\x1+(\noexpand\x2-\noexpand\x1)/2},\noexpand\y1)
+ node[/msc, line cap=round,
+ yshift=\mscget{line width}/2, anchor=north,
+ minimum height=\mscget{action height},
+ minimum width= {max( \mscget{action width},\noexpand\x2 -
+ \noexpand\x1)} \msc at tempa, draw \msc at crossout,
+ inner sep=\mscget{label distance},
+ every action, /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},\msc at options
+ ](msc at tempnode){\unexpanded\expandafter{#2}};
+ \noexpand\msc at StrEqEither{\msc at instname}{envright}{envleft}{}{
+ \noexpand\mscgety{(msc at tempnode.south)}{\noexpand\msc at y}
+ \noexpand\msc at setlastlevel{\msc at instname}{\noexpand\msc at y}
+ }
+ }
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \msc at StrEqEither{\mscget{instance/#3/region}}{normal}{seminormal}{}{
+ \msc at regbody{#3}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ \msc at regbar{#3}{\mscget{instance/#3/region level}}
+ }
+ \adddraw{\msc at instname}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}{\expandafter\draw\msc at tempb}
+ }{
+ \msc at instundefinederr{\msc at instname}\end{pgfscope}
+ }
}
-%
-% \msc at reflry gets the lower-right y-position of reference with nickname #1.
-\def\msc at reflry#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscref#1}{%
- \msc at refundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname reflry#1\endcsname%
- }%
+% \settimer[placement]{name}{instance}
+\def\settimer{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{} \def\msc at timertype{settimer style}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at timer@opt{\msc at timer@opt[]}
}
-%
-% \msc at reftext gets the text of reference with nickname #1
-\def\msc at reftext#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscref#1}{%
- \msc at refundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname reftext#1\endcsname%
- }%
+% \timeout[placement]{name}{instance}
+\def\timeout{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{} \def\msc at timertype{timeout style}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at timer@opt{\msc at timer@opt[]}
}
-%
-% \msc at reftext gets the nickname of the first instance of the reference with nickname #1
-\def\msc at reffirst#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscref#1}{%
- \msc at refundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname reffirst#1\endcsname%
- }%
+% \stoptimer[placement]{name}{instance}
+\def\stoptimer{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{} \def\msc at timertype{stoptimer style}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at timer@opt{\msc at timer@opt[]}
}
-%
-% \msc at reftext gets the nickname of the final instance of the reference with nickname #1
-\def\msc at reffinal#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscref#1}{%
- \msc at refundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \csname reffinal#1\endcsname%
- }%
+% #1 - options or "l" or "r"
+\def\msc at timer@opt[#1]{%parsing of [side] and [options]
+ \ifx#1l \mscset{side=left}
+ \else \ifx#1r \mscset{side=right}
+ \else
+ \pgfkeysactivatefamily{/msc/msccomment options}
+ \pgfkeysfiltered{/msc,#1}
+ \def\msc at options{#1}
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at timer@opt}{\msc at timer}
}
-%
-% \msc at drawreference completes the reference with nickname #1
-\def\msc at drawreference#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscref#1}{%
- \msc at refundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \expandafter\edef\csname reflry#1\endcsname{\the\msc at currentheight}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at refulx{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at refuly{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at reflrx{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\msc at reflry{#1}}%
-%% Debug info:
-% \typeout{(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)}%
- \psframe[dimen=middle,framearc=0.25](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)% note: rounded corners
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xb-\tmp at Xa}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Yb-\tmp at Ya}%
- \rput(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya){%
- \rput[B](.5\tmp at X,-.5\tmp at Y){\raisebox{-.5ex}{\makebox[0pt][c]{\msc at reftext{#1}}}}%
- }%
- }%
+% #1 - label
+% #2 - instance name
+\def\msc at timer#1#2{
+ \edef\msc at undefined{false}
+ \edef\msc at instname{#2}
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at instname/no}{
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node\msc at instname @l\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ } {
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node\msc at instname @r\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }
+ }{
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{pgf at sh@ns at msc@node\msc at instname}{% neither instance name nor reference node
+ \edef\msc at undefined{true}
+ \msc at instundefinederr{\msc at instname}
+ }
+ {
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node\msc at instname|-msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }
+ }
+ \IfStrEq{\msc at undefined}{false}{
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \def\msc at anchor{east}
+ \edef\msc at timer@dist{-\mscget{self message width}}
+ \edef\msc at label@dist{-\mscget{label distance}}
+ } {
+ \edef\msc at timer@dist{\mscget{self message width}}
+ \def\msc at anchor{west}
+ \edef\msc at label@dist{\mscget{label distance}}
+ }
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[/msc,\msc at timertype={\mscget{timer width}},
+ every timer, \msc at options]
+ let \noexpand\p1 = (\msc at node)
+ in (\noexpand\x1+\msc at timer@dist,\noexpand\y1)
+ node [xshift=\msc at label@dist,/msc,anchor=\msc at anchor]{#1} to (\noexpand\x1,\noexpand\y1);
+ }%use macro to expand parameters
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \adddraw{#2}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}{\expandafter\draw\msc at tempb}
+ }{
+ \msc at instundefinederr{#2}\end{pgfscope}
+ }
}
-%
-\def\msc at reffindfirst#1#2{%
- \ifthenelse{\value{tmpcnt} < \value{mscinstcnt}}{%
-% Debug info:
-% \typeout{(drawtoref) checking \msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}{\msc at reffirst{#1}}}{% first instance found
-% Debug info:
-% \typeout{first found: \msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}%
- #2{#1}}{% else, keep on looking
- \msc at incrcounter{tmpcnt}%
- \msc at reffindfirst{#1}{#2}}}{% done ! all instances checked
- }%
+%\setstoptimer[placement]{name}{instance}[offset]
+\def\setstoptimer{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{} \def\msc at timertype{setstoptimer style}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at fulltimer@opt{\msc at fulltimer@opt[]}
}
-%
-\def\msc at drawtorefaux#1{%
- \ifthenelse{\value{tmpcnt} < \value{mscinstcnt}}{%
-% Debug info:
-% \typeout{(drawtorefaux) checking \msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}%
- \msc at drawinstanceline{\msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}%
- \msc at setinstypos{\msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}{undefined}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}{\msc at reffinal{#1}}}{% final instance found
-% Debug info:
-% \typeout{final found: \msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}%
- }{% else, non-final
- \msc at incrcounter{tmpcnt}%
- \msc at drawtorefaux{#1}}%
- }{% done ! all instances checked
- }%
+%\settimeout[placement]{name}{instance}[offset]
+\def\settimeout{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{} \def\msc at timertype{settimeout style}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at fulltimer@opt{\msc at fulltimer@opt[]}
}
-%
-\def\msc at refresetypos#1#2{%
- \ifthenelse{\value{tmpcnt} < \value{mscinstcnt}}{%
-% Debug info:
-% \typeout{(drawtorefaux) checking \msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}
- \msc at setinstypos{\msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}{#1}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}{\msc at reffinal{#2}}}{% final instance found
-% Debug info:
-% \typeout{final found: \msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}%
- }{% else, non-final
- \msc at incrcounter{tmpcnt}%
- \msc at refresetypos{#1}{#2}}%
- }{% done ! all instances checked
- }%
+
+% #1 - options or "l" or "r"
+\def\msc at fulltimer@opt[#1]{%parsing of [side] and [options]
+ \ifx#1l \mscset{side=left}
+ \else \ifx#1r \mscset{side=right}
+ \else
+ \pgfkeysactivatefamily{/msc/msccomment options}
+ \pgfkeysfiltered{/msc,#1}
+ \def\msc at options{#1}
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at fulltimer@opt}{\msc at fulltimer}
}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% CO-REGIONS
-%
-% \coregionstart starts a coregion on instance #1 (nickname) in the current level.
-\def\coregionstart#1{\regionstart{coregion}{#1}}
-% \coregionend ends a coregion on instance #1 (nickname) in the current level.
-\def\coregionend#1{\regionend{#1}}%
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% REGIONS (normal, coregion, suspension, and activation)
-%
-%
-% \regionstart{#1}{#2}
-% starts a region
-% #1: region style: normal, coregion, suspension, or activation
-% #2: nickname: nick name of the instance
-\def\regionstart#1#2{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#2}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#2}}{% else, #2 is defined
- \msc at drawinstanceline{#2}%
- \msc at setinstregionstyle{#2}{#1}%
- \msc at drawregionstart{#2}%
- }%
+\def\msc at fulltimer#1#2{
+ \xdef\msc at instname{#2}
+ \def\msc at name{#1}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at fulltimer@noopt}{\msc at fulltimer@noopt[\mscget{offset}]}
}
-%
-% \regionend{#1}
-% ends the region of instance with nickname #1
-\def\regionend#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \msc at drawinstanceline{#1}%
- \msc at drawregionend{#1}%
- \msc at setinstregionstyle{#1}{normal}%
- }%
-}
-%
-%
-\def\msc at drawregionstart#1{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instisfat{#1}}{true}}
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instlxpos{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instrxpos{#1}}%
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Y)%
+\def\msc at fulltimer@noopt[#1]{
+ \edef\msc at undefined{false}
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at instname/no}{
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node\msc at instname @l}
+ } {
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node\msc at instname @r}
}
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{-.5\regionbarwidth+\msc at instxpos{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{.5\regionbarwidth+\msc at instxpos{#1}}%
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Y)%
+ }{
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{pgf at sh@ns at msc@node\msc at instname}{% neither instance name nor reference node
+ \edef\msc at undefined{true}
+ \msc at instundefinederr{\msc at instname}
}
- \msc at setinstypos{#1}{\the\tmp at Y}%
-}
-%
-%
-\def\msc at drawregionend#1{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instisfat{#1}}{true}}
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instlxpos{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instrxpos{#1}}%
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Y)%
+ {
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node\msc at instname|-msc at level}
}
- {\setlength{\tmp at Xa}{-.5\regionbarwidth+\msc at instxpos{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{.5\regionbarwidth+\msc at instxpos{#1}}%
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Y)%
+ }
+ \IfStrEq{\msc at undefined}{false}{
+% \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at instname/no}{
+ \msc at getlevel shift{#1}{\msc at level shift}{\msc at drawlevel}
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \edef\msc at mess@dist{-\mscget{self message width}}
+ \edef\msc at label@dist{-\mscget{label distance}}
+ \def\msc at anchor{east}
+ }{
+ \edef\msc at mess@dist{\mscget{self message width}}
+ \edef\msc at label@dist{\mscget{label distance}}
+ \def\msc at anchor{west}
}
- \msc at setinstypos{#1}{\the\tmp at Y}%
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[/msc,\msc at timertype={\msc at mess@dist}{\mscget{timer width}},
+ every timer,\msc at options]
+ (\msc at node\the\c at msclevelcnt)
+ node [xshift=\msc at label@dist+\msc at mess@dist,/msc,anchor=\msc at anchor]{\msc at name}
+ to (\msc at node\msc at level shift);
+ }
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \adddraw{\expandafter\noexpand\msc at instname}{\expandafter\noexpand\msc at drawlevel}{\expandafter\draw\msc at tempb}
+% \edef\msc at drawlevel{0}
+ }{
+ \end{pgfscope}\msc at instundefinederr{\msc at instname}
+ }
}
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% MESSAGE ARROWS
-%
-% \messarrowscale sets the arrow scale
-\def\messarrowscale#1{\psset{arrowscale=#1}}
-%
-% \msc at setleveloffset sets the internal level offset
-\def\msc at setleveloffset#1{%
- \def\msc at leveloffset{#1}%
+% \mscmark[position]{name}{instname}
+\def\mscmark{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at mark@opt{\msc at mark@opt[]}
}
-
-% \mess has one optional argument to define the position of
-% the label of a self message.
-\newcommand{\mess}{%
- \@ifstar%
- {\def\mess at style{mess}\def\mess at linestyle{dashed}\mess at A}{\def\mess at style{mess}\def\mess at linestyle{solid}\mess at A}%
-}%
-%
-\newcommand{\mess at A}[2][l]{%
- \def\selfmess at position{#1}%
- \def\mess at labeltext{#2}%
- \mess at B%
-}%
-\newcommand{\mess at B}[2][\ifx\mess at sender\mess at receiver \selfmess at position\else t\fi]{%
- \def\mess at labelposition{#1}%
- \def\mess at sender{#2}%
- \mess at C%
+\def\msc at mark@opt[#1]{%parsing of [side] and [options]
+ \IfEqCase{#1}{%
+ {l}{\mscset{side=left}}%
+ {r}{\mscset{side=right}}%
+ {t}{\mscset{position=above}}%
+ {b}{\mscset{position=below}}%
+ {tl}{\mscset{side=left,position=above}}%
+ {tr}{\mscset{side=right,position=above}}%
+ {bl}{\mscset{side=left,position=below}}%
+ {br}{\mscset{side=right,position=below}}%
+ }[%
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \def\msc at options{#1}
+ ]
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at mark@opt}{\msc at mark}
}
-\newcommand{\mess at C}[2][0.5]{%
- \def\mess at labelplacement{#1}%
- \def\mess at receiver{#2}%
- \mess at D%
-}
-\newcommand{\mess at D}[1][\ifx\mess at sender\mess at receiver 1\else 0\fi]{%
- \edef\mess at leveloffset{#1}%
- \mess at E%
-}
-\newcommand{\mess at E}[1][0\mscunit]{%
- \edef\mess at instanceoffset{#1}%
- \msc at drawarrow%
-}
-\newcommand{\msc at drawarrow}{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst\mess at sender}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{\mess at sender}}{% else, sender is defined
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst\mess at receiver}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{\mess at receiver}}{% else, receiver is defined
- \ifx\mess at sender\mess at receiver\msc at drawselfarrow\else\msc at drawnonselfarrow\fi%
- }%
- }%
-}
-\newcommand{\msc at drawselfarrow}{%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\selfmess at position}{l} \or%
- \equal{\selfmess at position}{r}%
- }{%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\selfmess at position}{l}}%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instlxpos{\mess at sender} - \selfmesswidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa}%
- }{% ELSE
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instrxpos{\mess at sender} + \selfmesswidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa}%
- }%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\msc at currentheight + (\levelheight * \mess at leveloffset)}%
- \msc at computelabelcoords%
- \msc at computelabelspec%
- \rput[\msc at labelrefpoint](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){\msc at labelbox{\mess at labeltext}}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\selfmess at position}{l}}%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instlxpos{\mess at sender}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xc}{\msc at instlxpos{\mess at sender} - \mess at instanceoffset}%
- }{% ELSE
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instrxpos{\mess at sender}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xc}{\msc at instrxpos{\mess at sender} + \mess at instanceoffset}%
- }%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\mess at style}{mess}}%
- {% THEN message arrow
- \psline[linestyle=\mess at linestyle]{->}%
- (\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)%
- (\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)%
- (\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- (\tmp at Xc,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }{% ELSE order arrow
- \setlength{\tmp at Yd}{.5\tmp at Yb + .5\tmp at Ya}%
- \psline[linestyle=\mess at linestyle]{->}%
- (\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)%
- (\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)%
- (\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yd)%
- \psline[linestyle=\mess at linestyle]%
- (\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yd)%
- (\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- (\tmp at Xc,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }%
- }{% ELSE
- \msc at illegalselfmesspositionerr{\selfmess at position}%
- }%
-}
-\newcommand{\msc at drawnonselfarrow}{%
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\msc at instxpos{\mess at sender} < \msc at instxpos{\mess at receiver}}}%
- {\setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instrxpos{\mess at sender}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instlxpos{\mess at receiver}}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Xb}{-\mess at instanceoffset}}%
- {\setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instlxpos{\mess at sender}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instrxpos{\mess at receiver}}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Xb}{\mess at instanceoffset}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\msc at currentheight + (\levelheight * \mess at leveloffset)}%
- \msc at computelabelcoords%
- \msc at computelabelspec%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\mess at style}{mess}}%
- {% THEN message arrow
- \psline[linestyle=\mess at linestyle]{->}%
- (\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)%
- (\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }{%ELSE order arrow
- \setlength{\tmp at Xd}{.5\tmp at Xb + .5\tmp at Xa}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yd}{.5\tmp at Yb + .5\tmp at Ya}%
- \psline[linestyle=\mess at linestyle]{->}%
- (\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)%
- (\tmp at Xd,-\tmp at Yd)%
- \psline[linestyle=\mess at linestyle]%
- (\tmp at Xd,-\tmp at Yd)%
- (\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }%
- \rput[\msc at labelrefpoint](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){\msc at labelbox{\mess at labeltext}}%
-}%
-\newcommand{\msc at computelabelcoords}{%
- \ifthenelse{%\equal{t}{t}%
- \(\equal{\mess at sender}{\mess at receiver} \and \(\equal{\mess at labelposition}{l} \or%
- \equal{\mess at labelposition}{r}\)%
- \)%
- \or%
- \(\not\(\equal{\mess at sender}{\mess at receiver}\) \and \(\equal{\mess at labelposition}{t} \or%
- \equal{\mess at labelposition}{b}\)%
- \)%
- }{% THEN
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tmp at Xa<\tmp at Xb}}%
- {% THEN
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tmp at Ya<\tmp at Yb}}%
- {% THEN
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xa + (\tmp at Xb - \tmp at Xa)*\real{\mess at labelplacement}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Ya + (\tmp at Yb - \tmp at Ya)*\real{\mess at labelplacement}}%
- }{% ELSE
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xa + (\tmp at Xb - \tmp at Xa)*\real{\mess at labelplacement}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Yb + (\tmp at Ya - \tmp at Yb) + (\tmp at Yb - \tmp at Ya)*\real{\mess at labelplacement}}%
- }%
- }{% ELSE
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tmp at Xa>\tmp at Xb}}%
- {% THEN
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tmp at Ya<\tmp at Yb}}%
- {% THEN
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xb + (\tmp at Xa - \tmp at Xb) + (\tmp at Xb - \tmp at Xa)*\real{\mess at labelplacement}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Ya + (\tmp at Yb - \tmp at Ya)*\real{\mess at labelplacement}}%
- }{% ELSE
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xb + (\tmp at Xa - \tmp at Xb) + (\tmp at Xb - \tmp at Xa)*\real{\mess at labelplacement}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Yb + (\tmp at Ya - \tmp at Yb) + (\tmp at Yb - \tmp at Ya)*\real{\mess at labelplacement}}%
- }%
- }{% ELSE \tmpXa = \tmp at Xb (self message)
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xa}%
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tmp at Ya<\tmp at Yb}}%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Ya + (\tmp at Yb - \tmp at Ya)*\real{\mess at labelplacement}}%
- }{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Yb + (\tmp at Ya - \tmp at Yb) + (\tmp at Yb - \tmp at Ya)*\real{\mess at labelplacement}}}%
- }%
- }%
- }{% ELSE
- \msc at illegalmesslabelpositionerr{\mess at labelposition}%
+\def\msc at mark#1#2{
+ \def\msc at undefined{false}
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/#2/no}{
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node#2 at l\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ } {
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node#2 at r\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }
+ }{
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{pgf at sh@ns at msc@node#2}{% neither instance name nor reference node
+ \edef\msc at undefined{true}
+ \msc at instundefinederr{#2}
+ }
+ {
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node#2|-msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }
}
-}
-
-\newcommand{\msc at computelabelspec}{%
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tmp at Xa < \tmp at Xb}}%
- {% THEN W->E
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tmp at Ya < \tmp at Yb}}%
- {% THEN NW->SE
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\mess at labelposition}{t}}%
- {\def\msc at labelrefpoint{Bl}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{\labeldist}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Y}{-\labeldist}%
- }%
- {\def\msc at labelrefpoint{tr}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{-\labeldist}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Y}{\labeldist}%
- }%
- }{% ELSE
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tmp at Ya > \tmp at Yb}}%
- {% THEN SW -> NE
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\mess at labelposition}{t}}%
- {\def\msc at labelrefpoint{Br}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{-\labeldist}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Y}{-\labeldist}%
- }%
- {\def\msc at labelrefpoint{tl}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{\labeldist}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Y}{\labeldist}%
- }%
- }{% ELSE W->E
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\mess at labelposition}{t}}%
- {\def\msc at labelrefpoint{B}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{0\labeldist}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Y}{-\labeldist}%
- }%
- {\def\msc at labelrefpoint{t}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{0\labeldist}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Y}{\labeldist}%
- }%
- }%
- }%
- }{% ELSE
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tmp at Xa > \tmp at Xb}}%
- {% THEN E -> W
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tmp at Ya < \tmp at Yb}}%
- {% THEN NE -> SW
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\mess at labelposition}{t}}%
- {\def\msc at labelrefpoint{Br}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{-\labeldist}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Y}{-\labeldist}%
- }%
- {\def\msc at labelrefpoint{tl}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{\labeldist}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Y}{\labeldist}%
- }%
- }{% ELSE
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tmp at Ya > \tmp at Yb}}%
- {% THEN SE -> NW
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\mess at labelposition}{t}}%
- {\def\msc at labelrefpoint{Bl}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{\labeldist}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Y}{-\labeldist}%
- }%
- {\def\msc at labelrefpoint{tr}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{-\labeldist}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Y}{\labeldist}%
- }%
- }{% ELSE E -> W
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\mess at labelposition}{t}}%
- {\def\msc at labelrefpoint{B}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{0\labeldist}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Y}{-\labeldist}%
- }%
- {\def\msc at labelrefpoint{t}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{0\labeldist}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Y}{\labeldist}%
- }%
- }
+ \IfStrEq{\msc at undefined}{false}{
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \edef\msc at anchor@l{south east}
+ \edef\msc at anchor@r{south west}
+ \edef\msc at dist{-\mscget{mark distance}}
+ } {
+ \edef\msc at dist{\mscget{mark distance}}
+ \edef\msc at anchor@l{south west}
+ \edef\msc at anchor@r{south east}
+ }
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{position}}{above}{
+ \edef\msc at mark@ydist{0.5*\mscget{mark distance}}
+ }{
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{position}}{below}{
+ \edef\msc at mark@ydist{-0.5*\mscget{mark distance}}
+ }
+ {
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{position}}{mid}{
+ \edef\msc at mark@ydist{0pt}
+ }{%unknown
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[/msc,mscdash,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, every mscmark, \msc at options]
+ (\msc at node)
+ ++(\msc at dist,\msc at mark@ydist)
+ node[anchor=\msc at anchor@l,inner sep=\mscget{label distance}, append after command={
+ (\msc at node)--
+ (\noexpand\tikzlastnode .\msc at anchor@l)--(\noexpand\tikzlastnode .\msc at anchor@r)
+ }] {#1};
}
- }{% ELSE \tmp at Xa = \tmp at Xb (self message)
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\mess at labelposition}{l}}%
- {\def\msc at labelrefpoint{r}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{-\labeldist}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Y}{0\labeldist}%
- }%
- {\def\msc at labelrefpoint{l}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{\labeldist}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Y}{0\labeldist}%
- }%
- }%
- }%
-}%
-\newcommand{\msc at labelbox}[1]{{#1}}%
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% Genralized orders
-% \order[pos]{sender}{receiver}[leveloffset][instanceoffset]
-%
-\newcommand{\order}[3][l]{%
- \def\mess at style{order}%
- \def\mess at linestyle{dashed}%
- \def\selfmess at position{#1}%
- \def\mess at labelposition{\ifx\mess at sender\mess at receiver l\else t\fi}%
- \def\mess at labeltext{\relax}%
- \def\mess at labelplacement{0.5}%
- \def\mess at sender{#2}%
- \def\mess at receiver{#3}%
- \order at B%
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \adddraw{#2}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}{\expandafter\draw\msc at tempb}
+ }{}
}
-\newcommand{\order at B}[1][\ifx\mess at sender\mess at receiver 1\else 0\fi]{%
- \edef\mess at leveloffset{#1}%
- \order at C%
+% \measure(*)[placement]{name}{instance1}{instance2}[offset]
+\def\measure{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar*{\msc at isstartrue\msc at measure@nostar}{\msc at isstarfalse\msc at measure@nostar*}
}
-\newcommand{\order at C}[1][0pt]{%
- \def\mess at instanceoffset{#1}%
- \msc at drawarrow%
+\def\msc at measure@nostar*{\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at measure@opt{\msc at measure@opt[]}}
+\def\msc at measure@opt[#1]{%parsing of [side] and [options]
+ \ifx#1l \mscset{side=left}
+ \else \ifx#1r \mscset{side=right}
+ \else
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \def\msc at options{#1}
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at measure@opt}{\msc at measure@noopt}
}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% LOST and FOUND messages
-%
-% \lost[pos]{label}[labelpos]{gate}{sender}[placement]
-% \found[pos]{label}[labelpos]{gate}{sender}[placement]
-\newcommand{\lost}[1][l]{%
- \def\lostfound at position{#1}%
- %\def\msc at arrowdirection{->}%
- \def\lostfound at type{lost}%
- \def\msc at circlefillstyle{black}%
- \lostfound at B%
+\def\msc at measure@noopt#1#2#3{
+ \def\msc at measure@name{#1}
+ \xdef\msc at instnameI{#2}
+ \xdef\msc at instnameII{#3}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at measure@final}{\msc at measure@final[\mscget{offset}]}
}
-\newcommand{\found}[1][l]{%
- \def\lostfound at position{#1}%
- %\def\msc at arrowdirection{<-}%
- \def\lostfound at type{found}%
- \def\msc at circlefillstyle{white}%
- \lostfound at B%
+
+\def\msc at measure@final[#1]{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at instnameI/no}{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at instnameII/no}{
+ \msc at getlevel shift{#1}{\msc at level shift}{\msc at drawlevel}
+ \ifmsc at isstar\def\msc at style{measure* style}\else\def\msc at style{measure style}\fi
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \edef\msc at nodeI{msc at node\msc at instnameI @l\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ \edef\msc at nodeII{msc at node\msc at instnameII @l\msc at level shift}
+ \edef\msc at dist{-\mscget{measure distance}-\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\msc at x+
+ min(\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\msc at x,\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\msc at y)}
+ \edef\msc at anchor{east}
+ } {
+ \edef\msc at nodeI{msc at node\msc at instnameI @r\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ \edef\msc at nodeII{msc at node\msc at instnameII @r\msc at level shift}
+ \edef\msc at dist{\mscget{measure distance}-\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\msc at x
+ +max(\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\msc at x,\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\msc at y)}
+ \edef\msc at anchor{west}
+ }
+ \xdef\msc at tempa{
+ \noexpand\mscgetx{(\msc at nodeI)}{\noexpand\msc at x}
+ \noexpand\mscgetx{(\msc at nodeII)}{\noexpand\msc at y}
+ \noexpand\pgfmathparse{\msc at dist}
+ \noexpand\edef\noexpand\msc at dist{\noexpand\pgfmathresult}
+ }
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[/msc,draw, mscdash,
+ \msc at style={\noexpand\msc at dist pt}{\mscget{measure symbol width}}, every measure,
+ \msc at options] (\msc at nodeI) to
+ node[/msc,anchor=\msc at anchor, inner sep=\mscget{label distance}, every measure, \msc at options]{\unexpanded\expandafter{\msc at measure@name}}
+ (\msc at nodeII);
+% \noexpand\path ($(a) !\mscget{pos}! (b)$)
+% node[/msc,anchor=\msc at anchor, inner sep=\mscget{label distance}, every measure, \msc at options]{text};
+ }
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \addDdraw{\msc at instnameI}{\msc at instnameII}{\expandafter\noexpand\msc at drawlevel}{\expandafter\noexpand\msc at tempa}
+ \addDdraw{\msc at instnameI}{\msc at instnameII}{\expandafter\noexpand\msc at drawlevel}{\expandafter\draw\msc at tempb}
+ }{
+ \msc at instundefinederr{\msc at instnameII}\end{pgfscope}
+ }
+ }{
+ \msc at instundefinederr{\msc at instnameI}\end{pgfscope}
+ }
}
-\newcommand{\lostfound at B}[1]{%
- \def\mess at style{mess}%
- \def\mess at labeltext{#1}%
- \lostfound at C%
+%\measurestart(*)[placement]{name}{instance}{gate}
+\def\measurestart{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{}
+ \def\msc at sign{}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar*{\edef\msc at style{measurestart* style}\msc at measuregap@nostar}{\edef\msc at style{measurestart style}\msc at measuregap@nostar*}
}
-\newcommand{\lostfound at C}[3][t]{%
- \def\mess at labelposition{#1}%
- \def\mess at gate{#2}%
- \def\mess at sender{#3}%
- \lostfound at D%
+% \measureend(*)[placement]{name}{instance}{gate}
+\def\measureend{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{}
+ \def\msc at sign{-1*}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar*{\edef\msc at style{measurestart* style}\msc at measuregap@nostar}{\edef\msc at style{measurestart style}\msc at measuregap@nostar*}
}
-\newcommand{\lostfound at D}[1][0.5]{%
- \def\mess at labelplacement{#1}%
- \@lostfound%
+\def\msc at measuregap@nostar*{\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at measuregap@opt{\msc at measuregap@opt[]}}
+\def\msc at measuregap@opt[#1]{%parsing of [side] and [options]
+ \ifx#1l \mscset{side=left}
+ \else \ifx#1r \mscset{side=right}
+ \else
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \def\msc at options{#1}
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at measuregap@opt}{\msc at measuregap@noopt}
}
-%
-% \@lostfound draws lost and found messages
-\def\@lostfound{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst\mess at sender}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{\mess at sender}}{% else, \mess at sender is defined
- %\setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instxpos{\mess at sender}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\lostfound at position}{l}}
- {% THEN put lost/found message left
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\lostfound at type}{lost}}%
- {% THEN
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}% start of arrow
- {\msc at instlxpos{\mess at sender}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}% end of arrow
- {\tmp at Xa-\selfmesswidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}% label position
- {\tmp at Xb + (\tmp at Xa - \tmp at Xb) * \real{\mess at labelplacement}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xc}% circle position
- {\tmp at Xb-\lostsymbolradius}%
- }{% ELSE
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}% end of arrow
- {\msc at instlxpos{\mess at sender}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}% start of arrow
- {\tmp at Xb-\selfmesswidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}% label position
- {\tmp at Xa + (\tmp at Xb - \tmp at Xa) * \real{\mess at labelplacement}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xc}% circle position
- {\tmp at Xa-\lostsymbolradius}%
- }%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xd}% gate position
- {\tmp at Xc-\lostsymbolradius-\labeldist}%
- \def\msc at gaterefpoint{r}%
- }{% ELSE, lost/found message right
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\lostfound at type}{lost}}%
- {% THEN
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}% start of arrow
- {\msc at instrxpos{\mess at sender}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}% end of arrow
- {\tmp at Xa+\selfmesswidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}% label position
- {\tmp at Xa + (\tmp at Xb - \tmp at Xa) * \real{\mess at labelplacement}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xc}% circle position
- {\tmp at Xb+\lostsymbolradius}%
- }{% ELSE
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}% end of arrow
- {\msc at instrxpos{\mess at sender}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}% start of arrow
- {\tmp at Xb+\selfmesswidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}% label position
- {\tmp at Xb + (\tmp at Xa - \tmp at Xb) * \real{\mess at labelplacement}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xc}% circle position
- {\tmp at Xa+\lostsymbolradius}%
- }%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xd}% gate position
- {\tmp at Xc+\lostsymbolradius+\labeldist}%
- \def\msc at gaterefpoint{l}%
- }%
- \psline{->}(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\mess at labelposition}{t}}%
- {% THEN
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Ya-\lostsymbolradius-\labeldist}%
- \def\msc at labelrefpoint{B}%
- }{% ELSE
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\mess at labelposition}{b}}%
- {% THEN
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Ya+\lostsymbolradius+\labeldist}%
- \def\msc at labelrefpoint{t}%
- }{% ELSE
- \msc at illegallostfoundlabelpositionerr{\mess at labelposition}%
- }%
- }%
- \rput[\msc at labelrefpoint](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){\mess at labeltext}%
- \edef\msc at scratch{\msc at circlefillstyle}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=\msc at scratch]%
- (\tmp at Xc,-\tmp at Ya){\lostsymbolradius}
- \rput[\msc at gaterefpoint](\tmp at Xd,-\tmp at Ya){\mess at gate}%
- }%
+
+\def\msc at measuregap@noopt#1#2#3{
+ \edef\msc at text{#1}
+ \gdef\msc at instname{#2}
+ \edef\msc at gate{#3}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at measuregap@final}{\msc at measuregap@final[\mscget{offset}]}
}
-%
-%
-% \settimer has one optional argument to define the position of
-% the label of a self message.
-\newcommand{\settimer}[1][l]{%
- \msc at settimerpos{#1}%
- \@timer{set}%
+
+\def\msc at measuregap@final[#1]{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at instname/no}{
+ \msc at getlevel shift{\msc at sign#1}{\msc at level shift}{\msc at drawlevel}
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \edef\msc at nodeI{msc at node\msc at instname @l\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ \edef\msc at nodeII{msc at node\msc at instname @l\msc at level shift}
+ \edef\msc at dist{-\mscget{measure distance}}
+ \edef\msc at anchor{east}
+ } {
+ \edef\msc at nodeI{msc at node\msc at instname @r\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ \edef\msc at nodeII{msc at node\msc at instname @r\msc at level shift}
+ \edef\msc at dist{\mscget{measure distance}}
+ \edef\msc at anchor{west}
+ }
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[/msc,mscdash,draw,
+ \msc at style={\msc at dist}{\mscget{measure symbol width}}, every measure,
+ \msc at options] (\msc at nodeI) to node[/msc,anchor=\msc at anchor, inner
+ sep=\mscget{label distance}, every measure, \msc at options]{\msc at text} (\msc at nodeII);
+ \noexpand\path (b) node[/msc,anchor=\msc at anchor, inner sep=\mscget{label distance}, every measure, \msc at options]{\msc at gate};
+ }
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \adddraw{\msc at instname}{\expandafter\noexpand\msc at drawlevel}{\expandafter\draw\msc at tempb}
+ }{
+ \msc at instundefinederr{\msc at instname}\end{pgfscope}
+ }
}
-%
-%
-% \timeout has one optional argument to define the position of
-% the label of a self message.
-\newcommand{\timeout}[1][l]{%
- \msc at settimerpos{#1}%
- \@timer{timeout}%
+
+% \lost[side]{name}[label position]{gate}{instance}[pos]
+\def\lost{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{}
+ \def\msc at style{lost style}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at lost@opt}{\msc at lost@opt[]}
}
-%
-%
-% \stoptimer has one optional argument to define the position of
-% the label of a self message.
-\newcommand{\stoptimer}[1][l]{%
- \msc at settimerpos{#1}%
- \@timer{stop}%
+% \found[pos]{name}[label position]{gate}{instance}[placement]
+\def\found{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{}
+ \def\msc at style{found style}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at lost@opt}{\msc at lost@opt[]}
}
-%
-%
-% \settimeout has one optional argument to define the position of
-% the label of a self message.
-\newcommand{\settimeout}[1][l]{%
- \msc at settimerpos{#1}%
- \@timerdispatcher{settimeout}%
+\def\msc at lost@opt[#1]#2{
+ \ifx#1l \mscset{side=left}
+ \else \ifx#1r \mscset{side=right}
+ \else
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \def\msc at options{#1}
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \def\msc at text{#2}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at lost@noopt}{\msc at lost@noopt[]}
}
-%
-%
-% \setstoptimer has one optional argument to define the position of
-% the label of a self message.
-\newcommand{\setstoptimer}[1][l]{%
- \msc at settimerpos{#1}%
- \@timerdispatcher{setstoptimer}%
+\def\msc at lost@noopt[#1]#2#3{
+ \mscset{label position=above}
+ \expandafter\ifx#1b \mscset{label position=below} \fi
+ \def\msc at gate{#2}
+ \xdef\msc at instname{#3}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at lost@final}{\msc at lost@final[\mscget{pos}]}
}
-\def\@timerdispatcher#1#2#3{%
- \@ifnextchar[{\@oargtimerdispatcher{#1}{#2}{#3}}{\@nooargtimerdispatcher{#1}{#2}{#3}}}
-%
-\def\@oargtimerdispatcher#1#2#3[#4]{%
- \msc at setleveloffset{#4}%
- \@timer{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-}
-%
-\def\@nooargtimerdispatcher#1#2#3{%
- \msc at setleveloffset{2}% default level-offset value for combined timers
- \@timer{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-}
-%
-%
-% \@timer draws timers
-% #1: type of the timer (set/timeout/stop)
-% #2: label
-% #3: nickname of the instance
-\def\@timer#1#2#3{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#3}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#3}}{% else, #3 is defined
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instxpos{#3}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at timerpos}{l}}{% point left of axis
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instisfat{#3}}{true}}{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instlxpos{#3}}%
- }{%
- \relax%
- }%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa-\selfmesswidth}%
- }{ % else point right of axis
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instisfat{#3}}{true}}{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instrxpos{#3}}%
- }{%
- \relax%
- }%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa+\selfmesswidth}%
- }%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{timeout}}{% draw an arrow
- \psline{<-}(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)%
- }{ % else draw a line without arrow head
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)%
- }%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xb}% This looks clumsy - sm
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Ya}%
- \msc at drawtimer{#1}{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Y}{\msc at timerpos}{#2}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{settimeout}}{% draw second part of settimeout
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\tmp at Y+\levelheight*\msc at leveloffset}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Y+0.75\timerwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instxpos{#3}}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at timerpos}{l}}{% point left of axis
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instisfat{#3}}{true}}{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instlxpos{#3}}%
- }{%
- \relax%
- }%
- }{ % else point right of axis
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instisfat{#3}}{true}}{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instrxpos{#3}}%
- }{%
- \relax%
- }%
+\def\msc at lost@final[#1]{
+ \def\msc at undefined{false}
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at instname/no}{
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node\msc at instname @l\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ } {
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node\msc at instname @r\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }
+ }{
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{pgf at sh@ns at msc@node\msc at instname}{% neither instance name nor reference node
+ \edef\msc at undefined{true}
+ \msc at instundefinederr{\msc at instname}
+ }
+ {
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node\msc at instname|-msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }
+ }
+ \IfStrEq{\msc at undefined}{false}{
+ \mscset{pos=#1}
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \edef\msc at dist{-\mscget{self message width}}
+ \edef\msc at anchor{east}
+ } {
+ \edef\msc at dist{\mscget{self message width}}
+ \edef\msc at anchor{west}
+ }
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[/msc,draw,
+ \msc at style={2*\mscget{lost symbol radius}}, every lostfound,
+ \msc at options] (\msc at node) to node[/msc,\mscget{label position}, inner
+ sep=\mscget{label distance}, every lostfound, \msc at options]{\unexpanded\expandafter{\msc at text}}
+ ++(\msc at dist,0);
+ \noexpand\path(\msc at node) ++(\msc at dist,0)
+ node[/msc,above,anchor=\msc at anchor,%
+ inner sep=\mscget{label distance}, every lostfound, \msc at options]{\msc at gate};
}
- \psline{->}(\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at X,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)%
- }{ % else not settimeout
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{setstoptimer}}{% draw second part of setstoptimer
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\tmp at Y+\levelheight*\msc at leveloffset}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Y+0.75\timerwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instxpos{#3}}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instisfat{#3}}{true}}{%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at timerpos}{l}}{% point left of axis
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instlxpos{#3}}%
- }{% point right of axis
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instrxpos{#3}}%
- }%
- }{% not a fat instance
- \relax%
- }
- \psline(\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at X,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Ya}%
- \msc at drawtimer{stop}{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Y}{\msc at timerpos}{}%
- }{ % else no second part needed
- }%
- }%
- }%
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \adddraw{\msc at instname}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}{\expandafter\draw\msc at tempb}
+ }{}
}
-%
-% \msc at drawtimer draws the timer symbols
-% #1: type of the timer (set/timeout/stop)
-% #2: x-coordinate of center of timer
-% #3: y-coordinate of center of timer
-% #4: place text left (l) or right (r)
-% #5: text added to the timer
-\def\msc at drawtimer#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{#2-0.5\timerwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{#2+0.5\timerwidth}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{stop}}{% draw reset symbol
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{-#3+0.5\timerwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{-#3-0.5\timerwidth}%
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,\tmp at Yb)%
- \psline(\tmp at Xb,\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xa,\tmp at Yb)%
- }{% else draw set/timeout symbol
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{-#3+0.75\timerwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{-#3-0.75\timerwidth}%
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,\tmp at Yb)%
- (\tmp at Xa,\tmp at Yb)(\tmp at Xb,\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xa,\tmp at Ya)%
- }%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#4}{l}}{% place label left
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{#2-\labeldist-0.3ex}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{-#3-0.5ex}%
- \rput[B](\tmp at Xa,\tmp at Ya){\makebox[0pt][r]{#5}}
- }{% else place label right
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{#2+\labeldist+0.3ex}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{-#3-0.5ex}%
- \rput[B](\tmp at Xa,\tmp at Ya){\makebox[0pt][l]{#5}}%
- }%
-}
-%
-%
-% \msc at drawinstancehead draws the head of the instance
-% #1: nickname of the instance
-\def\msc at drawinstancehead#1{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \msc at drawinstanceheadsymbol{#1}{\the\tmp at Y}%
-}
-%
-% \msc at drawinstanceheadsymbol draw the head symbol of instance #1 at y-pos #2
-\def\msc at drawinstanceheadsymbol#1#2{%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instxpos{#1}}% x-center head box
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{#2 + 0.5\instheadheight}% center of head symbol
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{-0.5\instwidth+\tmp at X}% x-upperleft head box
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{#2}% y-upperleft head box
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa+\instwidth}% x-lowerright head box
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{#2 + \instheadheight}% y-lowerright head box
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at insthead}{yes}}{%
- \psframe[dimen=middle,linestyle=\msc at instlinestyle{#1}](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }{% else, no head symbol drawing%
- }
- \rput[B](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Ya){\raisebox{\labeldist}{\makebox[0pt][c]{\msc at instabname{#1}}}}%
- \rput[B](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){\raisebox{-.5ex}{\makebox[0pt][c]{\msc at instinname{#1}}}}%
-}
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\def\msc at drawinstanceline#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instypos{#1}}{undefined}}{% y-pos undefined: no line needed
- }{% else
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at instypos{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{true}{\msc at instisfat{#1}}}%
- {% fat instance
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instlxpos{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instrxpos{#1}}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instregionstyle{#1}}{coregion}}
- {%
- \psline[linestyle=dashed](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Yb)%
- \psline[linestyle=dashed](\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }
- {\ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instregionstyle{#1}}{suspension}}
- {%
- \psline[linestyle=dashed,dash=7pt 7pt](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Yb)%
- \psline[linestyle=dashed,dash=7pt 7pt](\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }
- {\ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instregionstyle{#1}}{activation}}
- {%
- \psframe[dimen=middle,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=lightgray](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)
- \psline[linestyle=solid](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Yb)%
- \psline[linestyle=solid](\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }
- {% normal region:
- \psline[linestyle=solid](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Yb)%
- \psline[linestyle=solid](\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }
- }
- }
- }
- {% normal instance (not fat)
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instxpos{#1}}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instregionstyle{#1}}{coregion}}
- {%
- \psline[linestyle=dashed](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at X,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }
- {\ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instregionstyle{#1}}{suspension}}
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\regionbarwidth}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instxpos{#1} - 0.5\tmp at X}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instxpos{#1} + 0.5\tmp at X}%
- \psline[linestyle=dashed,dash=7pt 7pt](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Yb)%
- \psline[linestyle=dashed,dash=7pt 7pt](\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }
- {\ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instregionstyle{#1}}{activation}}
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\regionbarwidth}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instxpos{#1} - 0.5\tmp at X}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instxpos{#1} + 0.5\tmp at X}%
- \psframe[dimen=middle,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=lightgray](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)
- \psline[linestyle=solid](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Yb)%
- \psline[linestyle=solid](\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }
- {% normal region
- \psline[linestyle=\msc at instlinestyle{#1}](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at X,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }
- }
- }
- }%
- }%
- }%
-}%
-%
-% \msc at drawinstancefoot draws the last level and foot of the instance
-% #1: nickname of the instance
-\def\msc at drawinstancefoot#1{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \msc at drawinstancefootsymbol{#1}{\the\tmp at Y}%
-}
-%
-% \msc at drawinstancefootsymbol draws a footer symbol for instance #1 at y-pos #2.
-\def\msc at drawinstancefootsymbol#1#2{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{-0.5\instwidth+\msc at instxpos{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa+\instwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{#2 + \instfootheight}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instfoot}{yes}}{
- \edef\msc at scratch{\msc at instfootcolor{#1}}%
- \psframe[dimen=middle,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=\msc at scratch,linestyle=\msc at instlinestyle{#1}](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }{% else, no foot symbol drawing%
- }
-}
-%
-% \nextlevel incresaes \msc at currentheight by #1 * \levelheight
-% (optional) #1: a nonnegative integer number (defaults to 1)
-%
-\newcommand{\nextlevel}[1][1]{%
- \addtolength{\msc at currentheight}{#1\levelheight}%
-}
-%
-\def\msc at drawinstancefooters{%
- \ifthenelse{\value{tmpcnt} < \value{mscinstcnt}}{%
- % Only draw the instancefoot if the instypos is defined (not ``undefined'')
- % This signals a previous instance stop.
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instypos{\msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}}{undefined}}{\relax}{%
- \msc at drawinstanceline{\msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}%
- \msc at drawinstancefoot{\msc at instnickname{tmpcnt}}%
- }%
- \msc at incrcounter{tmpcnt}%
- \msc at drawinstancefooters}{% else nothing
- }%
-}%
-%
-% \action puts an action symbol on the instance with nickname #2.
-% The action symbol will be placed on the current level and the text #1
-% is centered inside the action symbol. The starred version adjusts the width
-% and height of the action symbol
-\def\action{\@ifstar{\msc at actionstar}{\msc at actionnostar}}
-\def\msc at actionstar#1#2{
- \setlength{\tmp at Xc}{\actionwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yc}{\actionheight}%
- \savebox{\tmp at box}{#1}
- \setlength{\actionwidth}{\wd\tmp at box + 2\labeldist}
- \setlength{\actionheight}{\ht\tmp at box + \dp\tmp at box +2\labeldist}
- \msc at actionnostar{\usebox{\tmp at box}}{#2}%
- \setlength{\actionwidth}{\tmp at Xc}%
- \setlength{\actionheight}{\tmp at Yc}%
-}
-
-\def\msc at actionnostar#1#2{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#2}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#2}}{% else, #2 is defined
- % first, draw the instance line as far as possible
- \msc at drawinstanceline{#2}%
- % then, draw the action symbol
- % if #2's bar width is greater than the action width, the width of this
- % action will be the instnce bar width.
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\msc at instbarwidth{#2}<\actionwidth}}%
- {\setlength{\tmp at X}{\actionwidth}}%
- {\setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instbarwidth{#2}}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instxpos{#2}-0.5\tmp at X}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa+\tmp at X}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\tmp at Ya+\actionheight}%
- \psframe[dimen=middle](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instxpos{#2}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Ya+0.5\actionheight}%
- \rput[B](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){\raisebox{-.5ex}{\makebox[0pt][c]{#1}}}%
- % redefine the instance's y position
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight+\actionheight}%
- \msc at setinstypos{#2}{\the\tmp at Y}%
- }%
-}
-
-%
-% \stop ends the instance with nickname #1.
-\def\stop#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#1}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#1}}{% else, #1 is defined
- % first, draw the instance line as far as possible
- \msc at drawinstanceline{#1}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\msc at currentheight}%
- % close the instance axis if it is a fat instance
- \ifthenelse{\equal{true}{\msc at instisfat{#1}}}%
- {%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instlxpos{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instrxpos{#1}}%
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Yb)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- }%
- {% else it is not fat
- }%
- % then, draw the stop symbol
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instxpos{#1}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\tmp at X-0.5\stopwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at X+0.5\stopwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\tmp at Yb+0.5\stopwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\tmp at Yb-0.5\stopwidth}%
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)%
- \psline(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Yb)%
- % redefine the instance's y position
- % ``undefined'' means that the instance axis will not be drawn any further
- \msc at setinstypos{#1}{undefined}%
- }%
-}
-%
-%
% \condition puts a condition symbol over the given instances. The
% starred version adjusts the width and the height of the condition symbol.
% #1: name to be put inside the condition symbol
% #2: comma-separated list of instance nicknames, such that:
-% - The first instance nickname is supposed to be the leftmost
+% - The first instance nickname is supposed to be the leftmost
% instance of the condition
% - The last instance nickname is supposed to be the rightmost
% instance of the condition
-\def\condition{\@ifstar{\msc at conditionstar}{\msc at conditionnostar}}
-
-\def\msc at conditionstar#1#2{
-% \message{(msc: conditionheight: \msc at conditionheight, actionheight: \msc at actionheight)}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xd}{\conditionoverlap}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yd}{\conditionheight}%
- \savebox{\tmp at box}{#1}
- \setlength{\conditionoverlap}{.5\wd\tmp at box + \labeldist}
- \setlength{\conditionheight}{\ht\tmp at box + \dp\tmp at box + 2\labeldist}
- \msc at conditionnostar{\usebox{\tmp at box}}{#2}
-% \settowidth{\conditionoverlap}{#1}%
-% \setlength{\conditionoverlap}{.5\conditionoverlap}
-% \settoheight{\conditionheight}{\rule{0pt}{\tmp at Yd-1ex} #1}%
-% \addtolength{\conditionheight}{1ex}
-% \msc at conditionnostar{#1}{#2}%
- \setlength{\conditionoverlap}{\tmp at Xd}%
- \setlength{\conditionheight}{\tmp at Yd}%
+% \condition(*)[options]{text}{instancelist}
+\def\condition{
+ \advance\c at condition by1\relax
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \edef\msc at shape{condition shape}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar*{\msc at isstartrue\msc at cond@star}{\msc at isstarfalse\msc at cond@star*}
}
-
-\def\msc at conditionnostar#1#2{
- \def\msc at conditiontext{#1}%
- \def\msc at firstconditioninst{undefined}%
- \def\msc at lastconditioninst{undefined}%
- \msc at condition{#2}%
-% debugging info:
-% \message{(msc: condition: \msc at firstconditioninst...\msc at lastconditioninst)}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instisfat{\msc at firstconditioninst}}{true}}{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instlxpos{\msc at firstconditioninst}-\conditionoverlap}%
- }{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instxpos{\msc at firstconditioninst}-\conditionoverlap}%
- }%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instisfat{\msc at lastconditioninst}}{true}}{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instrxpos{\msc at lastconditioninst}+\conditionoverlap}%
- }{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instxpos{\msc at lastconditioninst}+\conditionoverlap}%
- }%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\tmp at Ya+\conditionheight}%
- \msc at drawcondition{#1}{\tmp at Xa}{\tmp at Ya}{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Yb}%
+\def\ncondition{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \edef\msc at shape{ncondition shape}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar*{\msc at isstartrue\msc at cond@star}{\msc at isstarfalse\msc at cond@star*}
}
-%
-\def\msc at condition#1{%
- \@for\msccondition at rg:=#1\do{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst\msccondition at rg}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{\msccondition at rg}}{% else, \msccondition at rg is defined
-% debugging info:
-% \message{(msc: condition instance "\msccondition at rg")}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at firstconditioninst}{undefined}}{%
- \edef\msc at firstconditioninst{\msccondition at rg}%
- }{\ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\msc at instxpos{\msc at firstconditioninst} > \msc at instxpos{\msccondition at rg}}}{%
- \edef\msc at firstconditioninst{\msccondition at rg}}{}%
- }%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at lastconditioninst}{undefined}}{%
- \edef\msc at lastconditioninst{\msccondition at rg}%
- }{\ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\msc at instxpos{\msc at lastconditioninst} < \msc at instxpos{\msccondition at rg}}}{%
- \edef\msc at lastconditioninst{\msccondition at rg}}{}%
- }
- % now, draw the instance line as far as possible
- \msc at drawinstanceline{\msccondition at rg}%
- % \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instxpos{\msccondition at rg}}%
- % \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at instypos{\msccondition at rg}}%
- % \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\msc at currentheight+\msc at headoffset}%
- % \psline[linestyle=\msc at instlinestyle{\msccondition at rg}](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at X,-\tmp at Yb)%
- % and redefine the instance's y position
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight+\conditionheight}%
- \msc at setinstypos{\msccondition at rg}{\the\tmp at Y}%
- }%
- }%
+% \ncondition(*)[options]{text}{instancelist}
+\def\msc at cond@star*{
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at condition}{\msc at condition[]}
}
-%
-% \msc at drawcondition draw the condition symbol
-% #1: condition-text
-\def\msc at drawcondition#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xc}{#4+ .6#5 - .6#3}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yc}{.5#3 + .5#5}%
- \psline(#2,-#3)(#4,-#3)(\tmp at Xc,-\tmp at Yc)(#4,-#5)%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xc}{#2- .6#5 + .6#3}%
- \psline(#4,-#5)(#2,-#5)(\tmp at Xc,-\tmp at Yc)(#2,-#3)%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xc}{.5#2 + .5#4}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yc}{.5#3 + .5#5}%
- \rput[B](\tmp at Xc,-\tmp at Yc){\raisebox{-.5ex}{\makebox[0pt][c]{#1}}}%
+\newif\ifmsc at isfirst
+\def\msc at condition[#1]#2#3{
+ \mscset{inner sep=\mscget{label distance},#1}
+ \msc at isfirsttrue
+ \@for\msc at arg:=#3\do{%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at arg/no}{
+ \ifmsc at isfirst%first instance in the list
+ \mscgetx{(msc at node\msc at arg @l0)}{\msc at minx}
+ \mscgetx{(msc at node\msc at arg @r0)}{\msc at maxx}
+ \mscgety{(msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt)}{\msc at y}
+ \else
+ \mscgetx{(msc at node\msc at arg @r0)}{\msc at x}
+ \pgfmathparse{max(\msc at x,\msc at maxx)}
+ \edef\msc at maxx{\pgfmathresult pt}
+ \mscgetx{(msc at node\msc at arg @l0)}{\msc at x}
+ \pgfmathparse{min(\msc at x,\msc at minx)}
+ \edef\msc at minx{\pgfmathresult pt}
+ \fi
+ \msc at isfirstfalse
+ \xdef\msc at instname{\msc at arg}
+ }{
+ \msc at instundefinederr{\msc at arg}
+ }
+ }
+ \ifmsc at isfirst \else%there are proper instances
+ \pgfmathparse{2*\mscget{condition overlap}+\msc at maxx-\msc at minx}
+ \edef\msc at width{\pgfmathresult pt}
+ \ifmsc at isstar
+ \def\msc at tempr{}
+ \else
+ %\msc at savebox{\parbox{\msc at width}{#2}}
+ \edef\msc at tempr{%text depth={\the\dp\msc at box},
+ % text height={{\the\ht\msc at box+\the\dp\msc at box}},
+ align=center, text width=\msc at width-2*\mscget{label distance},}
+ \fi
+ \def\aa{aeee}
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[/msc, draw, anchor=north,shape=\msc at shape,
+ \msc at tempr
+ inner sep=\mscget{label distance},
+ minimum height=\mscget{condition height},
+ minimum width=\msc at width,
+ every condition,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, #1](msc at condition@\the\c at condition)
+ at ({(\msc at maxx+\msc at minx)/2},\msc at y) {\unexpanded\expandafter{#2}};
+ }
+ \fi
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \adddraw{\msc at instname}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}{\expandafter\node\msc at tempb }
+ \@for\msc at args:=#3\do{%
+ \edef\msc at tempa{\noexpand\mscgety{(msc at condition@\the\c at condition.south)}{\noexpand\msc at y}
+ \noexpand\msc at setlastlevel{\msc at args}{\noexpand\msc at y}}
+% \show\msc at tempa
+ \adddraw{\msc at args}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}{\msc at tempa}
+ }
}
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% GATES
-% \gate[hpos][vpos]{text}{nickname}[h-offset]
-% \gate*[hpos][vpos]{text}{nickname}[h-offset]
-% (starred version puts a dot at the position of the gate on the instance line)
-%
-% hpos: optional horizontal position argument l(eft) or r(ight). default: l
-% vpos: optional vertical position argument t(op), c(enter) or b(ottom). default: t
-% text: text to be placed at the gate
-% nickname: nickname of the instance to which the gate belongs
-%
-\def\gate{\@ifstar{\def\msc at gatestar{defined}\msc at gateh}{\def\msc at gatestar{undefined}\msc at gateh}}
-\newcommand{\msc at gateh}[1][l]{%
- \def\msc at gatehpos{#1}%
- \msc at gatev%
+% \order[side]{sender}{receiver}[level shift]
+\def\order{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at order@opt}{\msc at order@opt[]}
}
-%
-\newcommand{\msc at gatev}[3][t]{%
- \msc at gate{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+\def\msc at order@opt[#1]{
+ \ifx#1l \mscset{side=left}
+ \else \ifx#1r \mscset{side=right}
+ \else
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \def\msc at options{#1}
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at order@opt}{\msc at order@noopt}
}
-%
-\def\msc at gate#1#2#3{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#3}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#3}}{% else, #3 is defined
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at instisfat{#3}}{true}}
- {\ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at gatehpos}{l}}
- {\setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instlxpos{#3}}}
- {\setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instrxpos{#3}}}
- }%
- {\setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instxpos{#3}}}
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at gatestar}{defined}}{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){.5mm}}{}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{t}{#1}}{
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight - \labeldist}%
- \def\msc at gatetext{{#2}}%
- }{%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{c}{#1}}{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \def\msc at gatetext{\raisebox{-.5\totalheight}{#2}}%
- }{%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight + \labeldist}%
- \def\msc at gatetext{\raisebox{-\totalheight}{#2}}%
- }}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{l}{\msc at gatehpos}}{%
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{-\labeldist}%
- \rput[B](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){\makebox[0pt][r]{\msc at gatetext}}}%
- {%
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{\labeldist}%
- \rput[B](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){\makebox[0pt][l]{\msc at gatetext}}%
- }%
+\def\msc at order@noopt#1#2{
+ \xdef\msc at sender{#1}
+ \xdef\msc at receiver{#2}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at order}{\msc at order[\mscget{level shift}]}
+}
+\def\msc at order[#1]{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at receiver/no}{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/\msc at sender/no}{
+ \msc at getlevel shift{#1}{\msc at level shift}{\msc at tempa}
+ \ifx\msc at sender\msc at receiver %self message
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \def\msc at dir{l}
+ \edef\msc at dist{-\mscget{self message width}}
+ }{
+ \def\msc at dir{r}
+ \edef\msc at dist{\mscget{self message width}}
+ }
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[/msc, order loop={\msc at dist},
+ every order, \msc at options]
+ (msc at node\msc at sender @\msc at dir\the\c at msclevelcnt) to
+ (msc at node\msc at receiver @\msc at dir\msc at level shift);
+ }
+ \else
+ \ifnum\mscget{instance/\msc at sender/no}\expandafter<\mscget{instance/\msc at receiver/no}\relax
+ \def\msc at ldir{r}
+ \def\msc at rdir{l}
+ \else
+ \def\msc at ldir{l}
+ \def\msc at rdir{r}
+ \fi
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[/msc,order,every order,\msc at options]
+ (msc at node\msc at sender @\msc at ldir\the\c at msclevelcnt) to
+ (msc at node\msc at receiver @\msc at rdir\msc at level shift);
+ }
+ \fi
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \addDdraw{\msc at sender}{\msc at receiver}{\msc at tempa}{\expandafter\draw\msc at tempb}
+ }{\msc at instundefinederr{\msc at sender}\end{pgfscope}}
+ }{\msc at instundefinederr{\msc at receiver}\end{pgfscope}}
+}
+
+% update the lastlevel for a given instance
+% #1 name of the instance
+% #2 level number
+\def\msc at updatelastlevel#1#2{
+ \msc at StrEqEither{#1}{envright}{envleft} {}{
+ \path let \p1 = (msc at lastlevel#1), \p2 = (msc at level#2)
+ in coordinate (msc at lastlevel#1) at (\x1,{min(\y1,\y2)});
}
}
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% MSC COMMENTS
-%
-%
-% \msccomment[#1]{#2}{#3}
-% #1: position l/r or a distance
-% #2: text
-% #3: instance nick name
-\newcommand{\msccomment}[3][l]{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#3}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#3}}
- {% else, #3 is defined
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{l}}%
- {\setlength{\msc at commentdist}{-\msccommentdist}}%
- {\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{r}}%
- {\setlength{\msc at commentdist}{\msccommentdist}}%
- {\setlength{\msc at commentdist}{#1}}%
- }
- \savebox{\tmp at box}{\raisebox{\depth}[\totalheight][0pt]{#2}}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\tmp at Y + .5\ht\tmp at box}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Ya}{\labeldist}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\tmp at Y - .5\ht\tmp at box}%
- \addtolength{\tmp at Yb}{-\labeldist}%
-% \message{( a: \the\tmp at Ya, b: \the\tmp at Yb)}
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\msc at commentdist < 0pt}}%
- {% comment left from instance #3
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instlxpos{#3}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\tmp at X + \msc at commentdist}
- \psline(\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Y)
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Yb)
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\wd\tmp at box}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa - \tmp at Xb}
- \addtolength{\tmp at Xb}{-\labeldist}
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Yb)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)
- \addtolength{\tmp at Xa}{-\labeldist}
- \rput[r](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Y){#2}%
- }%
- {% comment right from instance #3
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instrxpos{#3}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\tmp at X + \msc at commentdist}
- \psline(\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Y)
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Yb)
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\wd\tmp at box}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa + \tmp at Xb}
- \addtolength{\tmp at Xb}{\labeldist}
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)
- \psline(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Yb)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)
- \addtolength{\tmp at Xa}{\labeldist}
- \rput[l](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Y){\usebox{\tmp at box}}
- }%
- }%
+% set the lastlevel for a given instance
+% #1 name of the instance
+% #2 new height
+\def\msc at setlastlevel#1#2{
+ \msc at StrEqEither{#1}{envright}{envleft} {}{
+ \draw let \p1 = (msc at lastlevel#1) in coordinate (msc at lastlevel#1)
+ at (\x1,{min(\y1,#2)});
+ }
}
-%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
-% MSC MARKS
+% CO-REGIONS
%
-% \mark[#1]{#2}{#3}
-% #1: placement: tl,bl,tr,br
-% #2: text
-% #3: instance nick name
+% \coregionstart starts a coregion on instance #1 (nickname) in the current level.
+\def\coregionstart{\pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at coreg}{\msc at coreg[]}}
+\def\msc at coreg[#1]#2{
+ \regionstart[#1]{coregion}{#2}}
+% \coregionend ends a coregion on instance #1 (nickname) in the current level.
+\def\coregionend#1{\regionend{#1}}%
%
-\newcommand{\mscmark}[3][tl]{%
- \expandafter\@ifundefined{mscinst#3}{%
- \msc at instundefinederr{#3}}
- {% else, #3 is defined
- \savebox{\tmp at box}{\raisebox{\depth}[\totalheight][0pt]{#2}}
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{tl}}
- {%tl:
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instlxpos{#3}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\tmp at X - \markdist}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa - \wd\tmp at box - 2\labeldist}
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight - .5\markdist}
- \psline[linestyle=dashed](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa - \labeldist - .5\wd\tmp at box}
- \addtolength{\tmp at Ya}{-\labeldist}
- \rput[b](\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya){\usebox{\tmp at box}}
- }{
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{bl}}
- {%bl:
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instlxpos{#3}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\tmp at X - \markdist}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa - \wd\tmp at box - 2\labeldist}
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight + .5\markdist}
- \psline[linestyle=dashed](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa - \labeldist - .5\wd\tmp at box}
- \addtolength{\tmp at Ya}{-\labeldist}
- \rput[b](\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya){\usebox{\tmp at box}}
- }{
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{tr}}
- {%tr:
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instrxpos{#3}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\tmp at X + \markdist}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa + \wd\tmp at box + 2\labeldist}
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight - .5\markdist}
- \psline[linestyle=dashed](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa + \labeldist + .5\wd\tmp at box}
- \addtolength{\tmp at Ya}{-\labeldist}
- \rput[b](\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya){\usebox{\tmp at box}}
- }{
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{br}}
- {%br:
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\msc at instrxpos{#3}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\tmp at X + \markdist}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa + \wd\tmp at box + 2\labeldist}
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\msc at currentheight}
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight + .5\markdist}
- \psline[linestyle=dashed](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y)(\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa + \labeldist + .5\wd\tmp at box}
- \addtolength{\tmp at Ya}{-\labeldist}
- \rput[b](\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya){\usebox{\tmp at box}}
- }{
- \msc at illegalmarkplacement{#1}
- }}}}}
-}
-%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
-% MSC MEASURES
+% REGIONS (normal, coregion, suspension, and activation)
%
%
-\newlength{\msc at measuredist}% internal length for horizontal measure distance
-% \measure[*][#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}[#5]
-% *: the starred version puts the top measure mark above and the bottom measure mark
-% below the measure position.
-% #1: placement: l (left) r (right), or distance (negative or positive) to closest of #3 or #4
-% #2: name
-% #3: instance nick name
-% #4: instance nick name
-% #5: (vertical) offset
-\newcommand{\measure}{%
- \@ifstar{\def\msc at innermeasure{false}\msc at measureargs}
- {\def\msc at innermeasure{true}\msc at measureargs}%
-}
-%
-\newcommand{\msc at measureargs}[4][l]{%
- \def\msc at i{#1}%
- \def\msc at ii{#2}%
- \def\msc at iii{#3}%
- \def\msc at iv{#4}%
- \msc at measureoffset%
-}
-\newcommand{\msc at measureoffset}[1][1]{%
- \def\msc at mscv{#1}%
- \msc at measure{\msc at i}{\msc at ii}{\msc at iii}{\msc at iv}{\msc at mscv}
+% define the begining of a region on the instance line
+%\regionstart[options]{type}{instname}
+% instance/#2/region/.initial=line, %possible % values:normal,coregion,suspension,activation
+\def\regionstart{\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at regionstart{\msc at regionstart[]}}
+\def\msc at regionstart[#1]#2#3{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \xdef\msc at tempa{\mscget{region width}}
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/#3/no}{
+ \msc at StrEqEither{\mscget{instance/#3/region}}{normal}{seminormal}{
+ \msc at drawinstanceline{#2}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ \IfEqCase{#2} {{coregion}{} {activation}{} {suspension}{}}
+ [\msc at unknownregionstyleerr{#2}]
+ \mscset{instance/#3/region={#2},
+ instance/#3/region level/.expand once={\the\c at msclevelcnt},
+ instance/#3/region width/.expand once=\msc at tempa}%
+ \msc at regbar{#3}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }
+ {msc at regionstartederr{#3}{\mscget{instance/#3/region}}}
+ }
+ {\msc at instundefinederr{#3}}
}
-
-\newcommand{\msc at measure}[5]{%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{l}}
- {\setlength{\msc at measuredist}{-\measuredist}}
- {\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{r}}
- {\setlength{\msc at measuredist}{\measuredist}}
- {\setlength{\msc at measuredist}{#1}}}
- %
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight}
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\tmp at Ya + #5\levelheight}
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{.5\tmp at Ya + .5\tmp at Yb}
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\msc at instxpos{#3} < \msc at instxpos{#4}}}
- {%
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\msc at measuredist < 0pt}}
- {% left from instances
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instlxpos{#3}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instlxpos{#4}}
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xa + \msc at measuredist}
+%helper function to draw region horizontal bar(s)
+% #1 instname
+% #2 level
+\def\msc at regbar#1#2{
+ \xdef\msc at temp@body{}
+ \edef\msc at region{\mscget{instance/#1/region}}
+ \pgfpointanchor{msc at level#2}{center}
+ \edef\msc at regbar@tempb{\the\pgf at y}
+ \pgfpointanchor{msc at lastlevel#1}{center}
+ \pgfmathparse{\msc at regbar@tempb-\the\pgf at y}
+ \ifnum0<\pgfmathresult\relax
+ \else
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{instance/#1/type}}{fat}{
+ \IfStrEq{\msc at region}{coregion}{
+ \xdef\msc at temp@body{
+ [/msc,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, draw, every region,every
+ coregion] let \noexpand\p1=(msc at node#1 at l#2) in
+ (\noexpand\x1-\mscget{instance/#1/region width}/2-\mscget{line width}/2,\noexpand\y1) --
+ (\noexpand\x1+\mscget{instance/#1/region width}/2+\mscget{line
+ width}/2,\noexpand\y1);
+ \noexpand\draw [/msc,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, every region,every
+ coregion] let \noexpand\p1=(msc at node#1 at r#2) in
+ (\noexpand\x1-\mscget{instance/#1/region width}/2-\mscget{line width}/2,\noexpand\y1) --
+ (\noexpand\x1+\mscget{instance/#1/region width}/2+\mscget{line width}/2,\noexpand\y1);
}
- {% right from instances
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instrxpos{#3}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instrxpos{#4}}
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xb + \msc at measuredist}
+ }{
+ \xdef\msc at temp@body{
+ [/msc,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, draw, every region,every \msc at region] let
+ \noexpand\p1=(msc at node#1 at l#2), \noexpand\p2=(msc at node#1 at r#2) in
+ (\noexpand\x1-\mscget{line width}/2,\noexpand\y1)--(\noexpand\x2+\mscget{line width}/2,\noexpand\y2);
}
}
- {%
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\msc at measuredist < 0pt}}
- {% left from instances
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instlxpos{#3}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instlxpos{#4}}
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xb + \msc at measuredist}
+ }{
+ \IfStrEq{\msc at region}{coregion}{
+ \xdef\msc at temp@body{
+ [/msc,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, draw, every region,every coregion] let
+ \noexpand\p1=(msc at node#1 at l#2) in
+ (\noexpand\x1-\mscget{instance/#1/region width}/2-\mscget{line width}/2,\noexpand\y1) --
+ (\noexpand\x1+\mscget{instance/#1/region width}/2+\mscget{line width}/2,\noexpand\y1);
}
- {% right from instances
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instrxpos{#3}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\msc at instrxpos{#4}}
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xa + \msc at measuredist}
+ }{
+ \xdef\msc at temp@body{
+ [/msc,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, draw, every region, every \msc at region]
+ let
+ \noexpand\p1=(msc at node#1 at l#2), \noexpand\p2=(msc at node#1 at r#2) in
+ (\noexpand\x1-\mscget{line width}/2,\noexpand\y1)--(\noexpand\x2+\mscget{line width}/2,\noexpand\y2);
}
}
- \psline[linestyle=dashed](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at X,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at X,-\tmp at Yb)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\msc at measuredist < 0pt}}
- {% left from instances
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{-\labeldist}
- \rput[r](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){\raisebox{\depth}[\totalheight][0pt]{#2}}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{\labeldist}
+ }
+% \show\msc at temp@body
+ \adddraw{#1}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}{\expandafter\path\msc at temp@body}
+ \adddraw{#1}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}{\mscgety{(msc at lastlevel#1)}{\msc at yo}\msc at setlastlevel{#1}{\msc at yo-\mscget{line width}/2}}
+ \fi
+}
+% draw the instance line with the region
+% #1 instname
+% #2 level
+\def\msc at regbody#1#2{
+ \xdef\msc at temp@body{;}
+ \pgfpointanchor{msc at level#2}{center}
+ \edef\msc at regbody@tempb{\the\pgf at y}
+ \pgfpointanchor{msc at lastlevel#1}{center}
+ \pgfmathparse{\msc at regbody@tempb-\the\pgf at y}
+ \ifnum0<\pgfmathresult\relax
+ \else
+ \IfEqCase{\mscget{instance/#1/region}}{
+ {coregion}{
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{instance/#1/type}}{fat}{
+ \xdef\msc at temp@body{
+ [/msc,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, draw, mscdash, every region, every coregion]
+ let \noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\p1=(msc at node#1 at r#2), \noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\p2=(msc at lastlevel#1) in
+ (\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\x1,\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\y2)--
+ (\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\x1,{min(\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\y2,\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\y1)});
+ }
+ }{\xdef\msc at temp@body{;}}
+ \xdef\msc at temp@body{
+ [/msc,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, draw, mscdash, every region, every coregion]
+ let \noexpand\p1=(msc at node#1 at l#2), \noexpand\p2=(msc at lastlevel#1) in
+ (\noexpand\x1,\noexpand\y2)--(\noexpand\x1,{min(\noexpand\y2,\noexpand\y1)});\noexpand\path\msc at temp@body
+ }
+ }%
+ {activation}{
+ \xdef\msc at temp@body{
+ [/msc,fill=lightgray,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},every region, every activation]
+ (msc at node#1 at l#2|-msc at lastlevel#1) rectangle(msc at node#1 at r#2);
+ \noexpand\draw[/msc,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},every region, every activation]
+ (msc at node#1 at l#2) -- (msc at node#1 at l#2|-msc at lastlevel#1)
+ (msc at node#1 at r#2) -- (msc at node#1 at r#2|-msc at lastlevel#1);
+ }
+ }%
+ {suspension}{
+ \xdef\msc at temp@body{
+ [/msc,draw,suspension dash,
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},every region, every activation]
+ (msc at node#1 at r#2)--(msc at node#1 at r#2|-msc at lastlevel#1)
+ (msc at node#1 at l#2)--(msc at node#1 at l#2|-msc at lastlevel#1);
+ }
+ }%
+ }[]
+ \adddraw{#1}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}{\expandafter\path\msc at temp@body}
+ \fi
+}
+% define the end of region
+%\regionend{instname}
+\def\regionend#1{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/#1/no}{
+ \edef\msc at region{\mscget{instance/#1/region}}
+ \IfStrEq{\msc at region}{normal}{
+ \msc at regionnotstartederr{#1}
+ }
+ \msc at regbody{#1}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ \msc at regbar{#1}{\mscget{instance/#1/region level}}
+ \msc at regbar{#1}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ \adddraw{#1}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}{\msc at updatelastlevel{#1}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}}
+ \msc at StrEqEither{\msc at region}{suspension}{activation}{
+ \mscset{instance/#1/region=seminormal}
+ }{\mscset{instance/#1/region=normal}}
+ }
+ {
+ \msc at instundefinederr{#1}
+ }
+}
+%macro stores first character in \msc at fst and last character in \msc at lst
+\def\msc at fl#1{\msc at flx#1\empty\empty\empty}
+\def\msc at flx#1#2#3\empty{%
+\edef\msc at fst{#1}%
+ \edef\msc at cdar{#2}%
+ \edef\msc at cddr{#3}%
+ \ifx\msc at cddr\empty
+ \let\msc at lst\msc at cdar
+ \else
+ \expandafter\msc at flxx
+ \fi
+ #3}
+\def\msc at flxx#1#2\empty{%
+ \edef\msc at car{#1}%
+ \ifx\msc at car\empty
+ \else
+ \let\msc at lst\msc at car
+ \expandafter\msc at flxx
+ \fi
+ #2\empty}
+%\referencestart[options][lo][ro]{nickname}{text}{leftinstance}{rightinstance}
+\def\referencestart{
+ \begin{pgfscope}\gdef\msc at options{}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at refstartlo{\msc at refstartloro}}
+\def\msc at refstartloro{
+ \edef\msc at lo{\mscget{left reference overlap}}
+ \edef\msc at ro{\mscget{right reference overlap}}
+ \msc at refstart
+}
+\def\msc at refstartlo[#1]{
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\msc at fl\expandafter{#1}
+ \msc at caseFiveEither{\msc at fst}{1}{2}{3}{4}{5}{
+ \edef\msc at lo{#1} \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at refstartro{\msc at refstartro[\mscget{right reference overlap}]}
+ }{
+ \msc at caseFiveEither{\msc at fst}{6}{7}{8}{9}{0}{
+ \edef\msc at lo{#1} \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at refstartro{\msc at refstartro[\mscget{right reference overlap}]}
+ }{
+ \msc at StrEqEither{\msc at fst}{-}{.}{
+ \edef\msc at lo{#1} \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at refstartro{\msc at refstartro[\mscget{right reference overlap}]}
+ }{
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \xdef\msc at options{#1}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at refstartlo{\msc at refstartloro}
}
- {% right from instances
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{\labeldist}
- \rput[l](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){\raisebox{\depth}[\totalheight][0pt]{#2}}
- \addtolength{\tmp at X}{-\labeldist}
+ }
+ }
+}
+\def\msc at refstartro[#1]{
+ \edef\msc at ro{#1}\msc at refstart
+}
+\def\msc at refstart#1#2#3#4{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/#3/no}{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/#4/no}{
+ \path[draw] (msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt-|msc at node#3 at l0) ++(-\msc at lo,0) coordinate
+ (msc at node#1left)
+ (msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt-|msc at node#4 at r0) ++(\msc at ro,0) coordinate
+ (msc at node#1right);
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \msc at cover{#3}{#4}{+}
+ \mscset{
+ reference/#1/options/.style/.expanded=\msc at options,
+ reference/#1/left/.initial=#3,
+ reference/#1/text/.initial={#2},
+ reference/#1/right/.initial=#4
}
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at innermeasure}{true}}
- {%
- \msc at measuresymbolup{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Ya}
- \msc at measuresymboldown{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Yb}
- }
- {%
- \msc at measuresymboldown{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Ya}
- \msc at measuresymbolup{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Yb}
- }
+ }{
+ \end{pgfscope}\msc at instundefinederr{#4}
+ }
+ }{
+ \end{pgfscope}\msc at instundefinederr{#3}
+ }
}
-%
-%
-% \measurestart[*][#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}
-% *: unstarred/starred version draws downward/upward triangle
-% #1: placement: l (left) r (right), or distance (negative or positive) to #3
-% #2: name
-% #3: instance nick name
-% #4: gate name
-\newcommand{\measurestart}{%
- \@ifstar{\def\msc at innermeasure{false}\msc at measurestartargs}
- {\def\msc at innermeasure{true}\msc at measurestartargs}
+\def\msc at cover#1#2#3{
+ \pgfmathparse{\mscget{instance/#2/cover} #3 1}
+ \mscset{instance/#2/cover/.expand once=\pgfmathresult}
+ \IfStrEq{#1}{#2}{}{
+ \ifnum0<\mscget{instance/\msc at inst@name/no}
+ \msc at previousinstance{#2}
+ \msc at cover{#1}{\msc at inst@name}{#3}
+ \msc at regbody{\msc at inst@name}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ \else
+ \fi
+ }
}
-%
-%
-\newcommand{\msc at measurestartargs}[4][l]{%
- \def\msc at i{#1}%
- \def\msc at ii{#2}%
- \def\msc at iii{#3}%
- \def\msc at iv{#4}%
- \msc at measurestartoffset%
-}
+\def\referenceend#1{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/reference/#1/left}{%calculating framearch
+ \mscgetx{(msc at node#1left)}{\msc at xa}
+ \mscgetx{(msc at node#1right)}{\msc at xb}
+ \mscgety{(msc at node#1left)}{\msc at yb}
+ \mscgety{(msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt)}{\msc at ya}
+ \pgfmathparse{0.25/2 *min(\msc at xb-\msc at xa,\msc at yb-\msc at ya)}
+ \edef\msc at tempa{\pgfmathresult}
+ \msc at cover{\mscget{reference/#1/left}}{\mscget{reference/#1/right}}{-}
+ \node[/msc,fit={(msc at node#1left) (msc at node#1right)
+ (msc at node#1right|-msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt)},
+ draw,rectangle, rounded corners=\msc at tempa pt, inner sep=0,/tikz/line
+ width=\mscget{line width},every reference,
+ /msc/reference/#1/options
+ ]{\mscget{reference/#1/text}};
+ }{
+ \msc at refundefinederr{#1}
+ }
+}
+%\inlinestart[options][lo][ro]{nickname}{text}{leftinstance}{rightinstance}
+\def\inlinestart{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \gdef\msc at options{}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at inlstartlo{\msc at inlstartloro}
+}
+\def\msc at inlstartloro{
+ \edef\msc at lo{\mscget{left inline overlap}}
+ \edef\msc at ro{\mscget{right inline overlap}}
+ \msc at inlstart
+}
-\newcommand{\msc at measurestartoffset}[1][2]{%
- \msc at measurestart{\msc at i}{\msc at ii}{\msc at iii}{\msc at iv}{#1}%
+\def\msc at inlstartlo[#1]{
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\msc at fl\expandafter{#1}
+ \msc at caseFiveEither{\msc at fst}{1}{2}{3}{4}{5}{
+ \edef\msc at lo{#1}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at inlstartro{\msc at inlstartro[\mscget{right inline overlap}]}
+ }{
+ \msc at caseFiveEither{\msc at fst}{6}{7}{8}{9}{0}{
+ \edef\msc at lo{#1} \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at inlstartro{\msc at inlstartro[\mscget{right inline overlap}]}
+ }{
+ \msc at StrEqEither{\msc at fst}{-}{.}{
+ \edef\msc at lo{#1}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at inlstartro{\msc at inlstartro[\mscget{right inline overlap}]}
+ }{
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \xdef\msc at options{#1}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at inlstartlo{\msc at inlstartloro}
+ }
+ }
+ }
}
-%
-\newcommand{\msc at measurestart}[5]{%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{l}}
- {\setlength{\msc at measuredist}{-\measuredist}}
- {\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{r}}
- {\setlength{\msc at measuredist}{\measuredist}}
- {\setlength{\msc at measuredist}{#1}}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight}
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\msc at measuredist < 0pt}}
- {% left from instance
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instlxpos{#3}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa + \msc at measuredist}
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\tmp at Ya + #5\levelheight}
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xb - \labeldist - 0.5\measuresymbolwidth}
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{.5\tmp at Ya + .5\tmp at Yb}
- \rput[r](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){\raisebox{\depth}[\totalheight][0pt]{#2}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Yb + \labeldist}
- \rput[r](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Yb){\raisebox{\depth}[\totalheight][0pt]{#4}}
+\def\msc at inlstartro[#1]{
+ \edef\msc at ro{#1}\msc at inlstart
+}
+%msc at inlstart{nickname}{text}{leftinstance}{rightinstance}
+\def\msc at inlstart#1#2#3#4{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/#3/no}{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/#4/no}{
+ \path[draw] (msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt-|msc at node#3 at l0) ++(-\msc at lo,0) coordinate
+ (msc at node#1left)
+ (msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt-|msc at node#4 at r0) ++(\msc at ro,0) coordinate
+ (msc at node#1right);
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \mscset{
+ inline/#1/options/.style/.expanded=\msc at options,
+ inline/#1/left/.initial={#3},
+ inline/#1/text/.initial={#2}
+ }
+ }{
+ \end{pgfscope}\msc at instundefinederr{#4}
}
- {% right from instance
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instrxpos{#3}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa + \msc at measuredist}
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\tmp at Ya + #5\levelheight}
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xb + \labeldist + 0.5\measuresymbolwidth}
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{.5\tmp at Ya + .5\tmp at Yb}
- \rput[l](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){\raisebox{\depth}[\totalheight][0pt]{#2}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Yb + \labeldist}
- \rput[l](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Yb){\raisebox{\depth}[\totalheight][0pt]{#4}}
- }
- \psline[linestyle=dashed](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at innermeasure}{true}}
- {\msc at measuresymbolup{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Ya}}
- {\msc at measuresymboldown{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Ya}}
- \rput(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb){\pscircle[fillcolor=white,fillstyle=solid](0,0){.5\measuresymbolwidth}}
- }
-%
-% \measureend[*][#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}
-% *: unstarred/starred version draws upward/downward triangle
-% #1: placement: l (left) r (right), or distance (negative or positive) to #3
-% #2: name
-% #3: instance nick name
-% #4: gate name
-\newcommand{\measureend}{%
- \@ifstar{\def\msc at innermeasure{false}\msc at measureendargs}%
- {\def\msc at innermeasure{true}\msc at measureendargs}%
+ }{
+ \end{pgfscope}\msc at instundefinederr{#3}
+ }
}
-%
-\newcommand{\msc at measureendargs}[4][l]{%
- \def\msc at i{#1}%
- \def\msc at ii{#2}%
- \def\msc at iii{#3}%
- \def\msc at iv{#4}%
- \msc at measureendoffset%
-}
-%
-\newcommand{\msc at measureendoffset}[1][2]{%
- \msc at measureend{\msc at i}{\msc at ii}{\msc at iii}{\msc at iv}{#1}%
+%\inlineseparator[options]{nickname}
+\def\inlineseparator{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at inlseparator{\msc at inlseparator[]}
}
-%
-\newcommand{\msc at measureend}[5]{%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{l}}
- {\setlength{\msc at measuredist}{-\measuredist}}
- {\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{r}}
- {\setlength{\msc at measuredist}{\measuredist}}
- {\setlength{\msc at measuredist}{#1}}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{\msc at currentheight}
- \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\msc at measuredist < 0pt}}
- {% left from instance
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instlxpos{#3}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa + \msc at measuredist}
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\tmp at Ya - #5\levelheight}
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xb - \labeldist - 0.5\measuresymbolwidth}
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{.5\tmp at Ya + .5\tmp at Yb}
- \rput[r](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){\raisebox{\depth}[\totalheight][0pt]{#2}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Yb - \labeldist}
- \rput[r](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Yb){\raisebox{\depth}[\totalheight][0pt]{#4}}
+\def\msc at inlseparator[#1]#2{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/inline/#2/left}{
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \path[/msc,draw, mscdash,
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},
+ dash phase=2pt,
+ every inline,inline/#2/options,#1]
+ (msc at node#2left|-msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt)--(msc at node#2right|-msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt);
+ }{
+ \msc at inlundefinederr{#2}
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ }
+}
+%\inlineend{nickname}
+\def\inlineend{
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar*{\msc at isstartrue\msc at inlineend}{\msc at isstarfalse\msc at inlineend*}
+}
+\def\msc at inlineend*#1{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/inline/#1/text}{
+ \path[/msc,draw,
+ /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},
+ every inline,inline/#1/options]
+ (msc at node#1left) node[/msc,draw,chamfered rectangle,
+ chamfered rectangle corners=south east,
+ chamfered rectangle xsep=\mscget{label distance}/2,
+ chamfered rectangle ysep=\mscget{label distance}/2,
+ inner sep=\mscget{label distance}/4,
+ xshift=-\mscget{line width}/2, yshift=\mscget{line width}/2,
+ anchor=north west,inline/#1/options](a)
+ {\mscget{inline/#1/text}}
+ (msc at node#1left|-msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt)++(0,-\mscget{line width}/2)
+ --(msc at node#1left)--(msc at node#1right)--
+ (msc at node#1right|-msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt)--++(0,-\mscget{line width}/2);
+ \ifmsc at isstar
+ \inlineseparator{#1}
+ \else
+ \inlineseparator[solid]{#1}
+ \fi
+ }{
+ \msc at refundefinederr{#1}
+ }
+}
+%\gate(*)[options][hpos][vpos]{gatename}{instname}
+\def\gate{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \def\msc at options{}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar*{\msc at isstartrue\msc at gate@star}{\msc at isstarfalse\msc at gate@star*}
+}
+\def\msc at gate@star*{
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at gate@opt}{\msc at gate@opt[]}
+}
+\def\msc at gate@opt[#1]{
+ \IfStrEq{#1}{l}{\mscset{side=left} \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at gate{\msc at gate[]}
+ }{
+ \IfStrEq{#1}{r}{\mscset{side=right}\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at gate{\msc at gate[]}
+ }{
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \def\msc at options{#1}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at gate@opt{\msc at gate[]}
}
- {% right from instance
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\msc at instrxpos{#3}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa + \msc at measuredist}
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\tmp at Ya - #5\levelheight}
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\tmp at Xb + \labeldist + 0.5\measuresymbolwidth}
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{.5\tmp at Ya + .5\tmp at Yb}
- \rput[l](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y){\raisebox{\depth}[\totalheight][0pt]{#2}}
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\tmp at Yb - \labeldist}
- \rput[l](\tmp at X,-\tmp at Yb){\raisebox{\depth}[\totalheight][0pt]{#4}}
- }
- \psline[linestyle=dashed](\tmp at Xa,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb)
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at innermeasure}{true}}
- {\msc at measuresymboldown{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Ya}}
- {\msc at measuresymbolup{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Ya}}
- \rput(\tmp at Xb,-\tmp at Yb){\pscircle[fillcolor=white,fillstyle=solid](0,0){.5\measuresymbolwidth}}
- }
-%
-% measure symbols
-%
-\def\msc at measuresymbolup#1#2{%
- % sin(pi/3) =~ 0.866025403784
- % draw an upward triangle with 60-degree (pi/3) angles and base at (#1,#2)
- \rput[t](#1,-#2){%
- \begin{pspicture}(-1,0)(1,0.866025403784\measuresymbolwidth)%
- \pstriangle[dimen=middle,fillcolor=white,fillstyle=solid](\measuresymbolwidth,0.866025403784\measuresymbolwidth)%
- \end{pspicture}%
}
}
-%
-\def\msc at measuresymboldown#1#2{%
- % sin(pi/3) =~ 0.866025403784
- % draw a downward triangle with 60-degree (pi/3) angles and base at (#1,#2)
- \rput[b](#1,-#2){%
- \begin{pspicture}(-1,0)(1,-0.866025403784\measuresymbolwidth)%
- \pstriangle[dimen=middle,fillcolor=white,fillstyle=solid](\measuresymbolwidth,-0.866025403784\measuresymbolwidth)%
- \end{pspicture}%
+\def\msc at gate[#1]#2#3{
+ \def\msc at undefined{false}
+ \ifx#1c \mscset{position=mid} \else
+ \ifx#1b \mscset{position=below} \else
+ \ifx#1t \mscset{position=above} \fi \fi \fi
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/#3/no}{%instance name
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{side}}{left}{
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node#3 at l\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }{
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node#3 at r\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }
+ }{
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{pgf at sh@ns at msc@node#3}{% neither instance name nor reference node
+ \def\msc at undefined{true}
+ \msc at instundefinederr{#3}
+ }
+ {
+ \edef\msc at node{msc at node#3|-msc at level\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ }
}
+ \IfStrEq{\msc at undefined}{false}{
+ \ifmsc at isstar
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[fill,\msc at options] (\msc at node)
+ node[\mscget{position}
+ \mscget{side}]{\unexpanded\expandafter{#2}} circle (\mscget{gate symbol radius});}
+ \edef\msc at tempa{\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\path[fill,line width=0pt](\msc at node) circle (\mscget{gate symbol radius});}
+ \else
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[\msc at options] (\msc at node) node[\mscget{position} \mscget{side}]{\unexpanded\expandafter{#2}};}
+ \fi
+ }{}
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \adddraw{#3}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}{\expandafter\path\msc at tempb}
}
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% \drawmscframe draws a frame of the right size around the msc
-% This command also set the value of \msc at totalsizebox
-\def\msc at drawframe{%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at frame}{yes}}{%
- \psframe[dimen=middle](0,0)(\msc at currentwidth,-\msc at currentheight)%
- }{% no frame drawing
- }%
+\def\inststop{\stop*}%old name of command
+%\stop(*)[options]{instancename}
+\def\stop{\pgfutil at ifnextchar*{\msc at isstartrue\msc at stop@nostar}{\msc at isstarfalse\msc at stop@nostar*}}
+\def\msc at stop@nostar*{\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at stop{\msc at stop[]}}
+\def\msc at stop[#1]#2{
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/instance/#2/no}{
+ \IfStrEq{on}{\mscget{instance/#2/status}}{
+ \msc at global@set{instance/#2/status=off}
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \ifmsc at isstar \mscset{instance end=foot} \fi
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{instance end}}{foot}{
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[/msc,fill=\mscget{draw foot},/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width}, every instance foot,#1]
+ (msc at lastlevel#2-|msc at node#2.east)
+ ++(0,-\mscget{foot height}) rectangle
+ (msc at lastlevel#2-|msc at node#2.west)
+ (msc at lastlevel#2-|msc at node#2.south)
+ ++(0,-\mscget{foot height})
+ coordinate (msc at foot#2);
+ }
+ }{
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[/msc,draw=\mscget{draw foot}, /tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},
+ every instance foot,#1]
+ (msc at node#2 at l\the\c at msclevelcnt) ++(-\mscget{line width}/2,0)--
+ ($(msc at node#2 at l\the\c at msclevelcnt)!0.5!(msc at node#2 at r\the\c at msclevelcnt)$)
+ coordinate (msc at foot#2)
+ ++(\mscget{stop width}/2,\mscget{stop width}/2)
+ -- ++(-\mscget{stop width},-\mscget{stop width})
+ ++(0,\mscget{stop width})
+ -- ++(\mscget{stop width},-\mscget{stop width})
+ ++(-\mscget{stop width}/2,\mscget{stop width}/2)
+ -- (msc at node#2 at r\the\c at msclevelcnt)
+ --++(\mscget{line width}/2,0);
+ }
+ }
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \adddraw{#2}{\the\c at msclevelcnt}{\expandafter\path\msc at tempb}
+ }{}
+ }{\msc at instundefinederr{#2}}
}
-%
-% \msckeyword is the keyword representation of msc
-\def\msckeyword{msc}
+
+\def\mscunit{cm}%
\def\msckeywordstyle#1{\textbf{#1}}
-%
-% This keyword can be changed by the \setmsckeyword command (or by \renewcommand{\msckeyword}{...}):
-\newcommand{\setmsckeyword}[1]{\def\msckeyword{#1}}
+\newcommand{\setmsckeyword}[1]{\mscset{/msc/msc keyword={#1}}}
\newcommand{\setmsckeywordstyle}[1]{\def\msckeywordstyle{#1}}%
-%
-% Commands to switch internal options that control the drawing of header and footer symbols
-\newcommand{\drawinsthead}[1]{\def\msc at insthead{#1}}%
-\drawinsthead{yes}%
-\newcommand{\drawinstfoot}[1]{\def\msc at instfoot{#1}}%
-\drawinstfoot{yes}%
-% A similar command to control drawing of the msc-frame
-\newcommand{\drawframe}[1]{\def\msc at frame{#1}}%
-\drawframe{yes}%
-%
-%
-\def\msc at grid{no}%
-\newcommand{\showgrid}{\def\msc at grid{yes}}
-\newcommand{\nogrid}{\def\msc at grid{no}}
+\newcommand{\drawframe}[1]{\IfStrEq{#1}{yes}{\mscset{draw frame=}}{\IfStrEq{#1}{no}{\mscset{draw frame=none}}{}}}%
+\newcommand{\drawinsthead}[1]{\IfStrEq{#1}{yes}{\mscset{draw head=}}{\IfStrEq{#1}{no}{\mscset{draw head=none}}{}}}
+\newcommand{\drawinstfoot}[1]{\IfStrEq{#1}{yes}{\mscset{draw foot=}}{\IfStrEq{#1}{no}{\mscset{draw foot=none}}{}}}
+\newcommand{\showgrid}{\mscset{draw grid}}
+\newcommand{\nogrid}{\mscset{draw grid={none}}}
+\newcommand{\setmscscale}[1]{\mscset{msc scale=#1}}%
+\newcommand{\messarrowscale}[1]{\mscset{arrow scale=#1}}%
+%\mscset but globally
+\def\msc at global@set#1{\globaldefs=1\relax\mscset{#1}\globaldefs=0\relax}%
-\def\msc at settitle{%
-\MSC at settitle{msc}%
- {0\mscunit}%
- {-\msc at totalheight}%
- {\msc at totalwidth}%
- {0\mscunit}%
- {\msc at titlejustification}%
- {\msckeywordstyle{\msckeyword}{} \msc at title}%
+% the msc-environment
+% \begin{msc}[options][headerpos]{mscname}
+% ...definition of the MSC...
+% \end{msc}
+%\regionend{instname}
+\def\msc{%
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at mscopt{\msc at mscopt[l]}
}
-
-%
-% \msc at title stores the title given in \begin{msc}{title}
-\def\msc at title{}%
-%
-% \msc at titlejustification says how the title should be justified
-% Justification is relative to the total width of the msc
-% l: left (default)
-% c: centered
-% r: right
-%
-\newsavebox{\mscbox}%
-%
-% the msc-environment
-\newenvironment{msc}[2][l]{%
-\message{(\msckeyword: '#2'}%
-\def\msc at titlejustification{#1}%
-\def\msc at title{#2}%
-\setcounter{mscinstcnt}{0}%
-\setlength{\msc at currentheight}{\topheaddist}%
-\addtolength{\msc at currentheight}{\instheadheight}%
-\addtolength{\msc at currentheight}{\firstlevelheight}%
-\setlength{\msc at currentwidth}{0pt}%
-% define the artificial left and right environment instances
-\msc at declinst{envleft}{}{}{\the\instbarwidth}%
-\msc at setinstxpos{envleft}{0pt}%
-\msc at declinst{envright}{}{}{\the\instbarwidth}%
-\msc at setinstxpos{envright}{\envinstdist}%
-\begin{lrbox}{\mscbox}%
-\begin{pspicture}(0,0)% we draw the msc in a picture of size 0x0
-\psset{dash=4pt 4pt}% sets the hashed linestyle style
-}{%
- \addtolength{\msc at currentheight}{\lastlevelheight}%
- \setcounter{tmpcnt}{2}%
- \msc at drawinstancefooters%
-% If there is at least one instance, the current width is
-% set to the xpos of the NEXT msc instance. There is at least one instance,
-% if mscinstcnt >= 2. So, in that case, we have to
-% substract one \instdist from the current width.
-%
-%\ifthenelse{\value{mscinstcnt}<2}{% no user defined instances, so, relax
-% \relax%
-%}{% mscinstcnt >= 2
-% \addtolength{\msc at currentwidth}{-\instdist}%
-%}%
-% Now we compute the final current width: one extra \envinstdist:
-\setlength{\msc at currentwidth}{\msc at instxpos{envright}}%
-\addtolength{\msc at currentheight}{\instfootheight+\bottomfootdist}%
-\msc at drawframe%
-\global\msc at totalwidth=\msc at currentwidth%
-\global\msc at totalheight=\msc at currentheight%
-\ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at grid}{yes}}{%
- \psgrid[subgriddiv=1,griddots=10](0,0)(0,0)(\msc at currentwidth,-\msc at currentheight)%
-}{\relax}%
-\msc at settitle%
-\end{pspicture}%
-% Debug info:
-%\typeout{msc size: \the\msc at totalwidth x\the\msc at totalheight}%
-\end{lrbox}%
-% the \mscbox now contains a box of 0x0, however the actual width and
-% height are stored in \msc at total{width,height}. We use these lengths
-% to adjust the width and height of the \mscbox
-\wd\mscbox=\msc at totalwidth%
-\ht\mscbox=\msc at totalheight%
-\dp\mscbox=0pt%
-% Now the \mscbox can be scaled (by \mscscalefactor) and `printed':
-{% DEBUG: use this \fbox stuf to check the bounding box
- \setlength{\fboxrule}{0.01pt}%
- \setlength{\fboxsep}{1pt}%
- \color{white}\mbox{%
- \psscalebox{\mscscalefactor}{\raisebox{\msc at totalheight}[\msc at totalheight][0pt]{\usebox{\mscbox}}}%
- }%
-}%
-\message{)}%
-}%
-%
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\newcommand{\MSC at settitle}[7]{%
- % #1: diagram type (msc, mscdoc, hmsc)
- % #2: llx
- % #3: lly
- % #4: urx
- % #5: ury
- % #6: justification (l, c, r)
- % #7: typeset title
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{#4 - #2 - 2\leftnamedist}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#6}{l}}%
- {%
- \def\MSC at dosettitle{\parbox[t]{\tmp at X}{\raggedright #7}}%
- }%
- {\ifthenelse{\equal{#6}{c}}%
- {%
- \def\MSC at dosettitle{\parbox[t]{\tmp at X}{\centering #7}}%
- }%
- {\ifthenelse{\equal{#6}{r}}%
- {%
- \def\MSC at dosettitle{\parbox[t]{\tmp at X}{\raggedleft #7}}%
+\def\msc at mscopt[#1]{%
+ % \msc at titlejustification says how the title should be justified
+ % Justification is relative to the total width of the msc
+ % l: left (default)
+ % c: centered
+ % r: right
+ \ifx#1l
+ \mscset{title position=left}
+ \else \ifx#1c
+ \mscset{title position=center}
+ \else \ifx#1r
+ \mscset{title position=right}
+ \else
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{msc at tikzstarted}
+ {
+ \tikzpicture[/msc,#1]%
+ \def\msc at tikzstarted{}}%
+ {
+ \relax}
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at mscopt}{\msc at mscnoopt}
+}
+% core of msc with options parsed -
+\def\msc at mscnoopt#1{% parse name
+ % #1: mscname
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{msc at tikzstarted}
+ {
+ \tikzpicture\def\msc at tikzstarted{}%
}%
- {\msc at illegaltitleplacement{#6}}%
- }%
- }%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{#5 - \topnamedist}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{#2 + \leftnamedist}%
- \rput[tl](\tmp at Xb,\tmp at Y){\MSC at dosettitle}%
+ {\relax}
+ % Options handling ends here
+ \c at mscinstcnt 0\relax% initialize number of instances to 0
+ \c at condition 0\relax% initialize number of condition to 0
+ \c at msclevelcnt 1\relax% initialize level to 1
+ \gdef\c at maxlevelcnt{0}% initialize maximum encountered level to 0
+% \msc at global@set{
+% }
+ \mscset{
+ /tikz/scale/.expanded=\mscget{msc scale},
+ /tikz/every node/.style/.expanded={scale/.expanded=\mscget{msc scale}},
+ instance/envleft/no/.initial=0,
+ instance/envright/no/.initial=1,
+ instanceno/0/name/.initial=envleft,%
+ instanceno/1/name/.initial=envright,
+ instance/envleft/type/.initial=environment,
+ instance/envright/type/.initial=environment,
+ instance/envleft/region/.initial=normal,
+ instance/envright/region/.initial=normal,
+ instance/envleft/status/.initial=on,
+ instance/envright/status/.initial=on,
+ /msc/msc/name/.initial={#1}
+ }
+ \pgfmathparse{0-\mscget{head top distance} - \mscget{head height}}
+ \xdef\msc at tempa{\pgfmathresult}
+ \coordinate (msc at level0) at (0,\msc at tempa pt);
+ \coordinate (msc at nodeenvright) at (0,\msc at tempa pt);
+ \coordinate (msc at nodeenvleft) at (0,\msc at tempa pt);
+ \coordinate (msc at footenvleft) at (msc at nodeenvleft);
+ \coordinate[below=\mscget{first level height} of msc at level0] (msc at level1);
}
-
-
-
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% MSC documents
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% \mscdockeyword is the keyword representation of msc
-\def\mscdockeyword{mscdoc}
-\def\mscdockeywordstyle#1{\textbf{#1}}
-%
-% This keyword can be changed by the \setmscdockeyword command (or by \renewcommand{\mscdockeyword}{...}):
-\newcommand{\setmscdockeyword}[1]{\def\mscdockeyword{#1}}
-\newcommand{\setmscdockeywordstyle}[1]{\def\mscdockeywordstyle{#1}}%
-
-\newcommand{\mscdoc at settitle}{%
- \MSC at settitle{mscdoc}%
- {\mscdoc at llx}%
- {\mscdoc at lly}%
- {\mscdoc at urx}%
- {\mscdoc at ury}%
- {\mscdoc at titlejustification}%
- {\mscdockeywordstyle{\mscdockeyword}{} \mscdoc at title}%
+\def\msc at drawgrid{
+ \begin{pgfonlayer}{background}
+ \pgfpointanchor{current bounding box}{south west}
+ \pgfmathparse{ceil(\pgf at x/\pgf at xx)}%pgf at xx stores 1 of current unit (e.g. 1cm)
+ \edef\msg at xa{\pgfmathresult}%
+ \pgfmathparse{ceil(\pgf at y/\pgf at yy)}%
+ \edef\msg at ya{\pgfmathresult}%
+ \pgfpointanchor{current bounding box}{north east}
+ \pgfmathparse{floor(\pgf at x/\pgf at xx)}%
+ \edef\msg at xb{\pgfmathresult}%
+ \pgfmathparse{floor(\pgf at y/\pgf at yy)}%
+ \edef\msg at yb{\pgfmathresult}%
+ \path (\msg at xa,\msg at ya) to[/msc/\mscget{draw grid}](\msg at xb,\msg at yb);
+ \end{pgfonlayer}
}
-
-\newenvironment{mscdoc}[2][l]%
-{%
- \message{( \mscdockeyword: '#2'}%
- \def\mscdoc at titlejustification{#1}%
- \def\mscdoc at title{#2}%
- \def\reference##1(##2,##3){%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\mscdocreferencewidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\mscdocreferenceheight}%
- \def\txt{\vbox to \tmp at Y{\vss\hbox to \tmp at X{\hss{}##1\hss}\vss}}%
- \rput(##2\mscunit,##3\mscunit){\psframebox[%
- framearc=0.25,%
- framesep=0pt,%
- border=0pt%
- ]{\txt}}}%
- \def\separator##1{%
- \psline[linestyle=dashed](\mscdoc at llx,##1)(\mscdoc at urx,##1)
- }%
- \def\mscdoc at sizespec(##1,##2)(##3,##4)%
- {%
- \def\mscdoc at llx{##1\mscunit}%
- \def\mscdoc at lly{##2\mscunit}%
- \def\mscdoc at urx{##3\mscunit}%
- \def\mscdoc at ury{##4\mscunit}%
-\begin{lrbox}{\mscbox}%
- \begin{pspicture}(\mscdoc at llx,\mscdoc at lly)(\mscdoc at urx,\mscdoc at ury)%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at grid}{yes}}{%
- \psgrid[subgriddiv=1,griddots=10](\mscdoc at llx,\mscdoc at lly)(\mscdoc at urx,\mscdoc at ury)%
- }{\relax}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at frame}{yes}}{%
- \psframe(\mscdoc at llx,\mscdoc at lly)(\mscdoc at urx,\mscdoc at ury)%
- }{\relax}%
- \mscdoc at settitle%
- }%
- \mscdoc at sizespec%
-}%
-{%
- \end{pspicture}%
-\end{lrbox}%
-{% DEBUG: use this \fbox stuf to check the bounding box
- \setlength{\fboxrule}{0.01pt}%
- \setlength{\fboxsep}{1pt}%
- \color{white}\fbox{%
- \usebox{\mscbox}%
- }%
-}%
- \message{)}%
+%\def\endmsc[options]
+\def\endmsc{%
+% \let\setlength\msc at OrigSL
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at endmsc{\msc at endmsc[]}
+ \endtikzpicture
+ \global\let\msc at tikzstarted\relax
}
-
+\def\msc at endmsc[#1]{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \ifnum0<\c at mscinstcnt\relax
+ \ifnum\c at msclevelcnt<\c at maxlevelcnt\relax
+ \pgfmathparse{\c at maxlevelcnt-\the\c at msclevelcnt}
+ \pgfkeys{/pgf/number format/precision=0}
+ \pgfmathroundto{\pgfmathresult}
+ \nextlevel[\pgfmathresult]%add missing levels
+ \fi
+ \mscset{level height=\mscget{last level height}}
+ \nextlevel %add last but one level
+ \foreach \msc at tempa in {1,...,\c at mscinstcnt} {%
+ \stop[instance end=foot,#1]{\mscget{instanceno/\msc at tempa/name}}
+ }
+ \nextlevel %add last level just to draw outstanding foots
+ \else
+ \coordinate (msc at footenvleft) at (msc at nodeenvright);
+ \coordinate[below=\mscget{first level height} of msc at level0] (msc at level1);
+ \fi
+ \msc at drawenvironment
+ \IfStrEq{none}{\mscget{draw grid}}{}{%we draw help grid
+ \msc at drawgrid
+ }
+ \end{pgfscope}
+}
+\def\msc at drawenvironment{
+ \path[line width=\mscget{line width}]
+ let \p1=(msc at node\mscget{instanceno/1/name}.north),
+ \p2=(msc at foot\mscget{instanceno/\the\c at mscinstcnt/name}.south),
+ \p3=(current bounding box.south east),
+ \p4=(current bounding box.north west) in
+ ({\x2+max(\mscget{right environment distance},\x3-\x2)},
+ {\y2+min(-\mscget{foot distance},\y3-\y2)}) coordinate(msc at env@se) [draw=\mscget{draw frame}] rectangle
+ ({\x1+min(-\mscget{left environment distance},\x4-\x1)},
+ {\y1+max(\mscget{head top distance},\y4-\y1)}) coordinate(msc at env@nw);
+ \path let \p1=(msc at env@nw),
+ \p2=(msc at env@se) in
+ (\x1,\y1) +(\mscget{title distance},-\mscget{title top distance})
+ node[rectangle, anchor=north west, inner sep=0, align=\mscget{title
+ position}, text
+ width=(\x2-\x1)-2*\mscget{title distance}]
+ {\msckeywordstyle{\mscget{msc keyword}} \mscget{msc/name}};
+ \foreach \msc at tempa in {0,...,\c at msclevelcnt} {%create nodes for environment
+ \path let \p1=(msc at env@se),
+ \p2=(msc at env@nw),
+ \p3=(msc at level\msc at tempa) in
+ (\x2,\y3) coordinate[name=msc at nodeenvleft@r\msc at tempa,
+ alias=msc at nodeenvleft@l\msc at tempa] --
+ (\x1,\y3) coordinate[name=msc at nodeenvright@l\msc at tempa,
+ alias=msc at nodeenvright@r\msc at tempa];
+ }
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/msc/levelenv/havedraw}{
+% \tikzset{/msc/levelenv/draw/.show code}
+ \mscset{/msc/levelenv/draw}
+ \msc at global@set{/msc/levelenv/draw/.code={}}
+ }{}
+}
+% \setmscvalues assigns compatible values to all msc-parameters
+% Currently, three sets of values are supported: large, normal
+% and small.
+\def\setmscvalues#1{%
+ \IfEqCase{#1}{%
+ {large}{\mscset{#1 values}}%
+ {normal}{\mscset{#1 values}}%
+ {small}{\mscset{#1 values}}%
+ }[\msc at unknownmscvalueserr{#1}]
+}
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
@@ -2557,422 +2781,195 @@
% HMSC
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-
-\RequirePackage{pst-node}
-
-
-\newcommand{\hmsckeyword}{hmsc}
-\newcommand{\hmsckeywordstyle}[1]{\textbf{#1}}
-
-% This keyword can be changed by the \sethmsckeyword command (or by \renewcommand{\hmsckeyword}{...}):
-\newcommand{\sethmsckeyword}[1]{\def\hmsckeyword{#1}}
+\def\msckeywordstyle#1{\textbf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\sethmsckeyword}[1]{\mscset{/msc/hmsc keyword={#1}}}%
\newcommand{\sethmsckeywordstyle}[1]{\def\hmsckeywordstyle{#1}}%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\newif\if at ncsegline
-
-
-%
-% User command to draw a segmented line between two nodes (buggy).
-%
-% NOTE: this implementation is not complete yet. The optional arrows argument
-% only makes sense for forward arrows (and even then in a limited way).
-% usage: \ncsegline[settings]{arrows}{#1}[(x0,y0)...(xn,xy)]{#2}
-% settings (optional): pstricks settings for lines
-% arrows(optional): pstricks-style arrow defintions
-% #1: start node
-% (x0,y0)...(xn,yn) (optional): sequence of intermediate points
-% #2: end node
-\def\ncsegline{%
- \@ifstar{\def\@nclinecommand{\ncline*}\@ncseglinei}{\def\@nclinecommand{\ncline}\@ncseglinei}%
+% \begin{hmsc}[headerpos]{hmscname}(llx,lly)(urx,ury)
+\def\hmsc{\def\msc at key{hmsc} \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at hmscopt{\msc at hmscopt[]}}
+\def\msc at hmscopt[#1]{%
+ \msc at global@set{/msc/draw code/.code={}}
+ \ifx#1l
+ \mscset{title position=left}
+ \else \ifx#1c
+ \mscset{title position=center}
+ \else \ifx#1r
+ \mscset{title position=right}
+ \else
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{msc at tikzstarted}{
+ \tikzpicture[#1]%
+ \def\msc at tikzstarted{}
+ }{\relax}
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[{\msc at hmscopt}{\msc at hmscnoopt}
}
-\def\ncseglinecheck at arrow#1#2{%
- \ncseglinecheck@@arrow#2-\@nil
- \if at ncsegline%
-% \message{(arrow: `#2')}%
- \edef\@ncseglinearrow{{#2}}%
- \def\next{#1}%
- \else%
-% \message{(no arrow `#2')}%
- \edef\@ncseglinearrow{{-}}%
- \def\next{#1{#2}}%
- \fi%
- \next%
+\def\msc at hmscnoopt#1{%
+ % #1: mscname
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{msc at tikzstarted}{
+ \tikzpicture\def\msc at tikzstarted{}%
+ }{\relax}
+ \mscset{
+ /tikz/scale/.expanded=\mscget{msc scale},
+ /tikz/every node/.style/.expanded={scale/.expanded=\mscget{msc scale}},
+ /msc/\msc at key/name/.initial={#1}}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar({\msc at hmsc}{}
}
-\def\ncseglinecheck@@arrow#1-#2\@nil{%
-\ifx\@nil#2\@nil\@ncseglinefalse\else\@ncseglinetrue\fi}
-
-\def\@ncseglinei{%
- \@ifnextchar[{\@ncseglineReadSettings}{\def\@nclinesettings{[]}\ncseglinecheck at arrow{\@ncseglineii}}%]
+\def\msc at hmsc(#1,#2)(#3,#4){
+ \path (#1,#4) coordinate(msc@\msc at key @nw)
+ (#3,#2) coordinate(msc@\msc at key @se);
}
-
-\def\@ncseglineReadSettings[#1]{%
- \def\@nclinesettings{[#1]}%
- \ncseglinecheck at arrow{\@ncseglineii}%
+%\end{hmsc}[options]
+\def\endhmsc{\def\msc at key{hmsc}\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at endhmsc{\msc at endhmsc[]}
+ \endtikzpicture
+ \global\let\msc at tikzstarted\relax
}
-
-\def\@ncseglineii#1{%
- \def\@ncsegargA{#1}%
- \@ifnextchar[{\@ncseglineiii}{\@ncseglineiv}%
+\def\msc at endhmsc[#1]{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \pgfutil at ifundefined{pgf at sh@ns at msc@\msc at key @nw}{%use bounding box
+ \path (current bounding box.north west)
+ ++(-\mscget{west \msc at key\space margin},
+ \mscget{north \msc at key\space margin}+\mscget{title top distance}+\heightof{\mscget{msc at key/name}}+\depthof{\mscget{\msc at key/name}})
+ coordinate(msc@\msc at key @nw) (current bounding box.south east)
+ ++(\mscget{east \msc at key\space margin},-\mscget{south \msc at key\space margin})
+ coordinate(msc@\msc at key @se);
+ }{}
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{title position}}{left}{%
+ \path (msc@\msc at key @nw) +(\mscget{title distance},-\mscget{title top distance})
+ node[anchor=north west,inner sep=0]
+ {\msckeywordstyle{\mscget{\msc at key\space keyword}} \mscget{\msc at key/name}};
+ }{
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{title position}}{center}{%
+ \path let \p1=(msc@\msc at key @nw),
+ \p2=(msc@\msc at key @se) in
+ (\x1/2+\x2/2,\y1) +(0,-\mscget{title top distance})
+ node[anchor=north,inner sep=0]
+ {\msckeywordstyle{\mscget{\msc at key\space keyword}} \mscget{\msc at key/name}};
+ }{
+ \IfStrEq{\mscget{title position}}{right}{%
+ \path let \p1=(msc@\msc at key @nw),
+ \p2=(msc@\msc at key @se) in
+ (\x2,\y1) +(-\mscget{title distance},-\mscget{title top distance})
+ node[anchor=north east,inner sep=0]
+ {\msckeywordstyle{\mscget{\msc at key\space keyword}} \mscget{\msc at key/name}};
+ }{}
+ }
+ }
+ \path[draw=\mscget{draw frame},line width=\mscget{line width}] (msc@\msc at key @nw)|-(msc@\msc at key @se)|-(msc@\msc at key @nw);
+ \IfStrEq{none}{\mscget{draw grid}}{}{%we draw help grid
+ \msc at drawgrid
+ }
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \mscset{/msc/draw code}
+ \msc at global@set{/msc/draw code/.code={}}
}
-
-\def\@ncseglineiii[#1]#2{%
- \@ncseglineA#1(\relax,\relax)%
- \def\@ncsegargB{#2}%
- \@ncseglinedraw%
+%\hmscstartsymbol{nickname}(x,y)
+\def\hmscstartsymbol{
+ \edef\msc at nodetype{start symbol}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at nodenotext{\msc at nodenotext[]}
}
-
-\def\@ncseglineiv#1{%
- \def\@ncsegargB{#1}%
- \@ncseglinedraw%
+\def\msc at nodenotext[#1]#2{
+ \edef\msc at options{#1} \edef\msc at name{#2}\def\msc at text{}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar({\msc at nodeAt}{
+ \edef\msc at tempb{[/msc,\msc at nodetype,#1](\msc at name){};}
+ \expandafter\node\msc at tempb
+ }
}
-
-\def\@ncseglinedraw{%
- \edef\@ncseglineattrs{\@nclinesettings\@ncseglinearrow}%
- \expandafter\@nclinecommand\@ncseglineattrs{\@ncsegargA}{\@ncsegargB}%
+\def\msc at nodetext[#1]#2#3{
+ \edef\msc at options{#1} \edef\msc at name{#2}\def\msc at text{#3}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar({\msc at nodeAt}{
+ \def\msc at tempb{[/msc,\msc at nodetype,#1](#2){#3};}
+ \expandafter\node\msc at tempb
+ }
}
-\def\@ncseglineA(#1,#2){%
- \ifx#1\relax%
- \def\next{\relax}%
- \else%
-% \message{(line seg)}%
- \pnode(#1,#2){#1#2}%
- \expandafter\@nclinecommand\@nclinesettings{-}{\@ncsegargA}{#1#2}%
- \edef\@ncsegargA{#1#2}%
- \def\next{\@ncseglineA}%
- \fi
- \next%
+\def\msc at nodeAt(#1,#2){
+ \edef\msc at tempb{[/msc,\msc at nodetype,\msc at options](\msc at name) at (#1,#2) {\unexpanded\expandafter{\msc at text}};}
+ \expandafter\node\msc at tempb
}
-
-% User command to draw hmsc start symbols
-% usage: \hmscstartsymbol{#1}(#2,#3)
-% #1: nickname
-% #2: x-coordinate
-% #3: y-coordinate
-%
-%
-% sin(pi/3) =~ 0.866025403784
-%
-\def\hmscstartsymbol#1(#2,#3){%
- %\message{(hmsc start symbol: #1)}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{#2\mscunit}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{#3\mscunit}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa}\addtolength{\tmp at Xb}{-.5\hmscstartsymbolwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xc}{\tmp at Xa}\addtolength{\tmp at Xc}{.5\hmscstartsymbolwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\tmp at Ya}\addtolength{\tmp at Yb}{0.866025403784\hmscstartsymbolwidth}%
- \pspolygon(\tmp at Xa,\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,\tmp at Yb)(\tmp at Xc,\tmp at Yb)%
- \pnode(#2,#3){#1}%
+%\hmscendsymbol{nickname}(x,y)
+\def\hmscendsymbol{
+ \edef\msc at nodetype{end symbol}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at nodenotext{\msc at nodenotext[]}
}
-
-
-% User command to draw hmsc end symbols
-% usage: \hmscendsymbol{#1}(#2,#3)
-% #1: nickname
-% #2: x-coordinate
-% #3: y-coordinate
-%
-%
-% sin(pi/3) =~ 0.866025403784
-%
-\def\hmscendsymbol#1(#2,#3){%
- %\message{(hmsc end symbol: #1)}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{#2\mscunit}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Ya}{#3\mscunit}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xb}{\tmp at Xa}\addtolength{\tmp at Xb}{-.5\hmscstartsymbolwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xc}{\tmp at Xa}\addtolength{\tmp at Xc}{.5\hmscstartsymbolwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Yb}{\tmp at Ya}\addtolength{\tmp at Yb}{-0.866025403784\hmscstartsymbolwidth}%
- \pspolygon(\tmp at Xa,\tmp at Ya)(\tmp at Xb,\tmp at Yb)(\tmp at Xc,\tmp at Yb)%
- \pnode(#2,#3){#1}%
+%\hmscreference{nickname}{text}(x,y)
+\def\hmscreference{
+ \edef\msc at nodetype{reference}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at nodetext{\msc at nodetext[]}
}
-
-% User command to draw a hmsc condition
-% usage: \hmsccondition{#1}{#2}(#3,#4)
-% #1: nickname
-% #2: text
-% #3: x-coordinate
-% #4: y-coordinate
-\def\hmsccondition#1#2(#3,#4){%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{.5\hmscconditionwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{.5\hmscconditionheight}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Xa}{\tmp at X}\addtolength{\tmp at Xa}{.6\tmp at Y}%
- \rput(#3\mscunit,#4\mscunit){%
- \pspolygon(-\tmp at X,\tmp at Y)%
- (\tmp at X,\tmp at Y)%
- (\tmp at Xa,0)%
- (\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y)%
- (-\tmp at X,-\tmp at Y)%
- (-\tmp at Xa,0)}%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\hmscconditionwidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\hmscconditionheight}%
- \def\ctxt{\vbox to \tmp at Y{\vss\hbox to \tmp at X{\hss{}#2\hss}\vss}}%
- \rput(#3\mscunit,#4\mscunit){\rnode{#1}{\psframebox[%
- linestyle=none,%
- linewidth=0pt,%
- framesep=0pt,%
- border=0pt%
- ]{\ctxt}}}%
+%\hmsc condition{nickname}{text}(x,y)
+\def\hmsccondition{
+ \edef\msc at nodetype{condition}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at nodetext{\msc at nodetext[]}
}
-
-% User command to draw a hmsc reference
-% usage: \hmscreference{#1}{#2}(#3,#4)
-% #1: nickname
-% #2: text
-% #3: x-coordinate
-% #4: y-coordinate
-\def\hmscreference#1#2(#3,#4){%
- \setlength{\tmp at X}{\hmscreferencewidth}%
- \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\hmscreferenceheight}%
- \def\rtxt{\vbox to \tmp at Y{\vss\hbox to \tmp at X{\hss{}#2\hss}\vss}}%
- \rput(#3\mscunit,#4\mscunit){\rnode{#1}{\psframebox[%
- framearc=0.25,%
- framesep=0pt,%
- border=0pt%
- ]{\rtxt}}}%
+%\hmscconnection{nickname}(x,y)
+\def\hmscconnection{
+ \edef\msc at nodetype{connection}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at nodenotext{\msc at nodenotext[]}
}
-
-% User command to draw hmsc connections
-% usage: \hmscconnection{#1}(#2,#3)
-% #1: nickname
-% #2: x-coordinate
-% #3: y-coordinate
-\def\hmscconnection#1(#2,#3){%
- \rput(#2,#3){\circlenode[framesep=0pt]{#1}{\rule{0pt}{2\hmscconnectionradius}}}%
+%\arrow{from-nickname}[coord-list]{to-n
+\def\arrow{\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at arrowopt{\msc at arrowopt[]}}
+\def\msc at arrowopt[#1]#2{
+ \def\msc at options{#1}
+ \edef\msc at node{#2}
+ \edef\msc at tempa{}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at arrowgetpath{\msc at arrow}
}
-
-
-
-% User command to draw arrows between hmsc-objects
-% Usage: \arrow{#1}[(x0,y0)...(xn,yn)]{#2}
-% #1: start hmsc object
-% (x0,y0)...(xn,yn) (optional): sequence of intermediate points
-% #2: end hmsc object
-\newcommand{\arrow}{
- \ncsegline{->}%
+\def\msc at arrowgetpath[#1]{
+ \StrSubstitute{#1}{(}{--(}[\msc at tempa]
+ \msc at arrow
}
-
-
-
-% User environment to draw hmsc's
-% Usage: \begin{hmsc}{#1}(llx,lly((urx,ury)...\end{hmsc}
-%
-
-
-\def\hmsc at settitle{%
- \MSC at settitle{hmsc}%
- {\hmsc at llx}%
- {\hmsc at lly}%
- {\hmsc at urx}%
- {\hmsc at ury}%
- {\hmsc at titlejustification}%
- {\hmsckeywordstyle{\hmsckeyword}{} \hmsc at title}%
-% \setlength{\tmp at X}{\hmsc at llx + \leftnamedist}%
-% \setlength{\tmp at Y}{\hmsc at ury - \topnamedist}%
-% \rput[tl](\tmp at X,\tmp at Y){%
-% \hmsckeywordstyle{\hmsckeyword}{} \hmsc at title%
-% }%
+\def\msc at arrow#1{
+ \edef\msc at tempb{[/msc,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},arrow style,\msc at options] (\msc at node)\msc at tempa--(#1);}
+ \expandafter\draw\msc at tempb
}
-\newenvironment{hmsc}[2][l]
- {\message{( \hmsckeyword: '#2'}%
- \def\hmsc at titlejustification{#1}%
- \def\hmsc at title{#2}%
- \hmsc at startenv}%
- {%\setlength{\tmp at X}{\hmsc at llx}\addtolength{\tmp at X}{\leftnamedist}%
- %\setlength{\tmp at Y}{\hmsc at ury}\addtolength{\tmp at Y}{-\topnamedist}%
- %\rput[tl](\tmp at X,\tmp at Y){\raisebox{\depth}[\totalheight][0pt]{\hmsckeywordstyle{\hmsckeyword} \hmsc at name}}%
- \hmsc at settitle%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at frame}{yes}}{%
- \psframe(\hmsc at llx,\hmsc at lly)(\hmsc at urx,\hmsc at ury)%
- }{\relax}%
- \end{pspicture}%
-\end{lrbox}%
-{% DEBUG: use this \fbox stuf to check the bounding box
- \setlength{\fboxrule}{0.01pt}%
- \setlength{\fboxsep}{1pt}%
- \color{white}\fbox{%
- \usebox{\mscbox}%
- }%
-}%
- \message{)}}%
-\def\hmsc at startenv(#1,#2)(#3,#4){%
- \newcommand{\hmsc at llx}{#1\mscunit}%
- \newcommand{\hmsc at lly}{#2\mscunit}%
- \newcommand{\hmsc at urx}{#3\mscunit}%
- \newcommand{\hmsc at ury}{#4\mscunit}%
-\begin{lrbox}{\mscbox}%
- \begin{pspicture}(\hmsc at llx,\hmsc at lly)(\hmsc at urx,\hmsc at ury)%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\msc at grid}{yes}}{%
- \psgrid[subgriddiv=1,griddots=10](\hmsc at llx,\hmsc at lly)(\hmsc at urx,\hmsc at ury)%
- }{\relax}%
-}
-
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
-% Initialisation of the msc package
+% MSC documents
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% \set at mscvalueslarge
-\def\set at mscvalueslarge{%
- \psset{linewidth=0.8pt}
- % the lengths
- \setlength{\actionheight}{0.75\mscunit}
- \setlength{\actionwidth}{1.25\mscunit}
- \setlength{\bottomfootdist}{1\mscunit}
- \setlength{\msccommentdist}{1.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\conditionheight}{0.75\mscunit}
- \setlength{\conditionoverlap}{0.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\envinstdist}{2.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\firstlevelheight}{0.75\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscconditionheight}{0.8\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscconditionwidth}{1.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscconnectionradius}{0.06\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscreferenceheight}{0.8\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscreferencewidth}{1.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscstartsymbolwidth}{0.85\mscunit}
- \setlength{\inlineoverlap}{1.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\instbarwidth}{0pt}
- \setlength{\instdist}{3\mscunit}
- \setlength{\instfootheight}{0.25\mscunit}
- \setlength{\instheadheight}{.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\instwidth}{1.75\mscunit}
- \setlength{\labeldist}{1ex}
- \setlength{\lastlevelheight}{0.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\leftnamedist}{0.3\mscunit}
- \setlength{\levelheight}{.75\mscunit}
- \setlength{\lostsymbolradius}{.15\mscunit}
- \setlength{\markdist}{1\mscunit}
- \setlength{\measuredist}{0.75\mscunit}
- \setlength{\measuresymbolwidth}{.15\mscunit}
- \setlength{\mscdocreferenceheight}{0.8\mscunit}
- \setlength{\mscdocreferencewidth}{1.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\referenceoverlap}{1.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\regionbarwidth}{.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\selfmesswidth}{.75\mscunit}
- \setlength{\stopwidth}{0.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\timerwidth}{0.4\mscunit}
- \setlength{\topheaddist}{1.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\topnamedist}{.3\mscunit}
- % some numeric parameters
- \messarrowscale{2}
+% \mscdockeyword is the keyword representation of msc
+\def\mscdockeywordstyle#1{\textbf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\setmscdockeyword}[1]{\mscset{/msc/mscdoc keyword/.initial=mscdoc}}
+\newcommand{\setmscdockeywordstyle}[1]{\def\mscdockeywordstyle{#1}}%
+
+%\begin{mscdoc}[headerpos]{mscdocname}(llx,lly)(urx,ury)
+\def\mscdoc{\edef\msc at key{mscdoc} \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at hmscopt{\msc at hmscopt[]}}
+%\end{mscdoc}[options]
+\def\endmscdoc{\edef\msc at key{mscdoc}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at endhmsc{\msc at endhmsc[]}
+ \endtikzpicture
+ \global\let\msc at tikzstarted\relax
}
-%
-%
-% \set at mscvaluesnormal
-\def\set at mscvaluesnormal{%
- \psset{linewidth=0.7pt}
- % switch to a smaller font
- \small%
- % the lengths
- \setlength{\actionheight}{0.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\actionwidth}{1.25\mscunit}
- \setlength{\bottomfootdist}{0.7\mscunit}
- \setlength{\msccommentdist}{1.1\mscunit}
- \setlength{\conditionheight}{0.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\conditionoverlap}{0.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\envinstdist}{2\mscunit}
- \setlength{\firstlevelheight}{0.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscconditionheight}{0.7\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscconditionwidth}{1.4\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscconnectionradius}{0.05\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscreferenceheight}{0.7\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscreferencewidth}{1.4\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscstartsymbolwidth}{0.7\mscunit}
- \setlength{\inlineoverlap}{1\mscunit}
- \setlength{\instbarwidth}{0pt}
- \setlength{\instdist}{2.2\mscunit}
- \setlength{\instfootheight}{0.2\mscunit}
- \setlength{\instheadheight}{.55\mscunit}
- \setlength{\instwidth}{1.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\labeldist}{1ex}
- \setlength{\lastlevelheight}{0.4\mscunit}
- \setlength{\leftnamedist}{0.2\mscunit}
- \setlength{\levelheight}{.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\lostsymbolradius}{.12\mscunit}
- \setlength{\markdist}{1\mscunit}
- \setlength{\measuredist}{0.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\measuresymbolwidth}{.2\mscunit}
- \setlength{\mscdocreferenceheight}{0.7\mscunit}
- \setlength{\mscdocreferencewidth}{1.4\mscunit}
- \setlength{\referenceoverlap}{1\mscunit}
- \setlength{\regionbarwidth}{.4\mscunit}
- \setlength{\selfmesswidth}{.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\stopwidth}{0.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\timerwidth}{0.3\mscunit}
- \setlength{\topheaddist}{1.3\mscunit}
- \setlength{\topnamedist}{.2\mscunit}
- % some numeric parameters
- \messarrowscale{1.5}
+%\hmscreference{nickname}{text}(x,y)
+\def\reference{\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at nodenoname{\msc at nodenoname[]}}
+\def\msc at nodenoname[#1]#2{
+ \edef\msc at options{#1} \def\msc at text{#2}
+ \pgfutil at ifnextchar({\msc at nodenonameAt}{
+ \edef\msc at tempb{[/msc,reference,#1](\msc at name){\unexpanded\expandafter{\msc at text}};}
+ \expandafter\node\msc at tempb
+ }
}
-%
-% \set at mscvaluessmall
-\def\set at mscvaluessmall{%
- \psset{linewidth=0.6pt}
- % switch to a smaller font
- \small%
- % the lengths
- \setlength{\actionheight}{0.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\actionwidth}{1.2\mscunit}
- \setlength{\bottomfootdist}{0.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\msccommentdist}{0.75\mscunit}
- \setlength{\conditionheight}{0.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\conditionoverlap}{0.4\mscunit}
- \setlength{\envinstdist}{1.2\mscunit}
- \setlength{\firstlevelheight}{0.4\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscconditionheight}{0.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscconditionwidth}{1.2\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscconnectionradius}{0.04\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscreferenceheight}{0.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscreferencewidth}{1.2\mscunit}
- \setlength{\hmscstartsymbolwidth}{0.4\mscunit}
- \setlength{\inlineoverlap}{.75\mscunit}
- \setlength{\instbarwidth}{0pt}
- \setlength{\instdist}{1.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\instfootheight}{0.15\mscunit}
- \setlength{\instheadheight}{0.5\mscunit}
- \setlength{\instwidth}{1.2\mscunit}
- \setlength{\labeldist}{0.8ex}
- \setlength{\lastlevelheight}{0.3\mscunit}
- \setlength{\leftnamedist}{0.1\mscunit}
- \setlength{\levelheight}{0.4\mscunit}
- \setlength{\lostsymbolradius}{.08\mscunit}
- \setlength{\markdist}{1\mscunit}
- \setlength{\measuredist}{0.4\mscunit}
- \setlength{\measuresymbolwidth}{.25\mscunit}
- \setlength{\mscdocreferenceheight}{0.6\mscunit}
- \setlength{\mscdocreferencewidth}{1.2\mscunit}
- \setlength{\referenceoverlap}{.75\mscunit}
- \setlength{\regionbarwidth}{.2\mscunit}
- \setlength{\selfmesswidth}{.4\mscunit}
- \setlength{\stopwidth}{0.3\mscunit}
- \setlength{\timerwidth}{0.2\mscunit}
- \setlength{\topheaddist}{1.2\mscunit}
- \setlength{\topnamedist}{.1\mscunit}
- % some numeric parameters
- \messarrowscale{1.2}
+\def\msc at nodenonameAt(#1,#2){
+ \edef\msc at tempb{[/msc,reference,every reference,\msc at options] at (#1,#2) {\unexpanded\expandafter{\msc at text}};}
+ \expandafter\node\msc at tempb
}
-% \setmscvalues assigns compatible values to all msc-parameters
-% Currently, three sets of values are supported: large, normal
-% and small.
-\def\setmscvalues#1{%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{large}}{%
- \set at mscvalueslarge}{%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{normal}}{%
- \set at mscvaluesnormal}{%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{small}}{%
- \set at mscvaluessmall}{%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{measure}}{%
- \set at mscvaluesmeasure}{%
- \msc at unknownmscvalueserr{#1}}}}}%
+\def\separator{\pgfutil at ifnextchar[\msc at separator{\msc at separator[]}}
+\def\msc at separator[#1]#2{
+ \begin{pgfscope}
+ \mscset{#1}
+ \xdef\msc at tempb{[/msc,/tikz/line width=\mscget{line width},mscdash]
+ let \noexpand\p1=(msc at mscdoc@nw), \noexpand\p2=(msc at mscdoc@se) in
+ (\noexpand\x1,#2)--(\noexpand\x2,#2);}
+ \end{pgfscope}
+ \mscset{/msc/draw code/.append code/.expand once={\expandafter\draw\msc at tempb}}
}
-%
-% initialisation of the msc-parameters
-\setmscvalues{normal}
-\setfootcolor{black}
+
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
% Error and help messages
@@ -2989,7 +2986,28 @@
but the nickname is already assigned to another msc object.\MessageBreak
press <enter> to continue (the new msc object will be ignored).}%
}
-%
+%instance already started
+\gdef\msc at instancestarted#1{%
+ \PackageError{msc}{% error message
+ instance #1 is already active}{% help text
+ You tried to create instance '#1' but this instance is \MessageBreak
+ already active. Maybe try to stop it using "stop" command .\MessageBreak
+ press <enter> to continue.}%
+}
+% no such msc reference error
+\gdef\msc at refundefinederr#1{%
+ \PackageError{msc}{% error message
+ undefined reference with nickname: #1}{% help text
+ You used '#1' as an reference nickname, but\MessageBreak
+ there is no reference with that nickname.}%
+}
+% no such msc reference error
+\gdef\msc at inlundefinederr#1{%
+ \PackageError{msc}{% error message
+ undefined inline with nickname: #1}{% help text
+ You used '#1' as an inline nickname, but\MessageBreak
+ there is no inline with that nickname.}%
+}
% no such msc instance error
\gdef\msc at instundefinederr#1{%
\PackageError{msc}{% error message
@@ -2997,39 +3015,39 @@
You used '#1' as an msc instance nickname, but\MessageBreak
there is no msc instance with that nickname.}%
}
-%
-% unknown linestyle error
-\gdef\msc at unknownlinestyleerr#1{%
+% level height is not a positive integer
+\gdef\msc at notpositiveintegerwarn#1#2{%
+ \PackageWarning{msc}{% error message
+ parameter #1.#2 is a float when integer was expected -
+ recovering by advancing by #1+1 levels where last level is scaled by 0.#2}
+}
+\gdef\msc at notpositiveintegererr#1{%
\PackageError{msc}{% error message
- unknown linestyle: #1}{% help text
- Known msc linestyles are "solid", "dashed", and "dotted".\MessageBreak
- You used '#1'.}%
+ Could not parse as number: #1}{% help text
+ The nextlevel should be a positive integer but instead #1 was given.}%
}
-%
+
% unknown region style error
\gdef\msc at unknownregionstyleerr#1{%
\PackageError{msc}{% error message
unknown region style: #1}{% help text
- Known msc region styles are "normal", "coregion", "suspension", and "activation".\MessageBreak
+ Known msc region styles are "coregion", "suspension", and "activation".\MessageBreak
You used '#1'.}%
}
-%
-% unknown self message label position error
-\gdef\msc at unknownselfmessposerr#1{%
+% region not started error
+\gdef\msc at regionnotstartederr#1{%
\PackageError{msc}{% error message
- unknown position for self message: #1}{% help text
- Known positions are "l" (left), "r" (right).\MessageBreak
- You used '#1'.}%
+ no region is started for the instance "#1"}{% help text
+ You tried to end a region for the instance "#1", \MessageBreak
+ but no region has been started.}%
}
-%
-% unknown self message label position error
-\gdef\msc at unknowntimerposerr#1{%
+% region already started error
+\gdef\msc at regionstartederr#1#2{%
\PackageError{msc}{% error message
- unknown timer position: #1}{% help text
- Known timer positions are "l" (left), "r" (right).\MessageBreak
- You used '#1'.}%
+ region #2 is already started}{% help text
+ You tried to start new region for the instance "#1", \MessageBreak
+ while the previous region is still active.}%
}
-%
% unknown self message label position error
\gdef\msc at unknownmscvalueserr#1{%
\PackageError{msc}{% error message
@@ -3037,73 +3055,6 @@
Known sets of msc-values are "normal" and "small".\MessageBreak
You used '#1'.}%
}
-%
-% no such msc reference error
-\gdef\msc at refundefinederr#1{%
- \PackageError{msc}{% error message
- undefined reference: #1}{% help text
- You used '#1' as a reference nickname, but\MessageBreak
- there is no reference with that nickname.}%
-}
-%
-% no such msc inline error
-\gdef\msc at inlundefinederr#1{%
- \PackageError{msc}{% error message
- undefined inline expression: #1}{% help text
- You used '#1' as a inline expression nickname, but\MessageBreak
- there is no inline expression with that nickname.}%
-}
-%
-% inline first right from last error
-\gdef\msc at inlfirstlasterror#1#2#3{%
- \PackageError{msc}{% error message
- first instance right from final instance\MessageBreak in inline expression #1}{% help text
- In the definition of inline expression '#1', you probably switched\MessageBreak
- the first msc instance, '#2', and the final msc instance, '#3',\MessageBreak
- since the first is located right from the final.}%
-}
-%
-% reference first rightt from last error
-\gdef\msc at reffirstlasterror#1#2#3{%
- \PackageError{msc}{% error message
- first instance right from final instance\MessageBreak in reference #1}{% help text
- In the definition of msc reference '#1', you probably switched\MessageBreak
- the first msc instance, '#2', and the final msc instance, '#3',\MessageBreak
- since the first is located right from the final.}%
-}
-%
-\gdef\msc at illegalmarkplacement#1{%
- \PackageError{msc}{%
- illegal mark placement specifier: #1}{% help text
- The four mark placement specifiers are:\MessageBreak
- tl (top-left)\MessageBreak
- bl (bottom-left)\MessageBreak
- tr (top-right)\MessageBreak
- br (bottom-right)}
-}
-\gdef\msc at illegalmesslabelpositionerr#1{%
- \PackageError{msc}{%
- illegal label position specifier: #1}{% help text
- Valid label position specifiers are:\MessageBreak
- t (top)\MessageBreak
- b (bottom)}
-}
-\gdef\msc at illegalselfmesspositionerr#1{%
- \PackageError{msc}{%
- illegal label position: #1}{% help text
- Valid label positions are:\MessageBreak
- t (top)\MessageBreak
- b (bottom)\MessageBreak
- l (left)\MessageBreak
- r (right)}
-}
-\gdef\msc at illegallostfoundlabelpositionerr#1{%
- \PackageError{msc}{%
- in lost/found message: illegal label position: #1}{% help text
- Valid label position are:\MessageBreak
- t (top)\MessageBreak
- b (bottom)}
-}
%################################################################################
%
\gdef\msc at illegaltitleplacement#1{%
@@ -3114,46 +3065,4 @@
c (center)\MessageBreak
r (right)}
}
-%################################################################################
-\gdef\hmsc at nicknamedefinederr#1{%
- \PackageError{msc}{% error message
- nickname #1 already defined}{% help text
- You tried to use the nickname '#1' for a new\MessageBreak
- hmsc object (startsymbol, endsymbol, reference, etc.),\MessageBreak
- but the nickname is already assigned to another hmsc object.\MessageBreak
- press <enter> to continue (the new hmsc object will be ignored).}%
-}
-% no such msc hmsc object error
-\gdef\hmsc at objectundefinederr#1{%
- \PackageError{msc}{% error message
- undefined hmsc object: #1}{% help text
- You used '#1' as an hmsc object nickname, but\MessageBreak
- there is no hmsc object with that nickname.}%
-}%
-% hmsc unknown connection type
-\gdef\hmsc at unknownconnectiontypeerror#1{%
- \PackageError{msc}{% error message
- Unknown HMSC connection type: #1}{% help text
- Known HMSC connection types are straight, rounded, and curved.}%
-}
-%
-% hmsc missing y coordinate in arrow specification
-\gdef\hmsc at missingycoord#1#2{%
- \PackageError{msc}{% error message
- Missing Y coordinate in arrow specification. You typed:\MessageBreak
- [#2]\MessageBreak
- which is parsed as the incomplete list of points:\MessageBreak
- #1\MessageBreak
- Remove the final X coordinate or add an Y coordinate}{%
- The points specifying an HMSC arrow should be given as a comma separated\MessageBreak
- list of X, Y coordinates. Furthermore, each X coordinate should\MessageBreak
- be followed by a Y coordinate.}%
-}
-% remarks
-%
-% Issuing pstricks drawing-commands inside a TeX-group in a pspicture environment
-% can result in ill-positioned objects.
-%
-% messages from/to the right environment should be defined after the last
-% instance is declared with \declinst
-
+%reading /usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/base/latex.ltx
More information about the tex-live-commits
mailing list.